User’s Manual

Factory Tools
P-Tool

EUS1109200
 General Contents

Before using Factory Tools

1. About this manual i

2. Contents of each chapter i

Chapter 1 Creating and editing the board data

1. Overview 1-1

2. Registering and selecting the board name 1-2

2.1 Registering board names 1-2
2.2 Selecting the board data 1-4

3. Creating board data for individual machines 1-5

3.1 Creating new board data for individual machines 1-5
3.2 Selecting board data for individual machines 1-7
3.3 Deleting board data 1-7

4. Creating the board information 1-8

4.1 Board parameters 1-9
4.2 Mount parameters 1-13
4.3 Sequence parameters 1-15
4.4 Offset parameters 1-17
4.5 Fiducial parameters 1-19
4.5.1 Board fiducial function 1-20
4.5.2 Block fiducial function 1-20
4.5.3 Local fiducial functions 1-21
4.6 Using the badmark functions 1-23
4.6.1 Badmark functions 1-23
4.6.2 Setting the Badmark parameters 1-24
4.7 Height parameters 1-26
4.8 Pre-dispense parameters 1-27
4.9 Dot Dispense parameters 1-28

5. Creating the parts information 1-29

5.1 Creating procedure 1-30
5.2 Basic parameters 1-31
5.2.1 Parameter common to machines 1-31
5.2.2 Parameter for machines other than YS Series machines 1-35
5.2.3 Parameter for YS Series machines only 1-36
5.2.4 Editing the ball lead position information 1-37
5.2.5 Datum Ball automatic setting function of Random arrangement Ball 1-39
5.3 Pick parameters 1-41
5.4 Dip parameters 1-44

EUS1109200
5.5 Mount parameters 1-45
5.6 Vision parameters 1-47
5.7 Shape parameters 1-50
5.8 Tray parameters 1-55
5.9 Option parameters 1-66
5.9.1 Alternative components 1-67
5.10 Side-view camera parameters 1-69
5.11 Dispense parameters 1-70

6. Creating the mark information 1-71

6.1 Creating procedure 1-72
6.2 Basic parameters 1-73
6.3 Shape parameters 1-75
6.4 Vision parameters 1-77

7. Using and editing the database 1-79

7.1 Using the database 1-79
7.1.1 Copying data from the database (Set from Database) 1-79
7.1.2 Storing the data into the database (Copy Back to Database) 1-81
7.2 Editing the database 1-84
7.3 Database matching 1-86
7.4 Function of Database matching from board 1-88

8. Editing the board data 1-91

8.1 Block offset 1-91
8.1.1 Pitch distribution 1-91
8.1.2 Pitch distribution of data after offset distribution 1-93
8.1.3 Block distribution 1-95
8.1.4 Block distribution return 1-98
8.2 Editing the parts information 1-99
8.2.1 Moving the data between machines 1-99
8.2.2 Multiplying the parts data 1-100
8.2.3 Renumbering the parts data 1-102
8.3 Creating the sequence data 1-104
8.3.1 Height correction 1-104
8.3.2 Executing the height correction distribution 1-106
8.3.3 Dispense distribution 1-107
8.4 Creating the dot dispense information 1-109
8.4.1 Dispense distribution 1-109
8.5 Data check 1-111

9. Printing the board data 1-113

9.1 Printing the board data 1-113
Chapter 2 Creating solder-print data
1. Registering and selecting the board data 2-1
1.1 Registering a new board data name 2-1
1.2 Selecting the board data 2-3

2. Board data setting 2-4

2.1 Board data detail setting 2-8

3. Mask data setting 2-11

3.1 Mask data detail setting 2-14

4. Squeegee data setting 2-15

4.1 Squeegee detail setting 2-19

5. Cleaner data setting 2-21

6. Creating the mark data 2-23

6.1 Creating procedure 2-24
6.2 Shape parameters 2-26
6.3 Vision parameters 2-28

Chapter 3 Data optimization

1. Starting and quitting the Optimizer 3-1
1.1 Starting the Optimizer 3-1
1.1.1 Starting the Optimizer from the Board Editor 3-1
1.1.2 Starting the Optimizer from the Feeder Viewer 3-2
1.2 Quitting the Optimizer 3-3

2. Optimizer window 3-4

3. Defining the optimizing conditions 3-7

3.1 Checking the information 3-7
3.2 Setting the basic conditions 3-9
3.2.1 Creating Basic Conditions and Registering a Template 3-9
3.2.2 Setting Enforcement Object of “Height difference to permit overtaking” 3-12
3.2.3 Pallet Number Automatic Decision 3-16
3.3 Setting the detailed conditions 3-19
3.4 Common setting 3-23
3.5 Initial setting 3-24
3.6 Specifying the dump station (option) position 3-25
3.7 Set layout of common parts 3-27
3.7.1 Settings 3-28
3.7.2 Auto Distribution Error 3-28
3.7.3 Reporting parts that cannot be the same layout 3-29
3.8 Setting the optimizing conditions for individual board data 3-30
 3.9 Editing the data optimizing conditions 3-33
3.9.1 Editing each file of optimizing conditions 3-33
3.9.2 Editing multiple files of optimizing conditions 3-34

4. Executing data optimization 3-35

4.1 Checking the nozzles 3-38

5. Outputting the feeder setup lists 3-39

6. Changing the line to be optimized 3-41

7. Multi-lane Support 3-42

7.1 Optimize of single combined program 3-42
7.2 Optimize with same kind parts 3-42
7.3 [Set optimization parameters] dialog is extended 3-42
7.4 [Detail] setting is extended. 1 3-43
7.5 [Detail] setting is extended. 2 3-43
7.6 [Detail] setting is extended. 3 3-44
7.7 Result dialog is extended 3-45

Chapter 4 Setup Optimizer

1. About the Setup Optimizer 4-1

2. Executing the Setup Optimizer 4-2

3. Setting the Setup Optimizer sheet 4-5

3.1 Starting the Setup Optimizer sheet 4-5
3.2 Setup Optimizer sheet configuration 4-7
3.3 COMPXPCB worksheet setting 4-10
3.4 StandardTime worksheet setting 4-15
3.5 FeederPlate worksheet setting 4-16
3.6 Nozzle worksheet 4-18
3.7 Executing the Setup Optimizer under the defined conditions 4-19

4. Setting examples on the Setup Optimizer sheet 4-20

4.1 Setting as many feeders as possible 4-20
4.2 Giving priority to the cycle time 4-21

5. Optimizing the board data 4-22

5.1 Optimizing the board currently being set up 4-22
5.2 Optimizing the edited board data 4-24

6. Optimization Monitor 4-25

6.1 Starting the Optimization Monitor 4-25
 6.2 Optimization Monitor sheet configuration 4-27

Chapter 5 ASCII data conversion

1. About ASCII data conversion 5-1

2. Creating board data 5-2

3. Creating a conversion font file 5-10

3.1 Create a new font file 5-10
3.2 Editing a font file 5-30
3.3 Delete / copy a font file and change the font file name. 5-31
3.4 Import of font file. 5-32

4. Miscellaneous 5-34
4.1 How to express the logical formula. 5-34

Chapter 6 Database management

1. Unified database management function 6-1
1.1 Outline of operation 6-1
1.2 Feature of “Unified database management” 6-2
1.2.1 Commonness of database 6-2
1.2.2 Management of database 6-3
1.3 Preparation for “Unified database management” 6-4
1.4 Setting 6-5
1.4.1 Setting of Database Folder 6-5
1.4.2 Setting of [Link] “Use Database” 6-7
1.5 Database collection 6-8
1.5.1 Method of using Database Matching (Database Write from Board) 6-10
1.5.2 Method of using Parts Database Editor 6-12
1.6 Limitations 6-14

2. “Database Synchronize mode” function 6-15

2.1 Introduction 6-15
2.2 Outline of operation 6-16
2.3 Preparation of database 6-20
2.4 Setting 6-23
2.4.1 YG Series or subsequent machine 6-23
2.4.2 Xg Series 6-24
2.4.3 [Link] 6-25
2.4.4 YRS 6-26
2.5 Detailed explanation of operation 6-27
2.5.1 YG Series or subsequent machine 6-27
2.5.2 Xg Series 6-30
2.5.3 [Link] 6-32
2.6 Limitations 6-34
2.6.1 Limitations when beginning to operate 6-34
2.6.2 Other limitations 6-34

3. Unified database management support checklist 6-35

3.1 Introduction 6-35
3.2 Unified database management support checklist 6-36
3.2.1 Database backup 6-36
3.2.2 The path for Unified database management 6-36
3.2.3 Database preparation 6-36
3.2.4 Necessity judgment of “Database Synchronize mode function” 6-36
3.2.5 Database Synchronize mode function is necessary 6-37
3.2.6 Database Synchronize mode function is unnecessary 6-39

4. Series Database 6-40

4.1 Outline of functions 6-40
4.2 Detailed explanation of operation 6-40
4.3 Settings 6-41
4.3.1 Setting method 6-41
4.3.2 Database allocation to each machine 6-42
4.4 Limitations 6-43

5. Shape Database 6-44

5.1 Outline of function 6-44
5.2 To use Shape Database 6-45
5.3 Details of function 6-46
5.3.1 Database Matching by Shape Name / Database Matching from Board by Shape Name 6-48
5.3.2 Set from DATABASE automatically after Board data is read – Referring Parts Shape List 6-48
5.3.3 Making of “Parts / Shape List” 6-48
5.4 Transition Tool of Shape Database 6-49
5.4.1 Outline of function 6-49
5.4.2 To use this function 6-50
5.4.3 Flow of processing and composition of each dialog 6-51
5.5 Registration function of “Parts / Shape List” 6-55
5.5.1 Outline of function 6-55
5.5.2 To use this function 6-55
5.5.3 Outline of operation 6-55
5.5.4 The flow of processing and the composition of each dialog 6-61
5.5.5 New registration 6-65
5.6 Limitations 6-69

6. Additional parameter handling on database 6-70

6.1 Outline of function 6-70
6.2 Details of operation 6-70
6.2.1 Pick Pos. Parameters 6-70
6.2.2 Tray Parameters 6-70
6.2.3 Comment 6-70
6.2.4 Target command 6-71
6.3 Settings 6-72
6.4 Moving existing data 6-73
6.4.1 Reason to prepare to introduce 6-73
6.4.2 How to prepare to introduce 6-74
6.5 Limitations 6-74

7. Parts Database Duplicate Check 6-75

7.1 Outline of function 6-75
7.2 Settings 6-75
7.3 How to setup 6-76
7.3.1 Duplicate Data Check Function 6-76
7.3.2 Error Message and its Counter Measures 6-76
7.4 Limitations 6-80

Index
 Before using Factory Tools

Contents

1. About this manual i

2. Contents of each chapter i

The instruction manual of this machine is written for those who operate
this machine.
Please read this manual carefully for correct operations and pay
special attention to safety precautions.
After reading through this manual, please use this manual as an
occasional reference and keep it within reach.
Microsoft™ and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
1. About this manual

Before using Factory Tools

This manual describes how to create and edit board data (PCB data).
For information on how to install the Factory Tools and how to use each application, please read the "Factory
Tools User's Manual for Standard Functions".
For the operating methods for YAMAHA surface mounters, dispensers and solder paste printers, refer to their
operation manuals that come with the machine shipped to you.

2. Contents of each chapter

This manual consists of the following chapters.

Chapter 1 Creating and editing board data

• Explains how to create and edit board data (PCB data).
• Explains how to use the database and how to edit its data.

Chapter 2 Creating solder-print data

Explains how to create board data and edit various parameters needed for solder printing.

Chapter 3 Data optimization

Explains the methods for distributing and optimizing production line data to enhance manufacturing efficiency.

Chapter 4 Setup Optimizer

Make the board data to severl machines production.

Chapter 5 ASCII data conversion

This optional program converts CAD data or data created by other machines into YGX format data.

Chapter 6 Database management

Explains about database management and operation.

Index
The index listed at the end of this manual helps you quickly find where necessary items are explained.

i
Chapter 1 Creating and editing the board data

Contents

1. Over view 1-1

2. Registering and selecting the board name 1-2

2.1 Registering board names 1-2
2.2 Selecting the board data 1-4

3. Creating board data for individual machines 1-5

3.1 Creating new board data for individual machines 1-5
3.2 Selecting board data for individual machines 1-7
3.3 Deleting board data 1-7

4. Creating the board information 1-8

4.1 Board parameters 1-9
4.2 Mount parameters 1-13
4.3 Sequence parameters 1-15
4.4 Offset parameters 1-17
4.5 Fiducial parameters 1-19
4.5.1 Board fiducial function 1-20
4.5.2 Block fiducial function 1-20
4.5.3 Local fiducial functions 1-21
4.6 Using the badmark functions 1-23
4.6.1 Badmark functions 1-23
4.6.2 Setting the Badmark parameters 1-24
4.7 Height parameters 1-26
4.8 Pre-dispense parameters 1-27
4.9 Dot Dispense parameters 1-28

5. Creating the parts information 1-29

5.1 Creating procedure 1-30
5.2 Basic parameters 1-31
5.2.1 Parameter common to machines 1-31
5.2.2 Parameter for machines other than YS Series machines 1-35
5.2.3 Parameter for YS Series machines only 1-36
5.2.4 Editing the ball lead position information 1-37
5.2.5 Datum Ball automatic setting function of Random arrangement Ball 1-39
5.3 Pick parameters 1-41
5.4 Dip parameters 1-44
5.5 Mount parameters 1-45
5.6 Vision parameters 1-47
5.7 Shape parameters 1-50
5.8 Tray parameters 1-55
5.9 Option parameters 1-66
5.9.1 Alternative components 1-67
5.10 Side-view camera parameters 1-69
5.11 Dispense parameters 1-70

6. Creating the mark information 1-71

6.1 Creating procedure 1-72
6.2 Basic parameters 1-73
6.3 Shape parameters 1-75
6.4 Vision parameters 1-77

7. Using and editing the database 1-79

7.1 Using the database 1-79
7.1.1 Copying data from the database (Set from Database) 1-79
7.1.2 Storing the data into the database (Copy Back to Database) 1-81
7.2 Editing the database 1-84
7.3 Database matching 1-86
7.4 Function of Database matching from board 1-88

8. Editing the board data 1-91

8.1 Block offset 1-91
8.1.1 Pitch distribution 1-91
8.1.2 Pitch distribution of data after offset distribution 1-93
8.1.3 Block distribution 1-95
8.1.4 Block distribution return 1-98
8.2 Editing the parts information 1-99
8.2.1 Moving the data between machines 1-99
8.2.2 Multiplying the parts data 1-100
8.2.3 Renumbering the parts data 1-102
8.3 Creating the sequence data 1-104
8.3.1 Height correction 1-104
8.3.2 Executing the height correction distribution 1-106
8.3.3 Dispense distribution 1-107
8.4 Creating the dot dispense information 1-109
8.4.1 Dispense distribution 1-109
8.5 Data check 1-111

9. Printing the board data 1-113

9.1 Printing the board data 1-113
1. Over view
The board data is indexed by each individual board name. Each board type consists of various information
and parameters as shown below, which can be selected or checked with the item icons in the tree view and
tabs in the main view.
1
This chapter describes basic methods for creating board data so that you will understand what data is
needed for what item. After you have obtained a complete understanding of these methods, begin actual

Creating and editing the board data

work according to the desired method.

Board data structure

Various parameters

Board

Mount

Sequence

Offset

Board Fiducial

Badmark

Height Displacement

Pre Dispense

Dot dispense

Basic

Pick

Board name Parts Dip

Mount

Vision

Shape

Tray

Option

Dispense

Basic

Mark Shape

Vision

63100-S1-00

Reference
Parameters displayed on the Board Editor may slightly differ depending on the specifications.

1-1
 2. Registering and selecting the board name
1 2.1 Registering board names
To create new board data for production, you must first register the board name. There are some methods for
registering a board name.
Creating and editing the board data

1. Registering a new board name

If no basic data is found in the previously registered board data. You should register a new board name with empty data
and then enter necessary data.

2. Utilizing board data already registered

Make a copy of board data which is already registered in the machine.

3. Converting CAD data or other manufacturer's mounter data

After converting CAD data or other manufacturer's mounter data into a standard format, take its coordinate data into the
Factory Tools to create data that can be used with YAMAHA full vision series mounters.

n The following steps explain the procedure in "1. Registering a new board name".

1 Start the Board Editor.

From the Start menu on the Windows taskbar, select "Programs" - "YAMAHA Factory Tools P-Tool" and
then click "Board Editor".

2 Select the line to use.

When the "Select Editing Line" dialog box appears, select the line (production line) to use and click the
[OK] button. The Board Editor window appears.

3 Create new board data.

Select "Create New Board Data" from the File menu or click the [New Board Data] button on the toolbar.

Creating new board data

64100-S1-00

1-2
4 Save the new board data.
1. Select "Save Board Data" from the File menu or click the [Save Board Data] button on the toolbar.
The dialog box appears for selecting the board data.
2. Enter a board name within 20 alphanumeric characters from the keyboard.
Also select the file type from the File Type drop-down list.
3. Check or select the folder in which the board data is saved and click the [Save] button.
1
The registered board name is displayed in the tree view.

Creating and editing the board data

NOTE
A space cannot be included in a board name. Use underbars instead.

c CAUTION
The following characters, numbers and symbols can be used in board data names.
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789_

c CAUTION
An alert dialog box appears if board data with the same name already exists. Use a different name. (If you want to
register the same name by overwriting the previous data, press the [OK] button in the alert dialog box.)

Saving the board data

Enter the board name. Select the file type.

64101-S1-00

Initial screen after new board data has been registered

Registered board name is displayed.

64102-S1-00

1-3
 2.2 Selecting the board data
To select board data from those already registered, proceed as follows.

1 1 Open the board data.

Select "Open Board on This Editor" or "Open Board on New Editor" from the File menu.
The "Board data select" dialog box appears.

Reference
Creating and editing the board data

Clicking the [Open Board on New Editor] button or [Open Board on This Editor] button on the toolbar opens the "Board
data select" dialog box.

Opening the board data

64103-S1-00

2 Select the board name.

When the "Board data select" dialog box appears, place the cursor on the board name you want to
open and click the [Select] button (or directly double-click the board name to open it). The selected
board data will be loaded and the board name displayed in the tree view.

Selected board name

Selected board name is displayed.

64104-S1-00

1-4
 3. Creating board data for individual machines
Board data can be created for individual machines registered in the line.

3.1 Creating new board data for individual machines

1

Creating and editing the board data

1 Start the Board Editor.
From the Start menu on the Windows taskbar, select "Programs" - "YAMAHA Factory Tools P-Tool" and
then click "Board Editor".

2 Select the line to be used.

When two or more lines (production line) are registered, the "Select Editing Line" dialog box appears.
Select the line in which you are going to create new board data and click the [OK] button.
The Board Editor window appears.

Reference
Even when board data is already open and being edited, new board data can be created for individual machines in
the same line. In this case, you do not have to select the line, so proceed to step 3.

3 Select the machine for which you want to create new board data.
Click the machine icon in the tree view.

4 Create new board data for the selected machine.

From the File menu, select "Individual Data" and click "Create New Individual Data".
A new parameter setup screen then appears. Set each parameter. (For how to set each parameter, see
the following sections in this chapter.)

Creating new Board data for individual machine

64105-S1-00

1-5
 5 Save the board data you have created.
1. From the File menu, select "Individual Data" and click "Save Individual Data As".

1
2. When a dialog box for selecting the board data appears, enter the board name in the data Name
box and select the file type from the File Type drop-down list.
3. Check the destination folder and then click the [Save] button.
The parameter setup screen for the newly created board data is displayed.

Saving the board data for selected machine

Creating and editing the board data

Enter the board name.

Select the file type.

64106-S1-00

6 Close the board data setup screen.

From the File menu, select "Individual Data" and click "Close Individual Data". The board data setup
screen closes and returns to the previous screen.

1-6
 3.2 Selecting board data for individual machines
To load and edit board data already registered for individual machines, follow these steps.

1 Open the board data registered for an individual machine.

Select the machine and, from the File menu, select "Individual Data" and click "Open Individual Data".
The "Board data select" dialog box appears.
1
Reference

Creating and editing the board data

You can also select the "Open individual Data" from the context menu that appears when the right mouse button is
clicked on the selected machine.

2 Select the board.

Place the cursor on the board name you want to open and click the [Select] button (or directly double-
click the board name to open it). The selected board data is loaded and displayed on the screen.

Selecting the board data for selected machine

Select the Board name.

64107-S1-00

3.3 Deleting board data

To delete board data registered for individual machines, use the Board Explorer as explained below.

1 Select the board data.

Select the line or machine in the tree view so that the board data to be deleted is displayed in the main
view. Then select the board data to be deleted.

2 Delete the selected board data.

1. Select "Delete" from the Edit menu.

Reference
You can select the "Delete" command from the context menu that appears by clicking the right mouse button.

2. A confirmation dialog box appears.

Click the [Yes] button to delete the selected board data.

1-7
 4. Creating the board information
1 This section describes how to create the board information such as for board size, production methods and
parts (electronic component) mounting positions.

Board information parameters

Creating and editing the board data

Data No. Data No. Data No. Data No.

Pattern Name Pattern Name Pattern Name Pattern Name
Skip Type Type Skip
X, Y, R Skip Note Qty
P. No. X, Y, R X, Y Head
Part Name Mark Sequence
Head X, Y, R
Bad. Mark
Fid. Feedback

Board

Board Size XY Data No. Data No. Data No. Data No.
Board Size Height Pattern Name Pattern Name Comment Pattern Name
Comment Skip Type Mode Skip
Board Fix Device X, Y, R, Z Note Note Qty
Pre Fix Timer Mode X1, Y1 Mark Head
Trans Height No. Mark 1 X, Y Seq. (Sequence)
Conveyor Timer Name X2, Y2 X, Y, R
Alignment Head Mark 2 Fid.
Vacuum Check Bad. Bad.
Retry Sequence Fid.
Precede Pick Height
Tray Priority Seq. (Sequence)
Dot Checking Gr. Start (Group Start)
Refresh Dispense Mnt. Order
Conveyor Motor Speed (Mounting Order)
Running Mode Monitor
Co-Planarity
Conveyor Y Speed
etc.

63101-S1-00

Reference
Parameters displayed on the board Editor may slightly differ depending on the specifications.

1-8
4.1 Board parameters
The board parameter screen opens when you click the board icon in the tree view or the [Board] tab in the
detail view. Set the board parameters by referring to the following description.

Board parameter screen

1

Creating and editing the board data

64108-S1-10

Reference
Parameter items displayed may slightly differ depending on the specifications.

Dual Lane Machine can product with following mount mode.

Mount Mode Feature

Parallel Each head mounts only for each lane.

Alternate Front lane and rear lane are mounted in order.

· It is set automatically when created by combining some single board data according to the parts arrangement.
· It is added to Board Information, but it is not able to edit. It is changed only by optimizer.

Dual Lane Machine can product with following transfer mode.

Transfer Mode Feature

Asynchronous Transfer Each lane decides the timing to start or finish to transfer.

Both lane synchronize the timing to start or finish to transfer.

Synchronous Transfer
It is not used with [Parallel Lanes]. Data check error occurs with both setting.

· It is added to Board Information, it is able to edit.

Mount Mode/Transfer Mode

641C0-S1-00

1-9
 A, B: Board Size XY
Enter the length of the board in the XY directions in millimeters. The conveyor width (W-axis) will be adjusted according

1
to the Y length in automatic operation.
X: Length in the board flow direction
Y: Length in the conveyor width direction

Board orientation
Creating and editing the board data

X [mm]

Board

Y [mm]
Board flow direction

Conveyor rail
63102-S1-00

C: Board Size Height

Enter the thickness of the board in millimeters.
D: Comment
You can enter a comment for the board as necessary.
E: Prod. Board Counter
Enter the number of boards already produced. Set this value to "0" as a start.
F: Prod. Board Count Max.
Enter the number of boards that you want to produce. When this is set to "0", the machine continues to produce boards
as long as they are fed on the conveyor.
G: Prod. Block Counter
Enter the number of blocks on one board when producing multi-block boards.
H: Unloader Counter
Specify the number of boards transferred into the unloader. Set this value to "0" as a start.
I: Unloader Count Max.
Specify the number of boards that can be stored in one rack of the unloader. When the specified number of boards has
been produced and transferred out into the unloader, the machine stops transfer of the production board until the
unloader replaces the rack. If this is set to "0", the machine continues production without checking the number of boards
transferred out into the unloader. Enter "0" in the following cases.
• The unloader being used provides a rack switching signal output.
• This setting data is to be used for the machine just before reflowing.
J: Board Fix Device
Select the proper board clamping method according to the board to be produced.
• “Edge Clamp” :
Board is clamped on the conveyor with the edge clamps, push-in unit and push-up pins, without using the locate pins.
• “Locate Pin” (option) :
Board is clamped on the conveyor only with the locate pins.
• “Pin+PushUP” (option) :
Board is clamped on the conveyor with the locate pins and push-up pins. This is the most accurate and recommended
method.
K: Pre-Fix Timer
The machine begins to clamp the board immediately after it passes above the board sensor installed just before the main
stopper. The optimum clamping timing (delay time with respect to the sensor detection) depends on the board size and
conveyor speed. Use this parameter to set the clamp timing (0.0 to 1.9 sec.).

1-10
L: Trans Height
After components are mounted, the machine permits the conveyor to unload the board when the push-up unit is lowered.

1
If components have already been mounted on the reverse side of the board, the push-up unit must be lowered sufficiently
to avoid interference from push-up pins with those components. This parameter specifies the height of the push-up unit
at which the conveyor is allowed to unload each type of board. Enter the distance in millimeters from the point where
the push-up unit is raised to clamp the board. This distance can be 5 to 50mm.
M: Conveyor Timer

Creating and editing the board data

Set to "0.0" sec. for normal shape boards. If specially configured boards (for example, boards with cutout parts or
through-holes) are used and the exit sensor cannot detect them reliably, try setting this timer in the range of 0.0 to 9.9
sec. The conveyor motor continues turning for the specified time even after the board sensor turns off.
N: Alignment
Set to "UseAlign" to check the image of a component by vision recognition during component pickup.
O: Vacuum Check
Set to "Check" to check whether a component is being picked up, by detecting the vacuum level, as well as checking
with the vision system.
P: Retr y Sequence
The retry sequence when a pickup or recognition error occurs can be selected from the following methods.
• "Group":
Retry is repeated with the head that caused an error, until component mounting specified as one group is complete.
• "Block":
Retry is performed with the head that caused an error after component mounting in one block is complete.
• "Auto":
Retry is performed with any free head after component mounting in one block is complete.
Q: Precede Pick
Set to "NotUse" in most cases. When set to "Use", the head assembly starts moving to pick up and recognize components
as soon as the preceding board has been unloaded and the next board is loaded. This will shorten the cycle time.
R: Tray Priority
When tray components are supplied, set this parameter to "Use" in most cases. Setting "Use" allows the machine to pick
up and mount a tray component according to the supply conditions, so as to shorten the cycle time.
S: Dot Checking
Set to "Use" when using the vision camera to check the dispensing conditions such as remaining quantity of liquid,
nozzle clogging and adhesive strands. These conditions are checked based on the mark No. specified in the pre-dispense
data.
T: Refresh Dispense (auto pre-dispensing)
This function is used with the dot station (option) to maintain uniform dispensing dots, by automatically pre-dispensing
on the dot station.
U: Co-Planarity/3D Co-Planarity
If the machine has an optional lead coplanarity ensor or 3D coplanarity sensor, set to "Use" when using it, or set to
"NotUse" when not using it.
V: Conveyor Y Speed
This parameter specifies the conveyor Y-axis moving speed. If the mounted components move or slide on the board due
to the Y-axis movement, set this parameter to a slower speed.
W: Conveyor method
Select whether to feed a single board or multiple boards at a time. Set to "Single" in most cases.
X: Conveyor Motor Speed
Change this parameter setting if you want to change the conveyor motor speed (board transport speed). The conveyor
motor speed can be increased up to " Standard+50%" (150% of "Standard" speed) or decreased down to "Standard-90%
(10% of "Standard" speed) in 10% steps.
Y: Height before feed-in
Set the maximum height of components already mounted on the board in the previous process.
When the head moves across the board, the head travels at a height higher than this setting so that it does not interfere
with any component on the board.

1-11
 Z: Running Mode
Select "Mount/DotDispense" or "Sequence". Selecting "Mount/DotDispense" enables the [Mount] and [Dot Dispense] tabs

1
on this screen but disables the [Sequence] tab. Conversely, selecting "Sequence" enables the [Sequence] tab but disables
the [Mount] and [Dot Dispense] tabs.
g: Skip Retr y
When a component pickup error or recognition error occurs or components run out, this parameter determines whether
to mount another type of components without retrying the component placement. Set to "Use" when using this function.
Creating and editing the board data

i: Trans Offset U (mm)

During board transfer by the T axis, each stage is usually adjusted to array the transfer line so the T axis lies along the
board center. However, some boards have a contour that is not straight in the center as shown below. This makes it
difficult for the transfer claws to grip the center of boards, causing unstable board transfer. In this case, enter an offset
value from the board center to adjust the transfer line to a position where the transfer claws can grip the boards securely.
Each stage will shift to array the transfer line based on the offset value entered here.

U-axis transfer offset

Set transfer line to this position for stable board transfer.

+
i
Board center Board
-

63103-S1-00

j, k: Trans Offset T1, T2 (mm)

To transfer boards such as shown below, where a center cut-out portion should be gripped by a transfer claw, enter an
offset value equal to the distance from the board outer edge to the cut-out.

T1, T2 axis transfer offset

Right-to-left board flow Left-to-right board flow

j k k j

T1 transfer claw Board T2 transfer claw T2 transfer claw Board T1 transfer claw

+ + + +

63104-S1-00

l: Adjacent interference avoidance

Sets up whether or not to use the adjacent interference avoidance function.
Adjacent interference avoidance function disposes a part and conducts pickup operation again when the pickup position
is far from the center of a part to avoid interference between the nozzle and adjacent part.
Select “Effective” to use the adjacent interference avoidance function or “Ineffective” when not to use.

c CAUTION
If the amount of displacement is not improved after conducting the pickup operation again, it will be judged as
pickup error.
Check parts supply condition and installment of the feeder if pickup error occurs frequently.

Reference
The board data is set as “effective” if it is optimized for conducting nozzle interference check.

1-12
4.2 Mount parameters
The Mount parameter screen opens when you click the Mount icon in the tree view or the [Mount] tab in the
detail view. Set the Mount parameters such as mounting positions and parts No. by referring to the following
description.
Reference
1
Mount parameters are available only when "Running Mode" on the board parameter screen is set to "Mount/
DotDispense".

Creating and editing the board data

Mount parameter screen

1 12

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

64109-S1-20

1. Execute/Skip
Select "Execute" to mount components with this board data or select "Skip" to perform "pass operation" without picking
up and mounting components (head just moves as if to pick up and mount components).
2. Pattern Name
Enter the land pattern name or symbol (for example, R23, U12, etc.) printed on the board.
3. Skip
Mark the check box when you want to skip mounting a component at individual mount points. This check box setting
can be changed when the [Check Box] button is pressed.
4. X,Y
For single boards, enter the XY coordinate data of the center of the mounting position relative to the board origin. For
multi-block boards, enter the position data relative to the reference block. You can also use the teaching function to enter
the XY coordinate data.

Mounting position relative to board origin

Center of mounting position

Block 1 Block 2

Board origin Block repeat No.1

63105-S1-00

1-13
 5. R
Enter the angle through which the component must be rotated after recognition before it is mounted on the board. When

1
the pickup angle is 0 deg., enter the rotating angle from the loading position, with the counterclockwise direction
specified as a positive (+) value when viewed from above. When the pickup angle is 90 deg. or -90 deg., see the table
below.

Mounting angle
Creating and editing the board data

Loading position

Pickup angle 90° -90°

Mounting angle 0°

180° Plus Minus

90° Clock

-90°

63106-S1-00

6. P. No., Part Name

Enter the number (No. on the Parts information screen) of the component to be mounted. The component name will be
input automatically according to the parts No.
7. Table
Shows the component placement table.
8. Head
Enter the head number to be used for mounting.
9. Bad (badmark)
Enter the local badmark number to be used for this mount data. Note that this setting is valid only when necessary data is
input on the [Badmark] tab screen. Enter "0" here when not using the local badmark function.
10. Fid. (Fiducial mark)
Enter the fiducial mark number (point, local or 4-point fiducial) to be used for this mount data. Note that this setting is
valid only when necessary data is input on the [Fiducial] tab screen. Enter "0" here when not using the fiducial function.
11. Original block number
Indicates the block number of the previous position when block expansion is performed.
12. [Check Box] button
Pressing this button allows the Skip column to be edited. Pressing the [Check Box] button again grays out the Skip
column and making changes is no longer possible.

1-14
 4.3 Sequence parameters
The Sequence parameter screen opens when you click the Sequence icon in the tree view or the [Sequence]
tab in the detail view. Set the Sequence parameters such as mounting positions and parts No. by referring to
the following description.
Reference
1
Sequence parameters are displayed depending on the specifications.

Creating and editing the board data

Sequence parameter screen

1 2

3 4 5 6 7

64110-S1-00

1. Z
Use this parameter to specify 3D coordinates. This is effective when you want to perform component mounting or
dispensing more accurately.
2. Mode
Select the desired sequence mode from among "Comp", "Check", "Dot" and "Act". The selected mode is to be used with
the setting in the "Value" column.
• "Comp": Select this mode to perform component mounting or stamping. The setting in the "Value" column refers to the
mark data number.
• "Check": Select this mode to perform dot dispense test or component mount test. The setting in the "Value" column
refers to the component data number.
• "Dot": Select this mode to perform dot dispense. The setting in the "Value" column refers to the liquid quantity.
• "Act": Select this mode to perform special operation (custom order). The setting in the "Value" column refers to the
operation number.

n NOTE
When the operation number in the "Value" column is set to "0", no operation is performed but reference is made.

FID (fiducial mark) recognition, Bad (badmark) recognition and height correction data are all enabled, regardless of the
selected sequence mode.

1-15
 3. Height
Specify the height correction data No. used to make height measurement with a laser displacement meter. The height

1
correction data No. is the sequential No. shown on the [Height] tab.

n NOTE
When using an average of 2-point measurements, enter the No. for "Local-M".

4. Sequence
Creating and editing the board data

When "-1" is specified here, an optimal dispense sequence is automatically selected according to the nozzle type and
quantity of dispensing liquid. Set to "-1" in most cases. (This column is enabled when the sequence mode is set to "Dot".)
5. Gr. Start (Group Start)
Mark the check box when you want to divide a component pickup group or test group into two groups. This is effective
when you want to place components one by one.
6. Mnt. Order (Mounting Order)
Specify the component mounting order here.
7. Monitor
Specify work categories here for the sequence monitor that displays test results according to each work category.
Work categories can be specified from 1 to 10. No action will be performed when "0" is specified. To edit the label for a
work category, press the [Monitor Edit] button. The label can be up to 19 alphanumeric characters.

1-16
4.4 Offset parameters
The Offset parameter screen opens when you click the Offset icon in the tree view or the [Offset] tab in the
detail view. Set the Offset parameters such as offset data for each block relative to the reference block of a
multi-block board consisting of two or more independent printed circuits of the same type. The XY coordinates
of the board origin are also specified here.
1
Offset parameter screen

Creating and editing the board data

2 3 4 5 6 7

64111-S1-10

1. Board Origin
When setting the board origin at a position other than the locate pin as shown below, enter the XY coordinates relative to
the locate pin position.

Board origin

Y Y
Direction of Board flow

5mm 5mm
Front conveyor rail fixed

X X
5mm 5mm

5mm 5mm
Rear conveyor rail fixed

5mm Y

Y 5mm

X X
63107-S1-00

1-17
 When setting the board origin at a position other than the locate pin as shown below, enter the XY coordinates relative
to the locate pin position.

1
Setting Board origin at a position other than locate pin

• Board origin ≠ Locate pin position • Board origin = Board corner

When setting the Board origin
Y at this point, enter "X=5.00" and Y=5.00. Y
Creating and editing the board data

Direction of Direction of
Board flow Board flow

5mm
5mm 5mm
X X
5mm 5mm 5mm
When setting the Board origin at the corner of a
Board in right-to-left flow (with the front rail fixed),
enter "X=-5.00" and Y=-5.00.
63108-S1-00

2. Pattern Name
Enter the block name.
3. Type
The board origin is specified on the top row in the Type column, and block offset data on the second and subsequent rows.
4. Skip
Mark the check box when you want to skip mounting components in individual block. This check box setting can be
changed when the [Check Box] button is pressed.
5. XY
Enter the XY coordinates of the origin in each block relative to the board origin.

XY data
Board origin and reference block origin
Reference block origin
Board origin

Y
X

The reference block origin is at the The reference block origin is not the
same position as the board origin. same position as the board origin.
63109-S1-00

6. R
Enter the rotation angle of each block with respect to the reference block.

R data

Reference block direction

Block
(Block No.1)
Block
Block

Block direction Block

Block

R data 0° 180° 90° -90°

63110-S1-00

7. Original block number

Indicates the block number prior to block expansion.

1-18
 4.5 Fiducial parameters
The Fiducial parameter screen opens when you click the Fiducial icon in the tree view or the [Fiducial] tab in

1
the detail view.
The fiducial function corrects local distortion or warps on a board that may occur from errors in machining the
board outline and locate pin holes and board clamping mechanism fluctuations, by utilizing recognition results
of the fiducial marks provided on the board. Set these parameters as explained below when using the fiducial
function. Two or four fiducial marks are used as a set, and it is okay if each mark is different in shape. Fiducial

Creating and editing the board data

mark data must be registered in the Mark information beforehand. (See section 6, "Creating the mark
information", in this chapter.)

Fiducial mark parameter screen

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1
2
3

64112-S1-10
1. Board, Block, Local
Fiducial functions are broadly classified into three types: "Board" fiducial function specified for a board, "Block" fiducial
function specified for each block of a multi-block board, and "Local" fiducial function related to mounting data. When
using these fiducial functions, select "Use" from the drop-down list.
2. Board
In the top row of the grid display, set the board fiducial mark data.
3. Block
In the second row of the grid display, set the block fiducial mark data.
4. Pattern Name
Enter the fiducial mark name here. (Names cannot be entered on the top and second rows.)
5. Type
On the third or subsequent rows in the Type column, specify the type of fiducial function you want to use, by selecting
from among "Point", "Local", "4Local-M" and "4Local-S".
6. X1, Y1
Enter the XY coordinates of Mark 1 relative to the board origin in millimeter.
7. Mark 1
Enter the mark No. for Mark 1 (mark No. registered as fiducial mark in the Mark information).
8. X2, Y2
Enter the XY coordinates of Mark 2 relative to the board origin in millimeter.
9. Mark 2
Enter the mark No. for Mark 2 (mark No. registered as fiducial mark on the Mark parameter screen). When this mark is
identical with Mark 1, enter "0".

n NOTE
Although you can enter the XY coordinates of each mark by teaching, we recommend using the accurate CAD data
because the fiducial mark settings directly affect the mounting accuracy.

10. Original block number

Indicates the block number of the previous position when block expansion is performed.

1-19
 4.5.1 Board fiducial function
The board fiducial function corrects the positioning error of the entire board by using a pair of fiducial marks.

1
This function is particularly effective in correcting the positioning error caused by board clamping mechanism
fluctuations. As shown in the figure below, a pair of fiducial marks must be diagonally located on the entire
board. Enter the XY coordinates (mm) of Mark 1 and Mark 2 relative to the board origin.

Board fiducial marks

Creating and editing the board data

Mark 2 (X2, Y2)

Mark 1 (X, Y)

Board origin
63111-S1-00

4.5.2 Block fiducial function

The block fiducial function corrects the positioning error of each block on a multi-block board, by using a pair
of fiducial marks provided in the block. This function is also effective in correcting the positioning error caused
by board clamping mechanism fluctuations. As shown in the figure below, a pair of fiducial marks must be
diagonally located in each block. Enter the XY coordinates (mm) of Mark 1 and Mark 2 relative to the board
origin in the reference block.

Block fiducial marks

Mark 1 (X1, Y1)

Mark 2 (X2, Y2)

Reference block origin Block repeat No.2

63112-S1-00

c CAUTION
The block fiducial can only be effective for multi-block board data with "block offset" specified on the Offset
parameter screen.

1-20
4.5.3 Local fiducial functions
There are three kinds of local fiducial functions relating to mount data: "point fiducial", "local fiducial" and

1
"4-point fiducial" functions. These are generally called the local fiducial functions. The local fiducial functions
are used to enhance the local mounting position accuracy of individual mount data, rather than improving the
mounting position accuracy on an entire board or block as is done by the board fiducial or block fiducial
function.
1. Point fiducial function

Creating and editing the board data

The point fiducial function is used to enhance the mounting position accuracy only of a specific component. In general,
as the board size becomes larger, the land pattern layout tends to become inaccurate due to flexing, twist and expansion/
shrinking of the board. Therefore, the point fiducial function is effective when mounting QFP components with a fine
lead pitch on a large board. (Note that the board and block fiducial functions are not effective in this case, although they
are useful in correcting a positioning error caused by the board clamping fluctuations.)
The point fiducial function uses a set of two fiducial marks diagonally located across the land patterns on which you
want to improve mounting position accuracy. It is okay if these two marks are different in shape, but use the same marks
for the same type of component.

Point fiducial marks

Mounting center

Mark 1 (X1, Y1)

Mark 2 (X2, Y2)

63113-S1-00

2. Local fiducial function

The local fiducial function improves the mounting position accuracy of two or more components within a specified area,
by using a pair of fiducial marks. This function is also effective in correcting the mounting position errors when two or
more different types of boards are supplied on the same transfer pallet. The local fiducial marks must be arranged
diagonally across the specified area, but can be different in shape from each other.

Local fiducial marks

Mark 1 (X1, Y1)

Mark 2 (X2, Y2)

Board origin or block offset

63114-S1-00

1-21
 3. 4-point fiducial function
The "4-point fiducial" function is used to enhance the mounting position accuracy by recognizing 4 fiducial marks

1
provided on a board. This function is effective in the following cases.
• Boards with 4 or more fiducial marks which meet the specific conditions
• Large boards
• Boards made of materials which tend to expand, flex or warp (paper phenol, paper, glass epoxy, other flexible
materials).
Creating and editing the board data

The 4-point fiducial data settings are basically the same as those for point fiducial and local fiducial marks. However,
because the 4-point fiducial function requires 4 XY coordinate points, you must use two data rows ("4Local-M" and
"4Local-S") on the [Offset] tab in order to register one set of 4- point fiducial marks.

4-point fiducial marks

Mark 4
(200, 200)
Mark 3
(50, 150)

Mark 1 Mark 2
(0, 0) (50, 10) (200, 10)

Board origin
63115-S1-00

1-22
 4.6 Using the badmark functions

1
4.6.1 Badmark functions
The badmark function permits the machine to cancel component mounting if the machine detects a badmark
affixed to the specified position on a board.

Badmark function

Creating and editing the board data

The machine mounts components when no badmarks are detected.

The machine skips mounting components when a badmark is detected.

63116-S1-00

Badmarks are broadly classified into two types: one is specified for the board data and the other is for the
mount data. These badmarks are further divided by their functions into "Board badmark", "Block badmark" and
"Local badmark".
■ Board badmark
A board badmark is affixed on a board and used to determine whether or not the machine searches for block badmarks
on the board. For example, when a multi-block board with no faulty blocks (no block badmarks) is fed to the machine, it
is a loss of time to search for block badmarks on that board. The board badmark function permits the machine to search
for block badmarks only when the board badmark is detected. If no board badmark is detected, the machine mounts
components on all blocks of the board without searching for block badmarks.

■ Block badmark
A block bad mark is affixed to each block which is defective. The machine mounts components only on blocks with no
badmark affixed. For example, if Block B is defective in a multi-block board consisting of 4 blocks (A, B, C and D), affix
a block badmark on Block B so that the block badmark function allows the machine to skip mounting on Block B.
Components will be mounted only on Blocks A, C and D.

c CAUTION
The block badmark function can only be used for multi-block board data with "block offset" specified on the Offset
tab screen.

■ Local badmark
The local badmark function cancels component mounting by recognizing a badmark specified at a mounting point.

1-23
 ■ Badmark operation
The flow chart below shows typical methods for setting a board badmark and block badmark.

1 Badmark operation flows

Start
Creating and editing the board data

Search board badmark

Detected Not detected

Search block badmark

Detected Not detected

Operation Operation Operation

not performed for performed for performed for
the block the block all blocks
63117-S1-00

4.6.2 Setting the Badmark parameters

The Badmark parameter screen opens when you click the Badmark icon in the tree view or the [Badmark] tab
in the detail view. Set the Badmark parameters as explained below when using the badmark function. Two or
four badmarks are used as a set, and it is okay if each mark is different in shape. Badmark mark data must be
registered in the mark information beforehand. (See section 6, "Creating the mark information", in this chapter.)

Badmark parameter screen

4 5 6 7 9

1 8
2
3

64113-S1-10

1. Board, Block, Local

Badmark functions are broadly classified into three types: "Board" badmark function specified for a board, "Block"
badmark function specified for each block of a multi-block board, and "Local" badmark function related to mounting
data. When using these badmark functions, select "Use" from the drop-down list.
2. Board
In the top row of the grid display, set the board badmark data.
3. Block
In the second row of the grid display, set the block badmark data.

1-24
 4. Pattern Name
Enter the badmark name here. (No names can be entered on the top and second rows.)

1
5. Type
Badmark function types are specified here. (These cannot be changed.)
6. X1, Y1
Enter the XY coordinates of the badmark relative to the board origin in millimeters
7. Mark

Creating and editing the board data

Enter the mark No. for the badmark (mark No. registered as mark in the mark information).
8. Sort
If you want to set the direction to search for badmarks on a multi-block board, select the Tool menu, point "Badmark"
and click "Sort". The following dialog box then appears.
Reference
This function is available depending on the specifications.

Dialog box for setting the badmark search direction

64114-S1-00

• Sort
Select "No sort" or "Near mark".
• Starting Point
Select the position of a local badmark that should be first recognized.
• Prior Direction
Set the badmark search direction on a multi-block board.

Badmark search direction

Starting point: Front left
When "Prior Direction" is set to "X-direction" When "Prior Direction" is set to "Y-direction"

: Badmark

63118-S1-00

n NOTE
The Badmark parameters do not change even when the above settings for the search direction have been made.
These settings will be applied to the board data when production starts.

9. Original block number

Indicates the block number of the previous position when block expansion is performed.

1-25
 4.7 Height parameters
The Height parameter screen opens when you click the Height icon in the tree view or the [Height] tab in the

1 detail view. Refer to the following description when setting the Height parameters such as the positions and
methods for measuring the height with a laser displacement sensor.
Reference
Height parameters are displayed depending on the specifications.
Creating and editing the board data

Height parameter screen

1 2 3 4

64115-S1-00

1. Comment
Type any desired comment on the task as necessary.
2. Mode
Make the setting according to the number of height measurement points.
• When measuring 1 point, set to "Local-M".
• When measuring 2 points to take an average, make the settings in 2 rows. Set the first row to "Local-M" and the second
row to "Local-S".
3. Mark
Enter the mark number used to correct the height of mark parameters.
4. X,Y
Set the X and Y coordinates (relative to Head 1) to be measured.

1-26
4.8 Pre-dispense parameters
The Pre-dispense parameter screen opens when you click the Pre-dispense icon in the tree view or the [Pre-
dispense] tab in the detail view.
Pre-dispensing should usually be used before performing actual dot dispensing in order to apply a uniform and
correct quantity of dispensing liquid. Set or check the Pre-dispense parameters by referring to the following
1
description.
Reference

Creating and editing the board data

Pre-dispense parameters are displayed depending on the specifications.

Pre-dispense parameter screen

3 4 5 6 7

64116-S1-00

1. Pre-dispense item
Set whether to perform pre-dispensing. To perform pre-dispensing on the dot station, select "OnDotStation" from the
drop-down list.
2. Skip
Set whether to perform pre-dispensing at individual pre-dispensing points. The display changes to "Run (check box is
cleared)", "Skip (check box is marked)" and "Check" each time the check box is clicked. Specify the following items when
set to "Check". This setting can be changed when the [Check Box] button is pressed.
• XY: The head moves to the specified XY position to perform vision recognition.
• Head: Performs pre-dispensing with the specified head.
• Mark: Set the mark number used to check the shape of dispensed dots.
3. Qty
Set the quantity of pre-dispensing liquid.
4. Sequence
When "-1" is specified here, an optimal dispense sequence is automatically selected for the pre-dispensing operation
according to the nozzle type and quantity of dispensing liquid. Set to "-1" in most cases.
5. X, Y, R
Set the pre-dispensing coordinates so the dispensed dots do not overlap with each other.
6. Mark
Enter the mark number to use for checking the dispensing dot. When the Skip column is set to "Check", the dispensed dot
condition will be checked with the mark data specified here. If not necessary to check the dispensed dot condition, set to
"0" here. This parameter setting will be ignored unless the Skip column is set to "Check".
7. Feedback
Mark the check box to correct the dispensing dot size by recognizing it with the vision camera.

1-27
 4.9 Dot Dispense parameters
The Dot Dispense parameter screen opens when you click the Dot Dispense icon in the tree view or the [Pick]

1 tab in the detail view. Set the Dot Dispense parameters by referring to the following description.
Reference
Dot dispense parameters are displayed depending on the specifications.

Reference
Creating and editing the board data

Dot dispense information can be automatically created by executing "dispense distribution" (See section 8.4.1,
"Dispense distribution", in this chapter.)

Dot Dispense parameter screen

1 2 3 4 5 6

64117-S1-00

1. Skip
Mark the check box when you want to skip dispensing at individual points. This check box setting can be changed when
the [Check Box] button is pressed.
2. Qty
Set the quantity of dot dispensing liquid.
3. Sequence
When "-1" is specified here, an optimal dispense sequence is automatically selected for the dot dispensing operation
according to the nozzle type and quantity of dispensing liquid. Set to "-1" in most cases.
4. X, Y, R
Set the dot dispensing coordinates so the dispensed dots do not overlap with each other.
5. Fid.
Enter the fiducial mark number to use for dot dispensing. Set to "0" when not using the fiducial function.
6. Bad.
Enter the badmark number to use for dot dispensing. Set to "0" when not using the badmark function.

1-28
5. Creating the par ts information
This section explains how to create parts data (component data). Parts data consists of various parameters
for each parts name registered as illustrated below. A convenient way to set these parameters is to copy
sample data of a similar type and shape from the database and then edit only those parameters that are
1
different. Methods for setting parts information parameters are explained according to major parts types that
are most frequently used.

Creating and editing the board data

Parts information parameters

Alignment Group Dipping Action Alignment Module: Fore, Back Required Nozzle
Alignment Type Station No. Light Main, Coax, Side Dispense Nozzle
Required Nozzle Dip. Descent Sequence Lighting Level Dispense Unit
Package Dip. Descent Speed Auto Threshold Ref. Pos. XY
Feeder Type Dip. Lowend Height Comp. Threshold Dot Extent XY
(Pitch Index) Dip. Lowend Timer Comp. Tolerance Dot Amount XY
Dump Way Dip. Rising Sequence Search Area Angle Offset
Retry Times Dip. Rising Speed Datum Angle
(Conveyor Y Speed) Force Control Comp. Intensity
Database Number Target Load Multi MACS Side View Camera
Category Bring Back Check
etc. Part Thickness
Reverse Check
Alternative Parts
Parts Group No.
Use Feeder Optimize

Parts

Feeder Set Pos. Mount Height (Alignment Group) (Package)

Position Definition Mount Timer (Alignment Type) (Feeder Type)
X, Y Mount Speed Body Size XY Comp Amount XY
Pick Angle XY Speed Body Size Z Comp Pitch XY
Pick Height Pick&Mount Vacuum Check Ruler Offset Current Pos. XY
Pick Timer Mount Vacuum Ruler Width Unit No.
Pick Speed Mount Start Lead Number Tray Height
XY Speed Mount Action Lead Width
Pick&Mount Vacuum Check Mount Tango ReflectLL Wafer Nozzle Type
Pick Vacuum Mount Down etc. Wafer Dimension
Pick Start Mount Up Wafer Diameter
Pick Action Force Control Ring Diameter
Pick Tango Target Load Wafer Angle
Pick Down etc. Comp. Pitch XY
Pick Up Pallet No.
Force Control Mark For Comp
Target Load Retry Comp Mark
etc. etc.

64118-S1-00

Reference
The particular parameters that actually appear enabled will differ somewhat depending on the selected parts type
and package style.

1-29
 5.1 Creating procedure
Click the Basic icon under the Parts icon in the tree view to open the parts information parameter screen. First

1 enter the parts name and then set various parameters as explained in the steps below.

1 Click the Basic icon under the Parts icon in the tree view to open the parts
parameter screen.
Parts parameter screen
Creating and editing the board data

Step 6 Step 2 Step 3

Step 1

Step 4
64119-S1-00

2 Enter the component name in the Part Name column.

Enter for example the name printed on the tape reel or on the parts body within 19 alphanumeric
characters. A space cannot be included in the name.

3 Enter a comment.
Type any desired comment in the Parts Comment column as necessary. Entering comments here is
optional.

4 Set the parameters.

While selecting the [Basic], [Pick], [Mount], [Vision], [Shape] tabs and so forth, set the necessary
parameters in the lower right area. (Refer to the following sections for how to set the parameters.)

5 Repeat the above steps for other parts.

Repeat the same procedure from step 2 to register all parts to be mounted on the board.

6 Save the data.

Select "Save Board Data" from the File menu or click the [Save Bard Data] button on the toolbar to store
the data.

1-30
5.2 Basic parameters
The Basic parameter screen opens when you click the Basic icon in the tree view or the [Basic] tab in the
detail view. Set the basic parameters for each part (electronic component) to be mounted.

Basic parameters
1

Creating and editing the board data

64120-S1-10

Reference
Some parameters may not be available depending on the specifications.

5.2.1 Parameter common to machines

A: Alignment Group
Select from "Chip", "Ball", "IC", "Connector" or "Special".
B: Alignment Type
Specify the type of component by referring to the descriptions below.

■ Chip
• [Link] (Standard chip)
This setting does not identify the component, but detects the four corners of the component and then calculates the
center and angle of the component. Select this setting first when recognizing box type chips. If the component cannot
be recognized by this setting, try using "[Link]" or "Small Chip".
• Melf Chip
This is specially for Melf chips.
• Bare Chip
This is specially for bare chips.
• Cylinder
This is suited for components with a cylindrical shape and no direction.
• [Link] (Special chip)
This setting has a parameter used to recognize "Lead Width" in addition to the "[Link]" setting. Select this item to
recognize box type chips which cannot be recognized correctly by the "[Link]" setting. If it is still difficult to
recognize the component by this setting, try with "Odd.2Ends".
• Small Chip
This is suited for small chip components such as 0603 whose light-reflecting area is smaller than the actual size.

1-31
 ■ Ball
• Simple BGA

1
This is specially for BGA components. The number of ball leads can be checked, but the ball lead positions and nicks
are not checked.
• BGA
This is specially for BGA components. The ball lead positions can be edited to check the lead positions and nicks.
• Simple FlipChip
Creating and editing the board data

This is specially for flip chip components.

• FlipChip
This is specially for flip chip components and allows editing ball leads randomly.
■ IC
• 2Ends
This mode has a parameter used for recognizing the lead width and length by using "LeadWidth" and "ReflectLL." in
addition to the "[Link]" mode. This mode is suitable for recognizing box type chips which cannot be recognized by
"[Link]" or "[Link]".
• Mini Tr/SOT
This mode is for mini mold components with the same shape leads in the N and S direction, but whose number of
leads in each direction is different.
• P-Tr
This mode is for components having leads in the N and S direction, and whose number of leads in each direction is
different like "Mini-Tr/SOT", and also the shape of opposing leads is different.
• SOP
This is for components having the same shape leads and same number of leads in the E and W direction, and whose
leads protrude out from the molded body.
• SOJ
This is for components having the same shape leads and same number of leads in the E and W direction like "SOP",
but whose leads do not protrude out from molded body.
• QFP
This is for components having the same shape leads in four directions of N, S, E and W, and the same number of
oppositely positioned leads (N to S and E to W), and whose lead protrudes out from molded body.
• PLCC
This is for components having the same shape leads in four directions of N, S, E and W, and the same number of
oppositely positioned leads (N to S and E to W) like "QFP", but whose leads do not protrude out from molded body.
• OffLead
This is used for components which can be defined by "Con-NSEW" but some of the leads are removed. Enter this
setting for each direction.
■ Connector
• Con-E (Connector E)
This is for components having the same leads only in the E direction.
• Con-NSEW (Connector NSEW)
This setting is suited for components having leads in four directions of N, S, E and W, but the number of leads and
their shape in each direction are different. Only one type of lead shape can be set for each direction.
• [Link]
Use this setting for connectors suitable for "Con-E" having off leads.

1-32
■ Special
• Special

1
This can be used for components having irregularly arranged leads. For example, components having leads in four
directions of N, S, E and W like "Con-NSEW", but whose number of leads and the shape in each direction are different.
Although "Con-NSEW" allows setting only one type of lead shape in each direction, "Special" allows setting two types,
making it usable for various components with irregular shapes. This setting cannot be used with the lead coplanarity
function.

• [Link]

Creating and editing the board data

This setting automatically determines whether to recognize a component as "white" or "black", making it suited for
components such as bare chips which are difficult to judge as reflective or non-reflective against the background
(Board). This mode is also suitable for BGA components with a light reflective portion on the body.
• AsMark
This setting recognizes components as a mark and is therefore suited for specially shaped components.
• Sp. Quad
This is used for square or rectangular components which reflect light at the four sides of the package making it difficult
to distinguish the leads from the package.
• Gravity
This detects the center-of-gravity of a target (black or white) in the specified area, allowing reliable recognition of
various components with irregular shapes. When using this setting, test-mount the component after setting the data,
and check the mounting shift (distance from center of mounting position to center of the component). Then enter the
shift amounts in "Cntr. Offset XYR" of the Shape parameters.
• Ignore
This does not perform image processing.
C: Required Nozzle
Select the optimum nozzle that matches the component size from among the nozzle types for chip components. When
the parameter values are copied from the YAMAHA database, use the default setting.
D: Package
Select the type of component feed.
• "Tape"
Select this setting when using a tape feeder which supplies components on paper tape, embossed tape or adhesive
tape.
• "Bulk"
Select this setting when using a bulk cassette feeder.
• "Stick"
Select this setting when using a stick feeder such as a single stick feeder, multi-stick feeder, staked stick feeder and
high-speed stick feeder.
• "Tray"
Select this setting when using a tray feeder such as a manual tray feeder, auto tray stacker, external tray changer and
wafer tray changer.

1-33
 G: Dump Way
This specifies the location where a component will be dumped if an error such as recognition error has occurred. Set to

1
"Dump POS" for chip components and small components. When tray components are used, set to "Sp. Dump Back" to
return them back to the tray. When a QFP dump station (option) is used, set to "station".
H: Retr y Times
This determines how many times the machine will retry the same operation if an error such as a recognition error has
occurred. The number of retries can be set from "NO RETRY" to "14". When this retry setting is greater than the machine
Creating and editing the board data

data retry setting, the machine data has priority.

I: Conveyor Y Speed
This parameter specifies the conveyor Y-axis speed. If components move or slide just after mounted on the board due to
the Y-axis movement, set this parameter to a lower speed.
Four speeds are available: "FAST", "MIDDLE", "SLOW" and "VERY SLOW".
J: Database number
Shows the database number when the parameter values were copied from the database.
When you want to copy the parameter values from the database, click the [Database] button on the toolbar to open the
database list. Then select the copy source data and press the [Set] button to make a copy.

Parts (electronic component) database list

64121-S1-00

Reference
For details on the database, see section 7, "Using and editing the database", in this chapter.

L: Categor y
Use the default setting "Normal" to perform component mounting or dipping. When you want to perform stamping, select
"Stamp".
M: FixCmpRef.
Set this parameter to "0" in normal operation. Enter fixed component numbers here only when used.

1-34
5.2.2 Parameter for machines other than YS Series machines
E: Feeder Type
Select the specific feeder type to be used for component supply. Selectable items differ depending on the Package
parameter setting. Refer to the table below to make a selection.

n Feeder Type settings

1
When "Package" is set to "Tape"

Creating and editing the board data

Comp. Feeder Type
Tape feeder or bulk cassette feeder type
Package setting setting

8mmTape 8mm tape feeder (except for 1005 chip)

8mm1005cmp 8mm tape feeder (for 1005 chip)

12mmEmboss 12mm tape feeder (standard pitch)

12mmLongPitch 12mm tape feeder (long pitch)

16mmEmboss 16mm tape feeder

24mmEmboss 24mm tape feeder

32mmSticky 32mm air-driven feeder with sticky tape

Tape
32mmEmboss 32mm embossed air-driven feeder

44mmEmboss 44mm embossed air-driven feeder

56mmEmboss 56mm embossed air-driven feeder

Select these settings when using a tape feeder other than the above.
Note that you must make necessary settings on the <3/1/A5 FEEDER
Tape-A to D
SPEC. INF> screen. For the setting procedure, refer to the mounter
service manual.

Spear1 to 10

8mm0603cmp 8mm tape feeder (for 0603 chip)

* Select "12mmLongPicth" when using both CL type feeders and FV type feeders.

n Feeder Type settings

When "Package" is set to "Bulk"

Comp. Feeder Type

Tape feeder or bulk cassette feeder type
Package setting setting

Bulk-1005C Bulk feeder for 1005 capacitors. Marked "1005 C" on the feeder.

Bulk-1005R Bulk feeder for 1005 resistors. Marked "1005 R" on the feeder.

Bulk-1608C Bulk feeder for 1608 capacitors. Marked "1608 C" on the feeder.

Bulk-1608R Bulk feeder for 1608 resistors. Marked "1608 R" on the feeder.

Bulk feeder for 2125 capacitors (chip thickness 0.6mm). Marked "2125
Bulk-T0.6C
T0.6" on the feeder.

Bulk-T0.6R Bulk feeder for 2125 resistors. Marked "2125 T0.6" on the feeder.

Bulk feeder for 2125 capacitors (chip thickness 1.25mm). Marked "2125
Bulk-T1.25C
Bulk T1.25" on the feeder.

HopBulk-1005C Hopper bulk feeder for 1005 capacitor

HopBulk-1005R Hopper bulk feeder for 1005 resistor

HopBulk-1608C Hopper bulk feeder for 1608 capacitor

HopBulk-1608R Hopper bulk feeder for 1608 resistor

HopBulk-T0.6 Hopper bulk feeder for 2125 chip components (chip thickness 0.6mm)

HopBulk-T0.8 Hopper bulk feeder for 2125 chip components (chip thickness 0.8mm)

HopBulk-T1.25 Hopper bulk feeder for 2125 chip components (chip thickness 1.25mm)

1-35
 5.2.3 Parameter for YS Series machines only
E: Feeder type

1 Displays the device that supplies parts. This parameter is automatically set if “R: Tape type” is set.
F: Feed pitch
Selects the feed pitch from the drop-down list box.

n NOTE
Creating and editing the board data

This parameter is not shown when the feeder pitch operation is set to “feeder setup”.

P: Feed speed
Selects how fast the tape is fed from the drop-down list box.
Q: Reel diameter size
Specifies the reel diameter of a tape. (This parameter will be shown only when the “R: Tape type” is set to “8 mm tape”.
Select either “7 inch” or “Large type (7 inch or over)”. The option set in this parameter is used for judgment of reel
location check when optimization is conducted.
Reference
7-inch diameter reel with 8 mm tape can be positioned on either the upper or lower part of the carriage reel holder
while large type reel (7 inch or over) can be positioned on the lower part of the carriage reel holder only. The reel can
be positioned on only the lower part of the carriage reel holder in case of parts on a tape other than 8 mm tape.

R: Tape type
Select an option if Component Package Setting is set to “Tape”.
Select a tape type from the drop-down list box. “E: Feeder type” will be automatically set when a tape type is selected.
Select an option referring to the following table.

Comp. Package
Tape type Feeder type Type of component feeder
setting
8 mm tape feeder (including device for 8 mm 1005,
Tape 8 mm tape 8 mm tape
0603 chip)

12 mm tape 12 mm long pitch 12 mm tape feeder (including 12 mm emboss)

16 mm tape 16 mm emboss 16 mm tape feeder

24 mm tape 24 mm emboss 24 mm tape feeder

32 mm tape 32 mm emboss 32 mm embossed tape feeder

44 mm tape 44 mm emboss 44 mm embossed tape feeder

56 mm tape 56 mm emboss 56 mm embossed tape feeder

72 mm tape 72 mm emboss 72 mm embossed tape feeder

Set when using a tape feeder other than the above

ones.
Tape A to D Tape A to D Note that you must make necessary settings of the
“feeder spec information” in advance to use the
setting.

Spare 1 to 10 Spare 1 to 10

1-36
 5.2.4 Editing the ball lead position information
Ball lead position information can be edited to improve accuracy in recognizing the ball leads that are

1
randomly arranged on ball lead components such as CSP and micro BGA. To edit the ball lead position
information, "Alignment Type" in the Basic parameters must be set to "BGA" or "Flip Chip".

1. When "Alignment Type" is set to "BGA"

1 Open the ball lead position edit screen.

Creating and editing the board data

Click the [Ball Edit] button on the toolbar. The BGA edit screen opens.

2 Edit the ball lead position data.

On the BGA edit screen, edit the ball lead position data so that it matches the actual ball lead
arrangement. The ball lead display should be set to ON (dark color) at positions where there are ball
leads and to OFF (light color) where there are no ball leads. To switch ON or OFF, place the mouse on
the target lead and double-click the mouse button or click the [Set] or [Reset] button.

BGA edit screen

Number of balls being edited

Position currently being edited

[Set] button

[Reset] button

[Reverse] button

64122-S1-00

3 Register the edited data.

When you have edited the ball lead position data, click the [OK] button to register it.

1-37
 2. When "Alignment Type" is set to "Flip Chip"

1 Open the Random Ball Edit dialog box.

1 Click the [Ball Edit] button on the toolbar to open the Random Ball Edit dialog box.

Random Ball Edit dialog box

Creating and editing the board data

64123-S1-10

2 Define the reference ball lead positions.

As the drawing below shows, define the ball leads located as close as possible to the top right, top left,
bottom right and bottom left, as the reference ball leads. It is not important which ball lead you select
here. In the Random Ball Edit dialog box, specify the reference ball leads as 0 to 7.

Reference ball lead positions

Y+
b: Reference ball leads
b1
b0 b6
b4

X− X+

b5 b7

b2 b3

Y−
63150-S1-00

n NOTE
Ball leads other than the reference ball leads should be specified as "---".

3 Enter the coordinates of each reference ball lead.

Enter accurate XY coordinates of each reference ball lead relative to the center of the component.

4 Enter the ball lead size.

Enter the ball lead diameter in the "C: Std. Ball Diameter" parameter in the Random Ball Edit dialog box.
This diameter setting will be applied by default to all registered ball leads.

5 Save the data.

When you have edited the random ball lead data, click the [OK] button to save it.

Reference
When you want to copy or delete a row in the Random Ball Edit dialog box, click the right mouse button on the target
row to display the context menu (right-click menu) and select the command from the menu.

1-38
5.2.5 Datum Ball automatic setting function of Random arrangement Ball

n About Random Ball Edit Screen

If the [Auto] button is clicked when it is in the state where Ball information was inputted, the Datum Ball is
decided automatically and the Datum Ball position is updated. 1
Datum Ball Position

Creating and editing the board data

Datum Ball Position

[Auto] button
64187-S1-10

Datum Ball Position

When it is able to set up automatically,

the Datum ball position is updated.

64188-S1-00

1-39
 If the [Auto] button is pushed when it is in the state where the Datum Ball was set up, the Ea928:Conform
Datum Ball Auto Set screen is displayed.

1 Conform Datum Ball Auto Set screen

Creating and editing the board data

64189-S1-00

Ea929: Datum Ball Auto Set Error is displayed when the Datum Ball is not able to be set up automatically.
In this case, please set up manually.

Datum Ball Auto Set Error

64190-S1-00

The generating conditions of Ea929: Datum Ball Auto Set Error

• When Ball information is less than 4 points

1-40
5.3 Pick parameters
The Pick parameter screen opens when you click the Pick icon in the tree view or the [Pick] tab in the detail
view. Set the Pick parameters by referring to the following description.

Pick parameters
1

Creating and editing the board data

64124-S1-00

Reference
Some parameters may not be available depending on the specifications.

A: Feeder Set No.

Enter the feeder set number of the position on the feeder plate (feeder knockpin position) at which the feeder is installed.
This parameter setting is unnecessary when the "Use feeder optimize" parameter is set to "Yes". When using an MTF
(manual tray feeder), enter the feeder set number near a position at which the MTF is installed on the feeder plate. When
using an auto/external tray changer, use the default setting.
B: Position Definition
Set to "Automatic" when the "Package" parameter is set to "Tape" or "Bulk". (The component pickup position will be
calculated automatically.) Set to "Teaching" when stick feeders or tray feeders are used.
C, D: XY (pickup position)
Enter the position at which the head picks up the component from the feeder. These parameters are skipped when the
Position Definition parameter is set "Automatic".
E: Pick Angle (deg)
• This parameter specifies the angle through which the mounter head rotates to pick up a component on the feeder. This
setting determines the orientation of the component (recognition reference) when it is recognized and displayed on the
operation monitor. Normally, set this parameter to 0 degrees for horizontally long components in the loading position
on the feeder, and set to 90 degrees for vertically long components.
• When using a bulk cassette feeder, always set this parameter to 90 degrees.
• The pickup angle for transistors must be specified so that their leads face the NS directions. Set this parameter to 0
degrees for vertically long components in the loading position on the feeder, and set to 90 degrees for horizontally
long components. Select the correct pickup angle by referring to the table below.
• The pickup angle for SOP components must be specified so that their leads face the EW directions. Set this parameter
to 0 degrees for horizontally long components in the loading position, and set to 90 degrees for vertically long
components. Select the correct pickup angle by referring to the table below.
• The pickup angle of connectors must be specified so that their leads face the E direction. Select the correct pickup
angle according to the loading position of the component as shown in the following tables.

1-41
 Pick Angle (deg)

1
Chip Melf

E N E N
Loading position S N E W Loading position S N E W
W S W S

Pickup angle 0o 90o Pickup angle 0o 90o

Creating and editing the board data

SOP QFP

E N E N
Loading position S N E W Loading position S N E W
W S W S

Pickup angle 0o 90o Pickup angle 0o 90o

Mini-mold transistor

N N
Recognition
reference
S S

Loading position

Pickup angle 0o 90o 0o 90o

Connector E
N
Recognition
E W
reference
S

Loading position

Pickup angle 0o 180o 90o -90o

63119-S1-10

F: Pick Height (mm)

This is the Z-axis height offset value used when the head lowers to pick a component. Set this parameter to "0.0" in
normal operation.
If you want to lower the Z-axis height during component pickup, enter a positive (+) value in the Pick Height field.
Conversely, if you want to raise the Z-axis height, enter a negative (-) value.
G: Pick Timer
This parameter specifies the time duration (in seconds) for which the head stays in the lowered position after detecting
the reference pickup vacuum pressure when picking up a component. For small components such as chip components, it
is okay to set this parameter to "0.00". (The setting value applies to the external tray changer when connected.)
H: Pick Speed (%)
This is the Z-axis speed when the head moves down to pick up a component. Set this parameter to 100 (%) in most cases.
If you want to reduce the speed, enter a smaller value.
I: XY Speed (%)
This is the speed at which the head moves in the XY directions to pick up and mount a component. Set this parameter to
100 (%) in most cases. If you want to reduce the speed, enter a smaller value.
J: Pick&Mount Vacuum Check
Set this parameter to "NORMAL CHK" in most cases. If you want to check pickup errors and mount errors more strictly
(erroneous head return without mounting the component), set to "SPECIAL CHK".
For example, when using QFP or BGA components and you want to check pickup errors and mount errors (erroneous
head return without mounting the component) more strictly, set this parameter to "SPECIAL CHK".

n NOTE
When the Pick&Mount Vacuum Check parameter is set to "NORMAL CHK", the machine controls the ascent timing of
the head from the lowered position during component pickup or mounting. This parameter setting is valid only when
the Vacuum Check parameter on the [Board] tab screen is set to "Check".

1-42
K: Pick Vacuum
This is the reference vacuum pressure used for checking the pickup vacuum level. Use the default setting and adjust it as

1
needed in the Parts Adjust mode.
L: Pick Timing
This parameter specifies the timing to start vacuum generation when the head picks up a component. When set to
"Normal", vacuum generation starts before the head moves down. When set to "Bottom", vacuum generation start after
the head has moved down. Set this parameter to "Normal" in most cases.
M: Pick Action

Creating and editing the board data

This specifies the nozzle descent movements during component pickup or mounting. Set this parameter to "Normal" in
most cases. Setting this parameter to "DETAIL" allows you to set the Pick Tango, Pick Down and Pick Up parameters. For
BGA components, set this parameter to "QFP".
N: Pick Tango
Set this parameter to "NORMAL" in most cases. When higher accuracy is required to pick up a small component, set to
"INTOL". (This parameter can be selected only when the Pick Action parameter is set to "DETAIL".
O, P: Pick Down, Pick Up
Select the nozzle descent or ascent sequence that best matches the component. (These parameters can be selected only
when the Pick Action parameter is set to "DETAIL".)
Q: Force Control
Set whether or not to perform load control. When this parameter is set to "Yes (Only Unlock)", no additional load will be
applied after the component comes in contact with the board.
R: Target Load (N)
Enter the target load in 0.1N steps from 1.0 to 49.0N.
S: Nozzle Touch Point Offset (mm)
Set the length from the top surface of the component to the position where the nozzle tip makes contact with the
component.

1-43
 5.4 Dip parameters
The Dip parameter screen opens when you click the Dip icon in the tree view or the [Dip] tab in the detail

1 view. Set the Dip parameters by referring to the following description.

Dip parameters
Creating and editing the board data

64125-S1-00

Reference
Dip parameters are displayed depending on the specifications.

A: Dipping Action
Select "After Vision" or "Before Vision" to perform dipping operation. Dipping is not performed when "NotUse" is selected
here.
B: Station No.
Enter the station No. shown on the label affixed to the connector box. A data check error will be issued if other numbers
are used.
D: Dip. Descent Sequence
Select the speed from "Normal", "2Step Fast", "2Step Middle" or "2Step Slow" for lowering the head. When a 2-step speed
other than "Normal" is selected, the head speed switches to slow speed some millimeters before the target position while
the head is lowering to the dipping unit. This helps reduce the contact load applied on the component but lowering the
head takes more time.
E: Dip. Descent Speed
Enter the speed for lowering the head in 1% steps from 1 to 100%.
When a 2-step speed is selected, this parameter specifies the higher speed.
F: Dip. Lowend Height
Set the target position to lower the head in 0.01mm steps from -9.99 to +9.99 mm. The downward direction (depressing
direction) is positive (+).
G: Dip. Lowend Timer
Set how long the Z-axis waits at the bottom (lower end) after arriving at the target position. Enter the time in 0.01 second
steps from 0.00 to +9.99 seconds.
H: Dip. Rising Sequence
Select the speed from "Normal", "2Step Fast", "2Step Middle" or "2Step Slow" for raising the head. When a 2-step speed
other than "Normal" is selected, the head speed switches to high speed some millimeters after leaving the start position
while the head is rising to the dipping unit.
I: Dip. Rising Speed
Enter the speed for raising the head in 1% increments from 1 to 100%.
When a 2-step speed is selected, this parameter specifies the higher speed.
J: Force Control
Set whether or not to perform load control. When this parameter is set to "Yes (Only Unlock)", no additional load will be
applied after the component comes in contact with the board.
K: Target Load
Enter the target load in 0.1N steps from 1.0 to 49.0N.

1-44
 5.5 Mount parameters
The Mount parameter screen opens when you click the Mount icon in the tree view or the [Mount] tab in the
detail view. Set the Mount parameters by referring to the following description.

Mount parameters
1

Creating and editing the board data

64126-S1-00

Reference
Some parameters may not be available depending on the specifications.

A: Mount Height (mm)

This is the Z-axis height offset value used when the head lowers to mount a component. Set this parameter to "0.0" in
normal operation. If you want to lower the Z-axis height during component mounting, enter a positive (+) value.
Conversely, if you want to raise the Z-axis height, enter a negative (-) value.
B: Mount Timer
This parameter specifies the time duration (in seconds) for which the head stays in the lowered position after detecting
the reference mount vacuum pressure when mounting a component. In most cases, it is okay to set this parameter to
"0.00". If pickup or mount operation is unstable, set a longer timer value.
C: Mount Speed (%)
This is related to the Pick Speed setting in the Pick parameters. (The setting value changes simultaneously as the Pick
Speed setting is changed.)
D: XY Speed (%)
This is related to the XY Speed setting in the Pick parameters. (The setting value changes simultaneously as the XY Speed
setting in the Pick parameters is changed.)
E: Pick&Mount Vacuum Check
Set this parameter to "NORMAL CHK" in most cases. If you want to check pickup errors and mount errors more strictly
(head return without mounting the component), set to "SPECIAL CHK".

n NOTE
When the Pick&Mount Vacuum Check parameter is set to "NORMAL CHK", the machine controls the ascent timing of
the head from the lowered position during component pickup or mounting. This parameter setting is valid only when
the Vacuum Check parameter on the [Board] tab screen is set to "Check".

F: Mount Vacuum
This is the reference vacuum pressure used for checking the mount vacuum level. Use the database default setting and
adjust it as needed in the Parts Adjust mode.
G: Mount Action
This is related to the Pick Action setting in the Pick parameters. (The setting value changes simultaneously as the Pick
Action setting is changed.)
H: Mount Tango
Set this parameter to "NORMAL" in most cases. When higher accuracy is required to mount a small component, set to
"INTOL". (This parameter can be selected only when the Mount Action parameter is set to "DETAIL".
I, J: Mount Down, Mount Up
Select the nozzle descent or ascent sequence that best matches the component. Use the default values as long as no
problems arise. (These parameters can be selected only when the Mount Action parameter is set to "DETAIL".)

1-45
 K: Force Control
Set whether or not to perform load control. When this parameter is set to "Yes (Only Unlock)", no additional load will be

1
applied after the component comes in contact with the board.
L: Target Load (N)
Enter the target load in 0.1N steps from 1.0 to 49.0N.
M: Nozzle Touch Point Offset (mm)
Set the length from the top surface of the component to the position where the nozzle tip makes contact with the
Creating and editing the board data

component.

1-46
5.6 Vision parameters
The Vision parameter screen opens when you click the Vision icon in the tree view or the [Vision] tab in the
detail view. Set the Vision parameters by referring to the following description.

Vision parameters
1

Creating and editing the board data

64127-S1-00

Reference
Some parameters may not be available depending on the specifications.

A, B, C: Alignment Module: Fore, Back, Laser

This parameter specifies the lighting method for recognizing a component.
D to F: Light Main, Light Coax, Light Side
Select the lighting methods that best match the component. Use the default setting ("Light Main" and "Light Coax"
selected) in most cases. When "Alignment Type" is set to "BGA" and you want to check nicks on the BGA leads, select
"Light Side" only.
G: All Lighting ON
Select this parameter when using all lighting methods "Light Main", "Light Cox" and "Light Side". (This parameter is
available only when the Alignment Type parameter is set to "SOJ" or "Lead-off" or "PLCC".)
H: Lighting Level
This parameter specifies the reflected light brightness.
I: Auto Threshold
Shows a threshold level for standard chip component that was automatically calculated from the acquired image.
J: Comp. Threshold
This parameter specifies the threshold level used to discern the light-reflecting part (lead) from the background during
component recognition. This parameter is skipped for BGA components.
K: Comp. Tolerance
This parameter specifies the tolerance for recognizing a component, in an allowable error percentage of 0 to 100%. The
larger the percentage, the greater the tolerance.
L: Search Area (mm)
This parameter specifies the area within which the component leads are searched. As this value is set larger, the search
area is extended, but with a loss in the image processing speed.
M: Recognition way
Select the method to recognize the component from among "Normal", "Inside recognition", and "Inside+LeadAutoSearch".
Set to "Normal" in most cases. If the "Normal" setting fails to recognize the component, then try setting to "Inside
recognition" and then "Inside+LeadAutoSearch".
(This parameter is available only when the Alignment Type parameter is set to "SOJ" or "Lead-off" or "PLCC".)
• Normal
Recognizes the end of each lead.
• Inside recognition
Recognizes the root of each lead.
• Inside+LeadAutoSearch
Recognizes the root of each lead and also detects the leads by extracting a pattern that meets the definitions based on
the lead pitch and lead width parameters.

1-47
 N: Datum Angle
This parameter specifies the angle of component shape definition. Use the default setting in most cases.

1
O: Comp. Intensity
This parameter specifies the threshold level used to measure the intensity in the outline area of a component after it is
successfully identified by normal vision recognition. If the measured intensity level is higher than this threshold, the
recognition result is a pass. (This parameter is valid only when "Alignment Type" is set to "[Link]".)
P: Multi MACS
Creating and editing the board data

Set whether to use the Multi MACS correction. Mark the check box when using this function.
Q: Co-Planarity Threshold
Set a reference value (50 to 300) used to evaluate the lead co-planarity measurement results. If you do not want to use
the co-planarity check function for this component, set this parameter to “Not Use”.
R: Co-Planarity Level
This is the sensitivity level used to perform lead co-planarity measurement.
Set this parameter to an optimum sensitivity level (0 to 9). For example, set to around “5” for normal lead components,
and set to around “2” for components having a mirrored lead surface that causes little irregular reflection when scanned
by a laser. The higher the irregular reflection on the lead surface, the larger this “Co-Planarity Level” parameter value
should be.
S: Co-Planarity Ruler Offset
Enter the offset value that will be added to the "Ruler Offset" parameter specified on the [Shape] tab only when
measuring lead co-planarity.
When this offset is set to "0", lead co-planarity measurement is performed at the same position as specified by "Ruler
Offset".
When a plus value is set, lead co-planarity measurement is performed at a position shifted inward from the position
specified by "Ruler Offset". When a minus value is set, lead co-planarity measurement is performed at a position shifted
outward from the position specified by "Ruler Offset".
T: 3D Co-Planarity Threshold
Enter the desired tolerance range of lead coplanarity. A coplanarity error is detected if non-uniformity of the lead bottom
plane exceeds this value. Set to "NotUse" if you do not want to check lead coplanarity.
U: 3D Inspection Mode
Set to "Standard" in most cases. For components with wire leads, this parameter can also be set to "Fast" if desired.
V: 3D Threshold
This is the threshold level used to process an image recognized by the coplanarity check camera.
W: 3D Main Lighting Level
This is the main lighting level used to recognize an image with the coplanarity check camera.
X: 3D Coax Lighting Level
This is the coaxial lighting level used to recognize an image with the coplanarity check camera.
Y: 3D Side Lighting Level
This is the side lighting level used to recognize an image with the coplanarity check camera.
Z: Bright Area (%)
Set the ratio (%) of the bright area (light-reflecting ball lead area) to the entire package area, which should be detected
when recognizing a ball lead component such as a BGA with the coplanarity check camera.

1-48
a: Height Check (mm)
Set this parameter when you want to check the front and back of a component such as an SOP and QFP. In most cases,

1
set a value which is about 70% of the component height (thickness).
b: Extra ball check
Set whether or not to judge as recognition error if the number of balls recognized during parts recognition is larger than
the number of balls specified with ball lead position information.
• Checked

Creating and editing the board data

Judges as recognition error if there is a ball at a position not specified with ball lead position information.
• Unchecked
Does not judge as recognition error even if there is a ball at a position not specified with ball lead position
information.
c: Ball matching rate
Specifies the matching rate allowed for recognizing each ball from 0 to 100%. The greater the value, the greater the
tolerance.

1-49
 5.7 Shape parameters
The Shape parameter screen opens when you click the Shape icon in the tree view or the [Shape] tab in the

1 n
detail view. Set the Shape parameters by referring to the following description.

NOTE
Set these parameters after specifying "Alignment Type". If "Alignment Type" is undefined, the following parameters are
not displayed.
Creating and editing the board data

■ Chip components

Shape parameters

64128-S1-00

A, B: Body Size X, Body Size Y

Enter the correct dimensions (mm) measured with a vernier caliper or micrometer.
C: Body Size Z
Enter the correct thickness (mm) measured with a vernier caliper or micrometer.
D: Ruler Offset
This parameter specifies the distance in pixels, from the end of the component to a ruler line used to measure the lead
width. Use the default setting in most cases.
E: ReflectLL
Enter the width of the silver leads provided on both ends of the component. (Standard chip components do not use this
parameter.)
F, G: Align Size X, Y
Enter the component size that is actually recognized by the camera. (Standard chip components do not use this
parameter.)

Shape parameters for chip components

B
D A: Body Size X
N
B: Body Size Y
Top view B C: Body Size Z
C N E W
E D: Ruler Offset
S W S
A
A
B
E A – D: Same as above
N
E: ReflectLL
Top view G F: Align Size X
C N E W
E G: Align Size Y
S W S
A
F
63120-S1-00

1-50
■ Mini-mold transistors and SOT
A, B: Body Size X, Body Size Y

1
Enter the correct dimensions (mm) including the leads, measured with a vernier caliper or micrometer.
C: Body Size Z
Enter the correct thickness (mm) measured with a vernier caliper or micrometer.
D: Ruler Offset
Enter the distance in pixels from the end of the component to an imaginary line used to measure the lead width and

Creating and editing the board data

pitch. Use the default setting in most cases.
E: Ruler Width
Enter the width of an imaginary line used to measure the lead width and pitch. Set this parameter to "1 to 2" for
components with a lead length shorter than 0.3mm, and to "2 to 3" for components with a lead length longer than
0.3mm. Use the default setting in most cases.
F, G: Lead Number NS
Enter the number of leads existing in the N and S directions.

Mini-mold transistor and SOP lead direction

Pickup angle 0° 90°

N N
Loading position S N S N
S S

63121-S1-00

H, I: Lead Pitch NS
Enter the correct lead pitch (lead-to-lead spacing).
J: Lead Width
Enter the correct lead width
K: ReflectLL
Enter the projected length of leads which reflect light during recognition. Use the default setting in most cases.

Shape parameters for mini-mold transistors

H
B A : Body Size X
N B : Body Size Y
C D C : Body Size Z
Bottom view E W D : Ruler Offset
A H : Lead Pitch
E N S
J: Lead Width
S
W J K K: Reflect LL
63122-S1-00

■ SOP
A, B: Body Size X, Body Size Y
Enter the correct dimensions (mm) including the leads, measured with a vernier caliper or micrometer.
C: Body Size Z
Enter the correct thickness (mm) measured with a vernier caliper or micrometer.
D: Ruler Offset
Enter the distance in pixels from the end of the leads to an imaginary line used to measure the lead width and pitch. Use
the default setting in most cases.
E: Ruler Width
Enter the width of the imaginary line used to measure the lead width and pitch. Set this parameter to "1 to 2" for
components with a lead length shorter than 0.3mm, and to "2 to 3" for components with a lead length longer than
0.3mm. Use the default setting in most cases.
F: Lead Number
Enter the number of leads existing in the E or W direction.

1-51
 G: Lead Pitch
Enter the correct lead pitch (lead-to-lead spacing).

1
H: Lead Width
Enter the correct lead width
I: ReflectLL
Enter the projected length of leads which reflect light during recognition. Use the default setting in most cases.
Creating and editing the board data

Shape parameters for SOP

B I A : Body Size X
Bottom view G B : Body Size Y
N C : Body Size Z
C H G : Lead Pitch
N
E W E H : Lead Width
S W
A S I : Reflect LL
63123-S1-00

■ Simple Flip Chip

A, B:Body Size X, Body Size Y
Enter the correct dimensions in millimeters by referring to CAD data.
C: Body Size Z
Enter the correct thickness in millimeters by referring to CAD data.
D: Bump Number
Enter the number of bumps existing along the outermost side in the N direction.
E: Bump Diameter
Enter the diameter in millimeters (0.00 to 99.99) of a bump existing on the outermost side in the N direction. Enter the
correct dimension by referring to CAD data. (See drawing below.)
F: Start Pos X
Enter the X-coordinate position in millimeters of the first bump located in the N direction, relative to the center of the
component. (See drawing below.)
G: Start Pos Y
Enter the Y-coordinate position in millimeters of the first bump located in the N direction, relative to the center of the
component. (See drawing below.)
H: End Pos X
Enter the X-coordinate position in millimeters of the last bump located in the N direction, relative to the center of the
component. (See drawing below.)
I: End Pos Y
Enter the Y-coordinate position in millimeters of the last bump located in the N direction, relative to the center of the
component. (See drawing below.)
J to a: Bump Number S to End Pos. YW
Enter the settings in the S, E and W directions while referring to the above descriptions (D to I) and drawing.

Shape parameters for simple flip chip

B
A: Body Size X
W B: Body Size Y
C N
S C: Body Size Z
A E D: Bump Number
E: Bump Diameter
D F: Start Pos X
G: Start Pos Y
H: End Pos X
N I : Start Pos Y
G E I
+: Center of component
W E
Bottom view F H
S
63124-S1-00

1-52
■ Flip Chip
A, B: Body Size X, Body Size Y

1
Enter the correct dimensions in millimeters by referring to CAD data.
C: Body Size Z
Enter the correct thickness in millimeters by referring to CAD data.

Shape parameters for flip chip

Creating and editing the board data

B
A: Body Size X
W B: Body Size Y
C N C: Body Size Z
S
A E
63125-S1-00

■ Simple BGA
A, B: Body Size X, Body Size Y
Enter the correct dimensions measured with a vernier caliper or micrometer.
C: Body Size Z
Enter the correct diameter measured with a vernier caliper or micrometer.
D: Dot Amount
Enter the total number of ball terminals of the BGA component.
E, F: Dot number N, Dot number E
Enter the number of ball terminals arrayed in the N and E directions. If the number of terminals per array differs from
each other, enter the largest number of terminals per array.
G: BGA pitch
Enter the spacing between ball terminals.
H: BGA diameter
Enter the diameter of ball terminals.

Shape parameters for BGA component (Simple BGA setting)

E
A : Body Size X
B
B : Body Size Y
C : Body Size Z
D : Dot Amount
N H F E : Dot number N
E
C W F : Dot number E
A S
G : BGA pitch
Side view C H : BGA diameter
G Bottom view

63126-S1-00

■ BGA
A, B: Body Size X, Body Size Y
Enter the correct dimensions measured with a vernier caliper or micrometer.
C: Body Size Z
Enter the correct diameter measured with a vernier caliper or micrometer.
D, E, F: Cntr. Offset XYR
Enter the pickup position offset (positional shift) relative to the center of the component.
G: Dot Amount
Enter the total number of ball terminals of the BGA component.
H, I: Dot number N, Dot number E
Enter the number of ball terminals arrayed in the N and E directions. If the number of terminals per array differs from
each other, enter the largest number of terminals per array.

1-53
 J: BGA pitch N
Enter the spacing between ball terminals displayed on the N (North) side of the vision monitor.

1
K: BGA pitch E
Enter the spacing between ball terminals displayed on the E (East) side of the vision monitor.
L: BGA diameter
Enter the diameter of the ball terminals.
M: Binar y Level
Creating and editing the board data

The Comp Threshold parameter is invalid when "Alignment Type" is set to "BGA" or Simple BGA". Instead, the binary
level can be adjusted with this parameter. For example, if the white portion in the image appears larger than the actual
area, enter a positive (+) value.

Shape parameters for BGA component

H A : Body Size X
B B : Body Size Y
C : Body Size Z
G : Dot Amount
E
N
L I H : Dot number N
C K
W I : Dot number E
A S
J : BGA pitch N
K : BGA pitch E
Side view C
J Bottom view L : BGA diameter

63127-S1-10

■ Connector E
A, B: Body Size X, Body Size Y
Enter the correct dimensions (mm) including the leads, measured with a vernier caliper or micrometer.
C: Body Size Z
Enter the correct thickness (mm) measured with a vernier caliper or micrometer.
D, E, F: Cntr. Offset XYR
Enter the lead position offset (positional shift) relative to the center of the component.
G: Ruler Offset
Enter the distance in pixels from the end of the leads to a ruler line used to measure the lead width and pitch. Use the
default setting in most cases.
H: Ruler Width
Enter the width of an imaginary line used to measure the lead width and pitch. Set this parameter to "1 to 2" for
components with a lead length shorter than 0.3mm, and to "2 to 3" for components with a lead length longer than
0.3mm. Use the default setting in most cases.
I: LeadNumber
Enter the number of leads existing on one side.
J: Lead Pitch
Enter the correct lead pitch (lead-to-lead spacing).
K: Lead Width
Enter the correct lead width.
L: ReflectLL
Enter the projected length of leads which reflect light during recognition. Use the default setting in most cases.

Shape parameters for connector E

A : Body Size X
L B : Body Size Y
J C : Body Size Z
C
B S J : Lead Pitch
W K
A E K : Lead Width
N
L : Reflect LL
Bottom view
63128-S1-00

1-54
 5.8 Tray parameters
The Tray parameter screen opens when you click the Tray icon in the tree view or the [Tray] tab in the detail

n
view. Set the Tray parameters by referring to the following description.

NOTE
The Tray parameters are available when the "Package" parameter is set to "Stick" or "Tray" and the "Feeder Type"
1
parameter is set to "Multistick", "WideMultiStk", Stick15mm" or "Stick20mm", or "Fix. TF", "Ext. TF" or "Auto TF".

Creating and editing the board data

1. When the "Package" parameter is set to "Stick"

Tray parameters
Stick

64129-S1-00

A: Comp. Amount
Enter the number of components loaded in one stick feeder.
B: Current Pos.
This parameter indicates how many components have been used from the stick feeder. Use the default setting.
C: CountOutStop
When this parameter is set to "On", the machine automatically stops when the specified number of components are used
up. When set to "Off", the machine returns to the first position to continue component pickup after the specified number
of components are used up. Normally set this parameter to "Off".

2. When the "Package" parameter is set to "Tray"

● Parameter setting when using an MTF (manual tray feeder)

Tray parameters
MTF (manual tray feeder)

64130-S1-00

A, B: Comp. Amount XY
Enter the number of components in the XY directions on a tray. When using a tray shown in the drawing below for
example, set the "Comp. Amount X" to "5" and the "Comp. Amount Y" to "4".

1-55
 C, D: Comp. Pitch XY
Enter the component pitch (center to center spacing) in millimeters in the XY directions.

1
E, F: Current Pos. XY
These parameters indicate which row and column on a tray the component is currently picked up from. The row and
column on a tray are counted from the tray origin (see the drawing below). Normally, enter "1" in both the "Current Pos.
X" and "Current Pos. Y" parameters when you have created new component information. Since these parameters
automatically change as the components are picked up, you can check which row and column on the tray the
Creating and editing the board data

components have been used from.

c CAUTION
The MTF (manual tray feeder) is installed to the movable conveyor rail. The conveyor width must be adjusted to the
board width before setting component information used with the MTF.

Comp Amount / Current Pitch / Current Pos. settings

Y-Comp. Amount Current Pos. X Current Pos. Y

4
1,4 2,4 3,4 4,4 5,4
Y-CompPitch

3
1,3 2,3 3,3 4,3 5,3

2
1,2 2,2 3,2 4,2 5,2

1
1,1 2,1 3,1 4,1 5,1
Tray origin
1 2 3 4 5 X-Comp. Amount
Pallet origin
X-CompPitch
63129-S1-00

G, H: Tray Amount XY
These parameters specify the number of trays set in the XY directions on a pallet. For example in Figure A, enter "2" for
the Tray Amount X parameter, and "1" for the Tray Amount Y parameter. In the case of Figure B, enter "1" for the Tray
Amount X parameter, and "2" for the Tray Amount Y parameter
I, J: Tray Pitch XY
These parameters set the center-to-center spacing of the adjacent trays on a pallet. For example in Figure A below, enter
"150.00" for the Tray Pitch X parameter, and "0.00" for the Tray Pitch Y parameter. In the case of Figure B, enter "0.00"
for the Tray Pitch X parameter, and "100.00" for the Tray Pitch Y parameter. When only one tray is set on a pallet, both
the Tray Pitch X and Tray Pitch Y parameters should be "0.00".
K, L: Current Tray XY
These parameters indicate which row and column on a pallet the tray is currently used. Normally, enter "1" for both
Current Tray X and Current Tray Y parameters. When you specify "1" for these parameters, the machine starts pickup
from the tray placed closest to the pallet origin. Normally, enter "1" in both XY parameters.

Tray Amount / Tray Pitch settings

A B

150.00

1, 2
100.00

1, 1 2, 1 1, 1

X-CurrentTray Y-CurrentTray
63130-S1-00

1-56
M: Tray Height
Enter the thickness (mm) of the tray.

Tray height
Component Tray 1
A B

Creating and editing the board data

Tray height = A - B
63131-S1-00

N, O: WastedSpace Left, Light

When an MTF (manual tray feeder) is installed on the feeder, these parameters define the feeder set positions where 8mm
tape feeders cannot be attached to the feeder plate. These parameters should be set with the Feeder No. specified in Step
5 as the reference.
For example, when the MTF occupies the feeder plate from No. 109 to 135 and the Feeder No. specified in Step 6 is
"120", the left-hand feeder set positions of No. 109 to 119 cannot be used, so enter "11" for the WastedSpace Left
parameter. For the right-hand feeder set positions, No. 121 to 135 cannot be used, so enter "15" for the WastedSpace
Right parameter.

WastedSpace Left, Right

No feeders can be installed in this area

WastedSpace (L) WastedSpace (R)

Feeder plate MTF

109 120 135

63132-S1-00

P: CountOutStop
When this parameter is set to "Exist", the machine automatically stops when the specified number of components are
used up. When set to "Nothing", the machine returns to the first position to continue component pickup after the
specified number of components are used up. Normally set this parameter to "Nothing".

1-57
 ● Parameter setting when using an external tray changer or ATS (auto tray stacker)

Tray parameters

1 External tray changer

Creating and editing the board data

64131-S1-00

A, B: Comp. Amount XY
Enter the number of components in the XY directions on a tray. When using a tray shown in the figure below, for
example, set the Comp. Amount X to "5" and the Comp. Amount Y to "4".
C, D: Comp Pitch XY
Enter the component pitch (center to center spacing) in millimeters in the XY directions.
E, F: Current Pos. XY
These parameters indicate which row and column on a tray the component is currently picked up from. The row and
column on a tray are counted from the tray origin (see the reference below). Normally, enter "1" in both the Current Pos.
X and Current Pos. Y parameters when you have created new component information.
Since these parameters automatically change as the components are picked up, so you can check which row and column
on the tray the components have been used from.
Reference
The pallet origin is the front left corner of the pallet when viewed from the pallet extract neck. The tray origin is the
center of the component on the tray which is nearest the pallet origin.

Comp Amount / Current Pitch / Current Pos. settings

Y-Comp. Amount Current Pos. X Current Pos. Y

4
1,4 2,4 3,4 4,4 5,4
Y-CompPitch

3
1,3 2,3 3,3 4,3 5,3

2
1,2 2,2 3,2 4,2 5,2

1
1,1 2,1 3,1 4,1 5,1
Tray origin
1 2 3 4 5 X-Comp. Amount
Pallet origin
X-CompPitch
63133-S1-00

1-58
 Pallet origin and tray origin

1
Tray origin

Creating and editing the board data

X
Pallet origin
Pallet extract neck
63134-S1-00

G, H: Tray Amount XY
These parameters specify the number of trays set in the XY directions on a pallet. For example in Figure A on the next
page, enter "2" for the Tray Amount X parameter, and "1" for the Tray Amount Y parameter. In the case of Figure B, enter
"1" for the Tray Amount X parameter, and "2" for the Tray Amount Y parameter
I, J: Tray Pitch XY
These parameters set the center to center spacing of the adjacent trays on a pallet. For example in Figure A below, enter
"150.00" for the Tray Pitch X parameter, and "0.00" for the Tray Pitch Y parameter. In the case of Figure B, enter "0.00"
for the Tray Pitch X parameter, and "100.00" for the Tray Pitch Y parameter. When only one tray is set on a pallet, both
the Tray Pitch X and Tray Pitch Y parameters should be "0.00".
K, L: Current Tray XY
These parameters indicate which row and column on a pallet the tray is currently used. Normally, enter "1" for both
Current Tray X and Current Tray Y parameters. When you specify "1" for these parameters, the machine starts pickup
from the tray placed closest to the pallet origin. Normally, enter "1" in both XY parameters.
Reference
In the X and Y parameters for external tray changers (YTF) and auto tray stackers (ATS), enter the correct XY distance
from the pallet origin to the component pickup position.

Tray Amount / Tray Pitch settings

A Tray B

150.00

1, 2
100.00

1, 1 2, 1 1, 1

Pallet origin
X-CurrentTray Y-CurrentTray
63135-S1-00

M: Tray Height
Enter the thickness (mm) of the tray.

Tray height
Component Tray

A B

Tray height = A - B
63136-S1-00

1-59
 N, O: Pallet No. Start, Pallet No. Last
These parameters indicate the pallet positions in a tray stacker or tray changer where the components to be used are

1
stored. For example, when the components are stored on the pallets No. 3 to 5, enter "3" in the Pallet No. Start and "5"
in the Pallet No. Last.

Pallet No. Start / Pallet No. Last

Creating and editing the board data

3
4
5

63137-S1-00

P: Pallet No. Current

Enter the pallet position No. to start from for component pickup. Normally enter the same value as specified in the Pallet
No. Start parameter. This parameter automatically changes as components on each pallet are used up.
Q: Pallet Pitch Z
Select the vertical pitch of pallets stored in the magazine of the ATS or YTF.
"Normal" :
Select "Normal" when the pallets to be used are vertically stored at a normal pitch (minimum pitch) in the magazine.
"Double Pitch" :
Select "Double Pitch" when the pallets to be used are vertically stored at a double pitch in the magazine.
"Triple Pitch" :
Select "Triple Pitch" when the pallets to be used are vertically stored at a triple pitch in the magazine.
R: CountOutStop
When this parameter is set to "Exist", the machine automatically stops when the specified number of components are
used up. When set to "Nothing", the machine returns to the first position to continue component pickup after the
specified number of components are used up. Normally set this parameter to "Nothing".

● Parameter setting for wafer tray

[Basic] tab

Tray parameters
Wafer tray: [Basic] tab

64132-S1-00

A: Wafer Nozzle Type

Select the optimum nozzle that matches the size of the wafer components.
B: Wafer Dimension
Select the desired method from the following items.
• NotUse
This method uses only coordinate information on the wafer components to pick up each chip and does not use wafer
component count information. Select "NotUse" in most cases.

1-60
 • Use
This method uses both the wafer component coordinate and count information to pick up each chip. The machine
picks up chips only in the area overlapped by the circle (defined by wafer diameter) and the square (defined by the
pitch and count information).
• Waffle
Select this method when using waffle tray pallets.
1
• Map

Creating and editing the board data

Select this method when using the wafer map.
C: Wafer Diameter
Enter the diameter of the wafer.
During component search, only chips whose center is within this diameter are searched.
D: Ring Diameter
Enter the inner diameter of the ring used to hold a wafer on the pallet (or inner diameter of expander ring). This
parameter is used to calculate space needed to prevent the ejector unit from striking the ring. However, the smaller value
is used when the specified size of the pallet itself (automatically checked by the machine) is smaller than the ring
diameter you entered here.

Wafer Diameter, Ring Diameter

Ring Diameter

Wafer Diameter

63138-S1-00

E: Wafer Angle
Enter the angle of the wafer dicing line versus the wafer axis. To enter this parameter by measuring it with the camera,
use the [Angle Tch] button.
F, G: Comp. Pitch X, Y
Enter the X and Y direction pitches (center to center spacing) of the adjacent components on a wafer. When measuring
the component pitch with the vision camera, press the [Pitch Tch] button to open the pitch teach screen and proceed as
follows. (The following is an example for measuring the pitch using 4 x 4 components arranged in the XY directions.)
1. Enter "4" as the number of components to be measured in the XY directions.
2. Align the cursor with the center of the start point component and press the [Start Point] button.
3. Align the cursor with the center of the end point component and press the [End Point] button.
The pitch of the components is then automatically calculated and entered.
H: Pallet No.
Enter the pallet No. to start from for component pickup. Normally enter the same value as specified in the Pallet No.
Start parameter. The pallet No. automatically changes as components on each pallet are used up so you can check which
pallet in the magazine is used.
I: Mark For Comp
Specify the mark data number to use to find the each component center.
J: Retr y Comp. Mark
When there are components whose center is impossible to find, this parameter determines how many components the
machine will skip before stopping the machine.

1-61
 K: Mark For Bad
Specify the mark data number used to detect badmarks on a component. Badmark recognition is performed based on the
center position of the component.

1 L: Retr y Bad Mark

This parameter determines how many components with the badmark will be detected before the machine will come to a
stop.
[Search] tab
Creating and editing the board data

Tray parameters
Wafer tray: [Search] tab

64133-S1-00

A: Current Search Direction

Specify the direction for component search.
1. When using a new wafer, set this parameter to a direction beginning with "Init" such as "Init (R)".
2. When using a wafer that has already been partially used, set to a direction not beginning with "Init" such as “Right” and “Left”.
B: Switch Direction
Enter the alternative search direction to switch to when the center of the component to be searched is outside the
circumference calculated from the wafer diameter. This alternative search direction must be perpendicular to the current
search direction.

Search Direction, Switch Direction

: Search start position

Detects NG and continues search in left

direction.

Does not scan over this chip because the

center of the chip is outside the wafer
diameter and performs search in upper
direction.

63139-S1-00

C, D: Current Pos. X, Y
Enter the search start position. Teaching can be used to enter this position. The teaching position is the distance from the
center of the wafer and depends on the "Current Search Direction" and "Switch Direction" parameter settings. For
example, if the "Current Search" is “Init (R)” and the "Switch Direction" parameter is “Upper”, then you should teach the
lower left component position on the wafer.
E, F: Comp Amount X, Y
When the "Wafer Dimension" parameter is set to other than "NotUse", specify the number of components arranged in the
XY directions.
G, H: Current Count X, Y
Specify the count position to perform a component search. The initial count position (1, 1) is in the lower left corner
when viewed from the front of the machine.

1-62
[Pick] tab

Tray parameters
Wafer tray: [Pick] tab
1

Creating and editing the board data

63134-S1-00

A: Pick Height
This parameter determines the height (pressing amount) at which the wafer head picks up a component. You can set this
parameter to 0.00 mm in most cases.
The actual height at which the wafer head picks up a component is as follows:
LP-axis height on wafer tray changer + "Pick Height" – Tape thickness – Component thickness + Wafer tray changer's
head offset + nozzle thickness
B: Pick Timer
Set the time period in which the wafer head (LP-axis) stops after the ejector pin push-up axis (LU-axis) reaches the
specified height before starting to move upwards. This parameter can be set in 0.05 second steps from 0.00 to 0.75
seconds.
C, D: Pick Vel. Up, Pick Vel. Down
Set the speed at which the wafer head moves up or down to pick up a component. These parameters can be set in 10%
steps from 0 to 100%.
E, F: Head Low Level, Head High Level
These are wafer head vacuum levels for checking whether the wafer head has picked up a component from the wafer or
has placed a component on the station. More specifically, the machine determines that a component has been picked up
when the wafer head vacuum level increases above the "Head Low Level", and the wafer head then moves to the station.
The machine also determines that the component has been placed (separated from the nozzle) when the wafer head
vacuum level decreases below the "Head High Level", and the wafer head then returns to the previous position.
G: Tape Thickness
Enter the dicing tape thickness. (0.00 to 2.55 mm)
H: Eject Height
Enter the vertical distance by which the ejector pin moves up when the wafer head picks up a chip component from the
wafer. (- 30.00 to 30.00 mm)
I, J: Eject Vel. Up, Eject Vel. Down
Set the speed at which the ejector pin (push-up pin) moves up or down. These parameters can be set in 10% steps from 0
to 100%.
K: Eject Down Timing
The ejector pin (LU-axis) should move downwards while the wafer head (LP-axis) picking up a chip component is moving
upwards. So, specify the ascent distance (millimeters) of the wafer head that allows the ejector pin to start moving
downwards.
The ejector pin actually starts moving downwards when the wafer head has moved upwards by the distance specified
here from the height at which the tape is usually peeled off the component. The upward direction of the LU-axis is
positive (+).

1-63
 [Station] tab

Tray parameters

1 Wafer tray: [Station] tab

Creating and editing the board data

64135-S1-00

A: Flip
Set to "Use" to perform face-up component placement by which the heads hand a component to each other. Setting to
"NotUse" enables parameter items for the station and allows facedown component placement.
B: Place Height
This parameter determines the height of the wafer head (LP-axis) to place a component on the placement station. The
pressing direction (downward direction) of the LP-axis is positive (+).
The actual height at which the wafer head places a component is as follows:
LP-axis height on station + "Place Height" – Component thickness + Wafer tray changer's head offset + Nozzle thickness
C: Place Timer
Set the time period in which the wafer head (LP-axis) stops after the wafer head vacuum level decreases below the
specified "Head High Level" and the station vacuum level increases above the specified "Station Low Level" before
starting to move upwards. (The setting range is from 0.00 to 0.75 sec.)
D, E: Place Vel. Up, Place Vel. Down
Set the speed at which the wafer head moves up or down to place a component on the station. These parameters can be
set in 10% steps from 0 to 100%.
F: Station Low Level
This is the station vacuum level for checking whether a component has been placed on the station. The machine
determines that the component has been placed on the station when the station vacuum level increases above the
"Station Low Level" and then allows the wafer head (LP-axis) to stay there for the time specified in the "Place Timer"
parameter. Normally, set this "Station Low Level" parameter to about 30%.
G: Station High Level
This is the station vacuum level for checking whether the head of the main unit has picked up a component from the
station. The machine determines that the component has been picked up from the station when the station vacuum level
decreases below the "Station High Level". Normally, set this parameter to about 30%.

1-64
[Option] tab

Tray parameters
Wafer tray: [Option] tab
1

Creating and editing the board data

64136-S1-00

C: Rotate Vel.
Set the speed at which the wafer head rotates to pick up or place a component. This parameter can be set in 10% steps
from 0 to 100%.
D: Traverser Vel.
Set the speed at which the wafer head moves between the wafer position and the station. This parameter can be set in
10% steps from 0 to 100%.
E: Align Mark
Make the wafer position correction setting. This is used to correct the search position based on the alignment mark
position data.
• NotUse
Select "NotUse" when not using this function.
• Dir Initialized
Select "Dir Initialized" for pallet set at each stage in the pallet magazine immediately after the search direction was
reset.
• Door Open
Select "Door Open" for pallet set at each stage in the pallet magazine immediately after the door was opened and
closed.
• Ever y Time
Select this item when you want to use this function each time pallet set is performed.
F, G: Align Mark 1, Align mark 2
Specify the alignment mark data number used to perform the wafer position correction.
H, I: Align Mark 1 Pos. X, Y
Specify the XY coordinates of the alignment mark 1. Enter the coordinates relative to the center of the wafer.
J, K: Align Mark 2 Pos. X, Y
Specify the XY coordinates of the alignment mark 2. Enter the coordinates relative to the center of the wafer.

1-65
 5.9 Option parameters
The Option parameter screen opens when you click the Option icon in the tree view or the [Option] tab in the

1 detail view. Set the Option parameters by referring to the following description.

Option parameters
Creating and editing the board data

64137-S1-00

A: Alternative Parts
This parameter specifies an alternative component number which can be used if the current component runs out. When
not needed to specify any alternative component, leave it at "0". (For details on alternative components, see the next
section 5.9.1, "Alternative components".)
B: Parts Group No.
When a nozzle lowers to mount a low-profile component after tall components have been mounted on the board, the
neighboring nozzles may interfere with those tall components. To avoid this, components can be grouped by height so
that they are mounted in the desired order (0 to 99). When no mounting order is needed, set this parameter to "0".
C: Use Feeder Optimize
Set to "Yes" when you want to change the feeder set positions according to results obtained with the Optimizer function.
Set to "No" if you do not want to change the feeder set positions.
E: Pick Pos Correction
Set to "Use" if you want to correct the pickup position automatically. Set to "NotUse" when not using this function.

1-66
 5.9.1 Alternative components
When components in a feeder or tray are used up during operation, the alternative component function allows

1
the machine to pick up components from another feeder specified as alternative components.
● Component switching flow
In the alternative component function, component feed is switched in the operation flow explained below. When the
components in the current feeder run out, the machine allows automatic switching to the alternative component feeder
without interrupting operation. When one cycle using alternative components is complete, the machine stops and a

Creating and editing the board data

message appears asking you to resupply the components.
When tray components are used, if the number of retries exceeds the setting due to an error in the mounter (not related
to component supply), the component tray in current use automatically switches to the next tray or alternative
component tray, without interrupting mounter operation.
Reference
In machines equipped with a "nonstop feeder system" (option), components can be resupplied without interrupting
operation.

c CAUTION
In the case of tray feeder components, if the "Dump Way" parameter on the Parts - Basic screen is set to "Sp. Dump
Back", the alternative component function cannot be used. (Auto tray changer can be used.)

Component switch flow

Tape feeder/stick feedercomponents

Running

Out of components

Automatically switches
to alternative components

Is one cycle NO
using alternative component group
complete?

YES

Were components NO
resupplied during running?

YES

Machine stops

63140-S1-00

1-67
 Component switching flow
Tray components

1 Running

Mounter error
Creating and editing the board data

Component feed from current tray stops

Automatically switches to next tray

or alternative component tray

Is one cycle using NO

alternative component group
complete?

YES

NO
Were components resupplied
during operation?

YES

Machine stops

63141-S1-00

Reference
For details on how to set alternative components, refer to the programming manual for each series.

1-68
 5.10 Side-view camera parameters

1
Side-view camera parameters

Creating and editing the board data

64156-S1-00

A: Side View Camera

Sets the side-view camera recognition mode. Select the mode from the drop-down list box.
"NotUse"
Does not perform side-view camera recognition.
"Normal Mode"
Performs side-view camera recognition in Normal mode.
The machine recognizes the component based on the "thickness recognition tolerance" that is ±50% of the "C: Body Size
Z (mm)" parameter value specified on the [Shape] tab.
"Detail Mode"
Performs side-view camera recognition in Detail mode.
When this mode is selected, set the "C: Part Thickness (mm)" parameter to the desired value as the allowable thickness
based on the "C: Body Size Z (mm)" parameter value specified on the [Shape] tab. The machine then recognizes the
component using this value as the "thickness recognition tolerance".
B: Bring Back Check
This parameter is available only when the "A: Side View Camera" parameter is set to "Normal Mode" or "Detail Mode".
Sets whether or not to use the "bring back" check. Select from the dropdown list box.
"NotUse"
The side-view camera does not check whether the nozzle brings the component back without placing it on the board.
"Use"
The side-view camera checks whether the nozzle brings the component back after placing or discarding it.
C: Part Thickness (mm)
This parameter is available only when the "A: Side View Camera" parameter is set to "Detail Mode".
Set the allowable component thickness from 0.000 to 99.999 mm based on the "C: Body Size Z (mm)" parameter value
on the [Shape] tab. The value set here is used as the "thickness recognition tolerance" when the side-view camera
recognizes the component.
The larger the setting, the greater the tolerance.

c CAUTION
Setting the tolerance too large or too small might cause component placement errors or other problems.

D: Reverse Check (inverted component check)

This parameter is available when the "A: Side View Camera" parameter is set to "Normal Mode" or "Detail Mode". Select
"Use" to check the front and back sides of a picked up component with the side view camera or select "NotUse" if this
check is not needed.
"Use"
Checks if the front and back sides of a component are inverted while recognizing it with the side-view camera. Also
simultaneously checks whether the picked up component size fits within the angle-of-view of the side-view camera.
"NotUse"
Does not make this check with the side-view camera.

1-69
 5.11 Dispense parameters
The Dispense parameter screen opens when you click the Dispense icon in the tree view or the [Dispense] tab

1 in the detail view. Set the Dispense parameters by referring to the following description.

Dispense parameters
Creating and editing the board data

64138-S1-00

Reference
Dispense parameters may be displayed depending on the specifications.

A: Required Nozzle
Select the nozzle to use for dispensing.
B: Dispense Nozzle
Select the nozzle type.
C: Dispense Unit
Set the quantity of dispensing liquid.
D, E: Ref. Pos. X (mm), Y (mm)
When dispensing adhesive, set the position offset between the center of dispensing area and the center of the component.
When dispensing solder paste, set the position offset from the component outline.
F, G: Dot Extent X (mm), Y (mm)
Set the dispensing area (XY size). This setting will be ignored when dispensing solder paste.
H, I: Dot Amount X, Y
Set the number of dispensing dots in the X and Y directions. This setting will be ignored when dispensing solder paste.

Dispensing positions

■ 1-shot nozzle for adhesive ■ 2-shot nozzle for adhesive ■ Nozzle for solder paste

Center of
component
Reference
position Y

Reference
position

X-direction dispensing area Depends on nozzle hole pitch

63142-S1-00

J: Angle Offset (deg.)

Set the offset angle for dispensing in steps of 5 degrees from 0 to +90 degrees or 0 to –90 degrees.

1-70
6. Creating the mark information
This section describes how to create mark information for fiducial marks used on a board. Mark information
consists of various parameters for each mark name registered as illustrated below. A convenient way to set
these parameters is to copy sample data of a mark with a similar type and shape from the database and edit
1
only those parameters that are different.

Creating and editing the board data

Mark information parameters

Mark Type • Fiducial

Database Number • Badmark
(Library Name) • Fid for Bad
• Dispense Dot
• Fid for Check
• Bad for Check
Shape Type • Wafer Fiducial
Mark Out Size • Wafer Badmark
(Mark Out Size X) • Fid for Wafer Badmark
(Mark Out Size Y) • Height Correction
(Mark Area)
(Mark Outline)

Mark Name
Comment
(Mark Type)

Surface Type
Algorithm Type
Mark Threshold
Tolerance
Search Area XY
Outer Light
Inner Light
Coaxial Light
IR Outer Light
IR Inner Light
Cut Outer Noise
Cut Inner Noise
Sequence
Search area Offset X, Y
Height

64139-S1-00

Reference
The particular parameters that actually appear enabled will differ somewhat depending on the selected "Mark Type"
or "Shape Type".

1-71
 6.1 Creating procedure
Click the Basic icon under the Mark icon in the tree view to open the mark information screen. Enter the mark

1 name and comment in the upper grid display and then set various parameters as explained in the steps below.

Mark information screen

Step 6 Step 2 Step 3

Creating and editing the board data

Step 1

Step 4
64140-S1-00

1 Click the Mark icon in the tree view to open the mark information screen.
2 Enter the mark name in the Mark Name column.
Enter a different name for each mark within 20 alphanumeric characters. A space cannot be included
in the name.

3 Enter a comment.
Type any desired comment in the Mark Comment column as necessary. Entering comments here is
optional.

4 Set the parameters.

While selecting the [Basic], [Shape], [Vision] tabs and so forth, set the necessary parameters in the lower
right area. (Refer to the following sections for how to set the parameters.)

5 Repeat the above steps for other marks.

Repeat the same procedure from step 2 to register all marks to be used.

6 Save the data.

Select "Save Board Data" from the File menu or click the [Save Bard Data] button on the toolbar to store
the data.

1-72
6.2 Basic parameters
The Basic parameter screen opens when you click the Basic icon under the Mark icon in the tree view or the
[Basic] tab in the detail view.

Mark information
1
Basic parameters
2 1

Creating and editing the board data

3

64144-S1-00

Reference
Some parameters may not be available depending on the specifications.

1-73
 1. Mark Type
Select the mark type from the dropdown list.

1
The item selected here will appear on the Mark Type column on the grid display in the upper area.
2. Database Number
Shows the database number at the time the parameter values were copied from the database. When you want to copy the
parameter values from the database, press the [Overview Database] button on the toolbar to open the database list dialog
box. Then select the copy source data and press the [Set] button to make a copy.
Creating and editing the board data

Mark database list

64142-S1-00

Reference
For details on the database, see section 7, "Using and editing the database", in this chapter.

3. Post Sequence
This parameter specifies the action after a measurement error for example when the measurement result is outside the
range between "Upper Limit" and "Lower Limit" or an error occurs during the measurement. Select from "Stop", "Skip" or
"Select".
• "Stop" :
The machine stops immediately after a measurement error occurs. When automatic operation restarts, the machine will
repeat the measurement from the beginning.
• "Skip" :
After a measurement error occurs, the machine will skip data with the same local height No. (except "0") and local
badmark No. (except "0") in the sequence information.
• "Select" :
The machine immediately stops after a measurement error occurs. You can then select "Stop" or "Skip" as the next
action.
4. Badmark Mark Rev
Select "Normal" to stop the work when a badmark is detected (operation continues as long as no badmark is detected), or
select "Reverse" when you want to continue work when a badmark is detected.
5. Temperature, +Pressure, -Pressure
Use these fields to enter a memo as needed.
6. Upper Limit, Lower Limit
Enter the upper and lower limits in millimeters to set an acceptable measurement result range. The downward direction is
positive (+) and the upward direction is negative (-), just as with the head coordinate system.

1-74
6.3 Shape parameters
The Shape parameter screen opens when you click the Shape icon under the Mark icon in the tree view or the
[Shape] tab in the detail view.

Shape parameters
1

Creating and editing the board data

64143-S1-00

Shape Type
The Shape Type can be selected from the following 5 types.

Shape Type

Setting Description Example

Circle Select to detect a circular mark.

Square Select to detect a square mark.

Triangle Select to detect an equilateral triangular mark.

Sp. Shape Select to detect a special mark other than above.

Corner Select to detect a corner of a pattern as a mark.

63143-S1-00

1-75
 A, B: Mark Out Size
Referring to the table below, enter the correct value in the mark size. This parameter does not appear when "Mark Type"

1
on the [Basic] tab is set to "Badmark". The "Search Area" parameters appear instead.

"Mark Out Size" settings

Shape Type Example Mark Out Size setting

Creating and editing the board data

Circle Enter the diameter.

Square Y
Enter the length of each side.
X

Triangle Enter the length of one side.

Y Enter the X length for the MarkOutSize X, and

Sp. Shape
the Y length for the MarkOutSize Y.
X

Corner Enter the length of the shorter side displayed

within the search area.

63144-S1-00

C: Mark Area
Enter the area of the mark in units of square millimeters. This parameter appears only when "Shape Type" is set to "Sp.
Shape".
D: Outline
Enter the perimeter length of the mark in units of millimeters. This parameter appears only when "Shape Type" is set to
"Sp. Shape".

n NOTE
A recognition error may occur due to environmental conditions such as illumination. In such cases, enter a larger value
than previously used for "Tolerance" of the Vision parameters, or set the tolerance to 100%, then perform the vision test
in the Mark Adjust mode and enter the obtained data on the area and perimeter. (The mark area and perimeter
values are displayed after the vision test is complete.) Return the tolerance to the original value after the data is
obtained.

1-76
6.4 Vision parameters
The Vision parameter screen opens when you click the Vision icon under the Mark icon in the tree view or the
[Vision] tab in the detail view.

Vision parameters
1

Creating and editing the board data

64144-S1-00

A: Surface Type
This specifies the bright and dark relation between the mark surface and board (surrounding area). Select "NonReflect"
when the mark is darker than the surrounding area, and select "Reflect" when the mark is brighter than the surrounding
area, as shown below.

Surface Type settings

Setting NonReflect Reflect

Brightness comparison Board is brighter than mark. Mark is brighter than board.

Mark Mark
Image

Board Board

63146-S1-00

B: Algorithm Type
There are 5 algorithm types selectable for mark recognition.
• Normal
In typical recognition, all types of marks should be set to "Normal". Try setting to other parameters if the mark cannot
be recognized with the "Normal" setting.
• Special 1
Select this item if the mark cannot be recognized by the "Normal" setting.
• Special 2
Select this item if the mark which cannot be recognized by the "Normal" setting has a cutout area.
• PTRN Outline, PTRN GrayLev
Select these items when registering a mark as "pattern" for pattern matching. The pattern matching data can be created
only with the machine.
C: Mark Threshold
This is the threshold level for binary image used to recognize the mark.
D: Tolerance
This specifies a tolerance percentage for the mark size when the mark is recognized with the vision system. (Typically
this should be set to "30".)

1-77
 E, F: Search Area XY
As a general guide, set this parameter to the mark diameter plus 3mm. For example, when the mark diameter is 1mm, set

1
this parameter to "4mm" as shown below. If other marks (such as resist, silk print, other patterns) exist in this search area,
make the Search Area setting smaller.
Reference
The Search Area parameter is not displayed on the [Vision] tab screen when "Mark Type" of the Basic parameters is set
to "Badmark".
Creating and editing the board data

Search Area

Search Area
Mark

1
4 Board

63147-S1-00

G to K: Light level
Lighting for recognizing a mark is divided into several zones. Light level in each zone is displayed here. Optimum light
levels can be found in the Mark Adjust mode explained later.
L, M: Cut Outer Noise, Cut Inner Noise
These parameters are used to cut the noise that usually appears within or outside the mark image when the mark is
recognized as a binary image.
N: Sequence
Set to "Normal" in most cases. If the recognition speed is important select "Quick", or if recognition accuracy is important
select "Fine".

1-78
 7. Using and editing the database
7.1 Using the database
You can make use of sample data registered in the database to create "parts information" and "mark
1
information" more efficiently. You can also store the currently edited "parts information" and "mark information"
into the database. The following sections explain the database using parts information screens as examples.

Creating and editing the board data

7.1.1 Copying data from the database (Set from Database)
To copy data from the database into the board data parameters being edited, follow the steps below.

1 Select the component of mark to which you want to copy data from the database.
2 Open the database.
Select "Database Support" from the Tool menu and then click "Overview Database", or directly click the
[Overview Database] button on the toolbar. The Part (or Mark) database list appears.

Reference
You can also select the "Database Support" – "Overview Database" command from the context menu that appears
when you right-click on the selected component or mark.

Opening the database list

64145-S1-00

1-79
 3 Select the data and copy it into the parameters.
In the database list dialog box, select the data to be copied and click the [Set] button.
Click the [OK] button in the dialog box that appears, and the selected data is copied from the

1
database.

Database list
Copying from database
Creating and editing the board data

64146-S1-00

Reference
The same task can be performed with the "Set from Database (F7)" command in the "Database Support" submenu of
the Tool menu. In this case, you must first check the database number for the data to be copied and enter that
number in the "Database Number" field beforehand.

Reference
When you select the "Set from Database All" command from the "Database Support" submenu of the Tool menu, the
data will be copied from the database into all the parts (or mark) data with the database number you specified in
the "Database Number" field.

4 Click the [Close] button to close the database list.

Check that the "Database Number" field in the [Basic] tab grid now shows the correct database number
from which you have copied the data.

Data display after copying from database

64147-S1-00

1-80
 7.1.2 Storing the data into the database (Copy Back to Database)
Parameter data you have edited can be stored into the database.

1 Select the component or mark from which you want to copy the data into the
database. 1
2 Open the database.
From the Tool menu, select "Database Support" and then click "Overview Database" to open the

Creating and editing the board data

database list.

Reference
You can also open the database list by directly clicking the [Overview Database] button on the toolbar or by
selecting the command from the context menu that appears by clicking the right mouse button on the selected
component or mark.

Opening the database list

64148-S1-00

1-81
 3 Select the database number where you want to store the data.
1. In the database list, select the DB No. (database number) and click the [Write] button.

1
2. When a conformation dialog box appears, click the [OK] button.
The component data (or mark data) is now stored in the selected database number row.

Database
Storing the data into database
Creating and editing the board data

64149-S1-00

c CAUTION
New component data (or mark data) is created in the selected database number row where no data is registered.
However, if data is present in the selected database number row, the existing data in the database will be overwritten.
In this case, an alert dialog box appears to let you confirm this action.

4 When an alert dialog box appears, check the message and select the action.
Database
Alert dialog box

64150-S1-00

Click [Yes]:
Click [Yes] to store the data into the selected database number row. The database number where the
data is stored will be entered in the "Database Number" field on the [Basic] tab of parts (or mark)
information.

Click [No]:
Click [No] to cancel storing the data into the selected database number row. The database number will
not be entered in the "Database Number" field on the [Basic] tab of parts (or mark) information.
Click the [Set Number] button if you want to enter the database number in the "Database Number" field
on the [Basic] tab of parts (or mark) information.

1-82
5 Click the [Close] button to close the database list.
Check that the "Database Number" field in the [Basic] tab grid now shows the correct database number
you have selected.

Data display after storing data into database

1

Creating and editing the board data

64151-S1-00

Reference
The same task can be performed with the "Copy Back to Database" command in the "Database Support" submenu
of the Tool menu.

Reference
When you select the "Copy Back Database All" command from the "Database Support" submenu of the Tool menu, all
data being edited will be copied into the database.

1-83
 7.2 Editing the database
The parts database and mark database can be edited as needed.

1 Use the Parts or Mark Database Editor to edit the database. The following explains an example of editing the
database using parts information screens as examples.

1 Select the data to be edited.

In the tree view, click the Parts or Mark icon to display the parts or mark information in the main view.
Then select the data row you want to edit.
Creating and editing the board data

2 Start the Database Editor.

From the Tool menu, select "Database Support" and then click "Database Edit" to start the Database
Editor.
The Database Editor window opens showing the database number assigned to the selected data.

Reference
You can also start the Database Editor by directly clicking the [Database Edit] button on the toolbar or by selecting
the "Database Support" - "Database Edit" command from the context menu that appears by clicking the right mouse
button on the selected data.

Starting the Database Editor

Parts database

Select the data

you want edit.

Database No. row for

the selected data is
highlighted.

64152-S1-00

Reference
The "Parts Database Editor" and "Mark Database Editor" commands are also available from the File menu. In this case,
selecting the "Parts Database Editor" command starts the Parts Database Editor even when mark data is selected,
and vice versa.

3 Edit each parameter.

While manipulating the tree view to display each parameter, edit it as needed.
Reference
For how to set each parameter, see section 5, "Creating the parts information", or section 6, " Creating the mark
information", in this chapter.

1-84
4 Save the database.
Select "Save Database" or "Save Database As" from the File menu.
If you select "Save Data As", enter the file name in the dialog box that appears, and then click the [OK]

1
button.

Reference
The database can also be saved (overwritten) with the [Save Database] button on the toolbar.

Saving the database

Creating and editing the board data

Use these commands.
64153-S1-00

5 Exit the Database Editor.

Select "Exit" from the File menu. The Database Editor closes and returns to the previous screen.

Exiting the Database Editor

64193-S1-00

1-85
 7.3 Database matching
After entering the parts names (mark names) in the board data being edited, you can use the database matching

1 that searches through the user database area (numbered 1001 or above) to find the parts data (or mark data)
with the same names. When a match is found, the contents of the parts data (or mark data) are copied from the
database to the board data.
From the Tool menu, select "Database Support" and click "Database Matching" to use the database matching.
The following message box appears. Click the [OK] button in the message box to start the database matching.
Creating and editing the board data

Message box for database matching

64155-S1-00

Reference
The database matching performs the following tasks:
• Searches through the user database area (numbered 1001 or above) to find the parts data (or mark data) with
the same names as those entered in the board data being edited. When the data with the same names are
found in the user database area, the contents of the data will be copied from the database to the board data.
(The board data will be overwritten.)
• If the check box in the bottom of the above message box is selected and no match is found in the user database
area, the parts data (or mark data) you have created for the board data will be stored into empty positions in the
user database area.
• The database matching will be performed on the parts data (or mark data) to which the data in the database
has already copied. If two or more items of data with the same name are registered in the user database area,
the data with the smallest number will be copied.

n About the matching target

The following conditions can be selected as a database matching.

Parts Database

1 Parts name Database name

2 Parts name Database comment

3 Comment Database name

4 Comment Database comment

5 Parts name & Comment Database name & Database comment

About 5, when both part names and the database names, and part comments and database comments are
corresponding,it targets it in the matching.

1-86
n About Matching operation
It becomes processing up to now to the current for the operation of the matching.

1
This setting of the matching from the boad data becomes effective.
And the condition of the match is displayed in the dialog.

Database Matching

Creating and editing the board data

64191-S1-00

n Setting method.
To use this function, it sets it with 'Option Setting'.
The 'Database' tab in 'Option Setting' is opened.
Please select the condition by 'Database Matching Condition' in the screen.

Option Setting

64192-S1-00

n Limitations
There are no limitations.

1-87
 7.4 Function of Database matching from board
In the board editor of YGOS2, part data of the name same after No. 1001 of part database, it will be written

1 from the part data to a part database.

Database matching from board

Creating and editing the board data

64193-S1-00

This function performs the following operation.

• Selection of a menu “Tool | Database Support | Database Matching | Database write from Board” is displayed on a
menu.
• Specification of whether to register the parts which were not in agreement in a check dialog of operation after No.1001
is possible.
• Database matching from board can be performed from a check dialog.
• In Database matching from board, a part database is changed immediately.

n Precondition
• It is a precondition that the part name of part information is set up.

n Menu Selection
• ”Tool | Database Support | Database Matching | Database write from Board” select.

Menu Selection

64194-S1-00

1-88
n Execution check dialog
• When a menu is select, the following check dialog is displayed.

1
• Specification of operation “Write new parts to the DATABASE” in this dialog is possible.
• An execution dialog will be displayed if the [OK] button is pushed in an execution check dialog.

Execution check dialog

Creating and editing the board data

64195-S1-00

The parts which did not match a Database are registered into the empty domain after No.1001.
The registered database number is set to the part.

n Execution
• Matching will be started if a [Matching] button is pushed in the following and an execution dialog.

Execution dialog

64196-S1-00

1-89
 • The following is displayed during matching.

1
Displayed during matching
Creating and editing the board data

64197-S1-10

n End
• The following message is displayed after a Database matching from board is completed.
• It will end, if the [OK] button is pushed.

End message

64198-S1-00

n Restriction matter

When two or more same names as part data exist, the write to a database is performed in order with a small
number each, and the part information finally matched at the end is write.

1-90
 8. Editing the board data
The contents of board data already registered can be efficiently edited or optimized with the Board Editor.

8.1 Block offset

1
A multi-block board is a printed circuit board consisting of two or more independent printed circuits of the

Creating and editing the board data

same type. Each printed circuit on a multi-block board is called a "block". Setting the block offset allows the
machine to repeat the same mounting operation in each block on a board, based on the reference block data.
This function therefore greatly saves the time required for creating data on multi-block boards.

Block offset concept

With the block
repeat function, you
can create or change
the data on an entire multi- Block Multi-block Board
block Board, by simply
creating or editing the
reference block data.

63148-S1-00

8.1.1 Pitch distribution

Pitch distribution allows you to create block offset data by just specifying the number of blocks and the block
pitch.

1 Click the Offset icon under the board icon in the tree view to open the Offset
information screen.
2 Enter the block offset for block No.1.
In the X and Y fields in the No.1 row, enter the block offset for block No. 1 (origin position in block No.1
relative to the board origin). This is used as the reference coordinates for other blocks. You do not have
to enter offset here if the origin position in block No.1 is the same as the board origin position. (Leave
the XY fields set at "0.00".)

3 Execute pitch distribution.

From the Tool menu, select "Block Offset" and then click "Pitch Distribute". The "Pitch Distribution" dialog
box appears.

c CAUTION
The following conditions must be met to execute pitch distribution.
• No offset data is entered for blocks other than block No.1.
• Offset coordinates after pitch distribution will be set within the range from –999.999 to 999.999.
• The number of blocks after pitch distribution does not exceed 512.

Selecting the "Pitch Distribute" command

Block No.1 offset data

64157-S1-00

1-91
 4 Enter the block pitch and the number of blocks.
When the "Pitch Distribution" dialog box appears, enter the block pitch and the number of blocks in the
X and Y directions, and then click the [OK] button. The pitch distribution will start.

1 Pitch distribution setting

Creating and editing the board data

Board origin position

X Origin position in block No.1

64158-S1-00

5 Check the distributed block offset data.

After pitch distribution is complete, the offset data distributed over each block is displayed, so check
the block offset data. The "Skip" check boxes are all cleared after pitch distribution. If there are blocks
where you want to skip mounting components, click the [Check Box] button at the upper left and then
mark the "Skip" check boxes. (The "Skip" check boxes can be edited only when the [Check Box] button is
pressed.)

Block offset data after pitch distribution

Distributed block offset data

"Skip" check box
64159-S1-00

1-92
8.1.2 Pitch distribution of data after offset distribution

n Outline of functions
• The Offset Data can be added by executing the Pitch Distribute from the state where offset data exists.
• The Offset Data is partially made again by executing the Pitch Distribute from the state where offset data exists.
1
Therefore, the Offset Data can be made for the Board like the figure below.

Creating and editing the board data

Efficiency of creating board data

63151-S1-00

n Detailed explanation of operation

Line Data

641A0-S1-00

1-93
 n Additional Pitch Distribute
When the Offset Data existed as shown in the above figure, the Pitch Distribute was not able to be executed.

1
By the improvement, the Offset Data can be added by executing the Pitch Distribute from the state where
Offset Data exists.
Executing the Pitch Distribute from the state where offset data exists, the following message is displayed.
Offset Data can be added by selecting [Yes].

Additional Pitch Distribute

Creating and editing the board data

641A1-S1-00

n Partial Pitch Distribute

When the Offset Data existed as shown in the above figure, the Pitch Distribute was not able to be executed.
By the improvement, the Offset Data is partially made again by executing the Pitch Distribute from the state
where offset data exists.
Executing the Pitch Distribute from the state where offset data exists, the following message is displayed.
When [No] is selected, the following dialog is displayed.

Partial Pitch Distribute

641A2-S1-00

1-94
 8.1.3 Block distribution
Executing block distribution copies the mount data for the reference block and distributes it over all other

1
blocks. The distributed mount data is automatically entered and displayed on the mount information screen
according to the blocks or mount data.

1 Open the Offset information in the main view.

2 Check the block offset data.

Creating and editing the board data

At least one item of block offset data must have been entered to execute block distribution.

Checking the block offset data

At least one item of block offset data must have been entered.
64160-S1-00

3 Select "Block distribution" from the Tool menu.

From the Tool menu, select "Block Offset" and then click "Block Distribute", or click the [Block Distribute]
button on the toolbar. A dialog box appears to let you choose the type of block distribution.

Block distribution

Step4
64161-S1-00

1-95
 4 Select the type of block distribution.
1. Select the type of block distribution from the upper drop-down list.

1
"Block Distribution (with Note Data)"
Select this option when you want to keep the original data.

"Block Distribution (without Note Data)"

Select this option when you do not want to keep the original data.

"Block Distribution Return"

Creating and editing the board data

Returns block-distributed data to the original data. See the next section 8.1.4, "Block distribution return".

c CAUTION
When "Block Distribution (without Note Data)" is selected, the original data will be lost and "block distribution return"
(explained in the next section) cannot be performed.

2. Select the block distribution type from the lower drop-down list.
Select "Block Repeat" or "Column Repeat" from the Type drop-down list.

Block distribution type

"Block Repeat" "Column Repeat"
All data rows in mount information are copied Each data row in mount information is
and pasted by the specified number of blocks. repeatedly copied and pasted by the specified
number of blocks.
Before distribution After distribution Before distribution After distribution
1 P01 1 P01 1 P01 1 P01
2 P02 2 P02 2 P02 2 P01
3 P03 3 P03 3 P03 3 P01
4 4 P01 4 4 P01
5 5 P02 5 5 P01
6 6 P03 6 6 P01
7 7 P01 7 7 P02
8 8 P02 8 8 P02
9 9 P03 9 9 P02
10 10 P01 10 10 P02
11 11 P02 11 11 P02
12 12 P03 12 12 P02
13 13 P01 13 13 P03
14 14 P02 14 14 P03
15 15 P03 15 15 P03
16 16 P01 16 16 P03
17 17 P02 17 17 P03
18 18 P03 18 18 P03

63149-S1-00

3. Click the [OK] button after selecting the block distribution type.

5 Start block distribution.

When another dialog box appears, check the message and click the [Yes] button to start block
distribution.

6 Check the message that appears and click the [OK] button.
A dialog box appears when block distribution is complete. Check the message and click the [OK]
button.

1-96
7 Check the distributed block offset data.
The "Skip" check boxes are all cleared after block distribution. If there are blocks where you want to skip
mounting components, click the [Check Box] button at the upper left and then mark the "Skip" check

1
boxes. (The "Skip" check boxes can be edited only when the [Check Box] button is pushed in.)

Block offset data after block distribution

"Block Repeat" ("With Note Data")

Creating and editing the board data

"Note" means original
data still remains.

64162-S1-00

8 Save the board data.

1-97
 8.1.4 Block distribution return
Block distribution return allows you to restore the distributed block offset to the original data.

1 c CAUTION
This command is available only when the "With Note Data" check box was selected before executing block offset
distribution.

1 Execute block distribution return.

Creating and editing the board data

From the Tool menu, select "Block Offset" and then click "Block Distribute Return".

2 Check the message that appears.

A confirmation dialog box appears. Check the message and click the [Yes] button.

Block distribution return

64163-S1-00

3 Check the message that appears and click the [OK] button.
A dialog box appears when block distribution return is complete. Check the message and click the [OK]
button.

4 Check that the original block offset data has been restored.
Check that "Note" in the Skip column has disappeared and the original block offset data is now
displayed.

Block conversion return

Return from "Block Repeat" ("With Note Data")

Original data before block distribution is displayed.

64164-S1-00

1-98
 8.2 Editing the parts information

1
8.2.1 Moving the data between machines
Each item of parts data can be moved to the parts information of another machine in the same line. Its mount
data is also moved.
Reference
This operation can be performed between machines even if the data is filtered or sorted.

Creating and editing the board data

1 Open the parts information in the main view.
2 Select the row of the parts data you want to move to another machine.
Reference
Two or more parts can be selected while holding down the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key.

3 Move the selected data to another machine.

1. From the Tool menu, select "Parts Information Support" and then click "Move Parts".

Reference
The "Move Parts" command can also be selected from the context menu that appears when the right mouse button is
clicked on the selected data row.

Selecting the "Move Parts" command

64165-S1-00

2. When the "Move Machine" dialog box appears, select the destination machine from the drop-down
list.
3. Also select the "Move within the current machine" check box.

Reference
When this check box is selected, the parts data No. will automatically change according to the parts information of
the destination machine.

4. If you want to remove the source data, select the "Delete source data" check box.
When this check box is selected, the "Select Move Pos." check box then appears.
5. Select the "Select Move Pos." check box if specifying the destination position.
The "To Ins. No." entry box then appears. So enter the destination position number.

Reference
When the destination position number is not specified, the data will move to an empty position with the lowest number.

1-99
 Selecting the destination machine

1
Enter the destination position number.
Creating and editing the board data

Select this check box if specifying Select the destination machine.

the destination position number.

64166-S1-00

6. Click the [OK] button to move the data to the specified machine.
7. When a dialog box appears indicating that the data has moved, click the [OK] button to quit this
function and close the dialog box.

Reference
When parts defined for an alternative parts loop are moved, all the parts associated in that loop are moved to the
specified machine.

8.2.2 Multiplying the parts data

This function allows parts data to multiply into two or more units of the same data. This means that the
multiplied data can be supplied from two or more feeders. When a large amount of the same parts are used for
one board, this function shortens the time required to produce a board.
Reference
This operation can be performed between machines even if the data is filtered or sorted.

1 Open the parts information in the main view.

2 Select the row of the parts data you want to move to another machine.
3 Multiply the selected data.
1. From the Tool menu, select "Parts Information Support" and then click "Multiply Parts".

Reference
The "Multiply Parts" command can also be selected from the context menu (right-click menu) that appears when the
right mouse button is clicked on the selected data row.

Selecting the "Multiply Parts" command

64167-S1-00

1-100
 2. When the "Multiply Parts" dialog box appears.
3. In the "Multiply No." box, type the number you want to multiply by.

Entering the number to multiply by

1

Creating and editing the board data

Select this check box if
using the multiplied data
as alternative parts.
Type the number you want to multiply by.
64168-S1-00

4. Select the "Altemative Parts Loop" check box if using the multiplied data as alternative parts for the
source parts data.

Reference
When the multiplied data is specified as alternative parts, the source parts data and multiplied parts data can be
used as alternative parts for each other by making the following settings just like a loop.
[Example 1]
If parts No.1 data has been multiplied by 2, and you now have parts No.1 and No.2, make the settings as follows:
• Set the "Alternative Parts" parameter of parts No.1 to "2".
• Set the "Alternative Parts" parameter of parts No.2 to "1".
[Example 2]
If parts No.1 data has been multiplied by 3, and you now have parts No.1, No.2 and No.3, make the settings as follows:
• Set the "Alternative Parts" parameter of parts No.1 to "2".
• Set the "Alternative Parts" parameter of parts No.2 to "3".
• Set the "Alternative Parts" parameter of parts No.3 to "1".

5. Click the [Multiply] button to multiply the parts data.

6. When a dialog box appears indicating that the parts data has been multiplied, click the [OK] button
to quit this function and close the dialog box.

1-101
 8.2.3 Renumbering the parts data
The parts data can be sorted and/or deleted when not used in the mount information.

1 1 Open the parts information in the main view.

2 Select any row in the parts data grid display.
3 Renumber the parts data.
1. Select "Parts Information Support" from the Tool menu.
Creating and editing the board data

2. Click "Renumber Parts". The "Renumber" dialog box appears.

Reference
The "Renumber Parts" command can also be selected from the context menu (right-click menu) that appears when
the right mouse button is clicked.

Selecting the "Renumber Parts" command

64169-S1-00

"Renumber" dialog box

64170-S1-00

1-102
 3. Select the "Renumber by parts number" or "Renumber by feeder set number" option button.
4. Select the "Renumber" check box.
The "Delete" check box is also selected automatically at this point. Clear this check box if you want
to renumber the data without deleting any data even though they are not currently used.
5. Click the [Execute] button to renumber the data.
A dialog box then appears indicating that renumbering is complete. Click the [OK] button to return
1
to the previous screen.

Reference

Creating and editing the board data

If you want to only delete the data that are not currently used, select the "Delete" check box and clear the
"Renumber" check box.

1-103
 8.3 Creating the sequence data
This section explains methods for creating sequence data using laser height correction and dispense

1 distribution. The sequence function is available depending on the specifications.

8.3.1 Height correction

As an optional function for i-Cube machines, a laser displacement meter can be used to correct the dispensing
or component mounting height. This function is mainly used with the nozzle height correction function using a
Creating and editing the board data

touch sensor.
■ Creating the board data for the height correction function
To use the height correction function, "Running Mode" on the board parameter screen must be set to "Sequence". Data
format for the height correction function resembles the 2-point local fiducial mark setting. Make the settings as explained
below.

1 Set the "Running Mode" parameter.

Click the board icon under the board icon in the tree view and then set the "Running Mode" parameter
to "Sequence".

2 Set the "Mark Type" parameter.

Click the Basic icon under the Mark icon in the tree view and then enter the name in the Mark Name
column and set the "Mark Type" parameter to "Height Correction".

Mark parameter screen

Setting "Mark Type" to "Height Correction"

Step 2

Step 3
Step 4

64171-S1-00

3 Set the "Post Sequence" parameter.

This parameter specifies the action after a measurement error. An error example is when the
measurement result is outside the range between "Upper Limit" and "Lower Limit" or an error occurs
during the measurement. Select from "Stop", "Skip" or "Select".
"Stop":
The machine stops immediately after a measurement error occurs. When automatic operation
restarts, the machine will repeat the measurement from the beginning.
"Skip":
After a measurement error occurs, the machine will skip data with the same local height No. (except
"0") and local badmark No. (except "0") in the sequence information.
"Select:
The machine immediately stops after a measurement error occurs. You can then select "Stop" or
"Skip" as the next action.

4 Set the upper and lower limits.

Enter the upper and lower limits in millimeters to set an acceptable measurement result range. The
downward direction is positive (+) and the upward direction is negative (-), just as with the head
coordinate system.

1-104
5 Set the height correction mode.
Click the Height icon under the board icon in the tree view or click the [Height] tab in the main view to
open the Height parameter screen. Then, enter the comment in the Comment column and set the

1
height correction mode (number of height measurement points) in the Mode column.
• When measuring 1 point, set to "Local-M".
• When measuring 2 points to take an average, make the settings in 2 rows. Set the first row to
"Local-M" and the second row to "Local-S".

Creating and editing the board data

Height parameter screen
Mode setting
Step 5

Step 6

Step 7

64172-S1-00

6 Enter the mark No.

In the Mark column, enter the mark No. you set in steps 2 to 4.

7 Enter the XY coordinates.

Enter the XY coordinates to be measured.

8 Enter the height correction No.

Select the [Sequence] tab and, in the Height column, specify the number you set on the Height
parameter screen in step 5.

n NOTE
When using an average of 2-point measurements, enter the No. for "Local-M".

1-105
 8.3.2 Executing the height correction distribution
As explained in the previous section, the mark number used for height correction and its XY position must be

1
specified on the Height parameter screen so that the height correction number can be referred to by a sequence
program. This task can be easily done by executing height correction distribution as explained below.
When executing height correction distribution, please note the following caution and conditions.

c CAUTION
Distributed data cannot be restored. We recommend saving the board data before height correction distribution.
Creating and editing the board data

n NOTE
• The Mark column in the Height tab grid will be set to "0" by default. So you have to re-enter the correct mark
number after height distribution.
• Two-point height correction cannot be performed.
• When the height correction reference number is already specified in the range selected in the Sequence tab grid
for height distribution, the XY coordinates in the Sequence tab grid are overwritten by the XY coordinates of the
reference number in the Height tab grid. If height correction information does not exist at the reference number,
height correction is distributed with the mark number "0" and "Local-M" mode.
• When height correction information exists in the Height tab grid, it is sequentially distributed from the data that
have not yet been used.

1 Select the range to execute height correction distribution.

1. Click the Sequence icon under the board icon in the tree view or click the [Sequence] tab in the
main view.
2. Select the range where you want to execute height correction distribution, by dragging the mouse
or clicking while pressing the [Shift] key on the leftmost, unlabeled column.
If not selected, the entire range will be chosen.

2 From the Tool menu, select "Sequence Data Support" and then click "Height
Distribution".
The "Height Correction Distribution" dialog box appears.

3 Select the mode from the drop-down list.

Select the item to execute height correction distribution, from among "Comp", "Check", "Dot" and "Act".
If choosing all items, select "ALL.

Selecting the "Height Distribution" command

Selected range
is highlighted.

64173-S1-00

1-106
4 Execute height correction distribution.
Click the [OK] button in the "Height Correction Distribution" dialog box. The following confirmation dialog
box then appears. Click the [Yes] button to execute height correction distribution.

Confirmation dialog box

1

Creating and editing the board data

64174-S1-00

5 Enter the mark number.

In the Mark column on the Height screen, enter the mark number used for height correction.

Entering mark number

Enter the mark

number here.

64175-S1-00

c CAUTION
To enable the height correction function, be sure to select "Execute" from the Height drop-down list on the Height
screen.

8.3.3 Dispense distribution

When creating a sequence program that contains dispense and mount data, you will usually have to use the
following procedure.
1. Create mount data (XY coordinates, head No., parts No., etc.).
2. Select and copy the mount data and then paste it in the sequence information as dot dispense data.
3. Change the Mode setting for the pasted data, from "Comp" to "Dot".
4. In the Parts - Dispense tab grid, set the "Dispense Unit" parameter for the data whose Mode setting was changed to
"Dot".
5. Change the head No.
The dispense distribution function allows you to perform the above procedure easily.

c CAUTION
Distributed data cannot be restored. We recommend saving the board data before dispense distribution.

n NOTE
• Distributed data will be inserted in the top of the sequence information.
• If the "Dispense Unit" parameter in the Parts - Dispense tab grid is not specified, the dispense amount is viewed as
"0" when distributed in the sequence information.
• Dispense sequence number will be set to "-1". If you want to use another dispenses sequence number, change it
after dispense distribution.
• Interference check is not performed.
• Optimization is not performed.

1-107
 1 Select the range to execute dispense distribution.
1. Click the Sequence icon under the board icon in the tree view or click the [Sequence] tab in the
main view.

1 2. Select the range where you want to execute dispense distribution, by dragging the mouse or clicking
while pressing the [Shift] key on the leftmost, unlabeled column.
If not selected, the entire range will be chosen.

2 Execute dispense distribution.

Creating and editing the board data

From the Tool menu, select "Sequence Data Support" and then click "Dispense Distribution".
When the "Dispense Distribution" dialog box appears, click the [Yes] button.

Selecting the "Dispense Distribution" command

Selected range
is highlighted.

64176-S1-00

3 Check the distributed data.

Make sure that the distributed data is inserted in the top of the sequence information.

Display after dispense distribution

Dot dispense data is created here.

64177-S1-00

1-108
 8.4 Creating the dot dispense information
This section explains how to dot dispense information such as dispense position and dispense amount.
Dot dispense information is displayed depending on the specifications.

8.4.1 Dispense distribution 1

Executing dispense distribution using dispense parameters in the mount information and parts information
creates dot dispense data automatically. To execute this dispense distribution, follow these steps.

Creating and editing the board data

c CAUTION
Dispense distribution cannot be executed unless the mount information and parts information are specified.

1 Open the Dot Dispense parameter screen in the main view.

2 Execute dispense distribution.
From the Tool menu, select "Dot Dispense" and then click "Bond Distribution" or "Solder Distribution".
The "Machine Select" dialog box then appears. Select the machine and then click the [OK] button to
execute dot distribution. Dot dispense coordinates will be created according to the mount data.

c CAUTION
Executing dispense distribution will overwrite the current dispense data.

Dispense distribution

Select either of
these commands.

Check the machine to

execute dispense
distribution.

Distributed data
is displayed.

64178-S1-00

1-109
 3 Sort the dispense coordinates.
From the Tool menu, select "Dot Dispense" and then click "Sort" or "Sort by every head".
If you are going to check alignment amount, select "Sort by every head".

1 4 Perform an interference check.

From the Tool menu, select "Dot Dispense" and then click "Interference Check.
This command checks whether the stopper at the nozzle steps on dispensed dots. If such a possibility
exists, the related data rows will be displayed, so correct them.
Creating and editing the board data

Interference check

Results of interference
check are displayed.

64179-S1-00

1-110
 8.5 Data check
To check currently open board data and nozzle interference, follow these steps.

1 Select "Data Check" - "Execute Data Check" from the Tool menu.
The "Data Check" dialog box appears. 1
Data check

Creating and editing the board data

64180-S1-00

2 Set the items to be checked.

In the "Data Check" dialog box, select the items to be checked by placing a check mark.
• Normal Check
Select this check box to check part No. and mark No. consistency in the board data.
• Nozzle Interference Check
Select the "Execute" check box to make a nozzle interference check.
When this is selected, also select either of the following check methods from the drop-down list.

"With mount order"

Makes a nozzle interference check on the optimized board data.
This method cannot be used for board data that are not optimized. A warning message appears if this
method is selected for such board data. Clicking the [OK] button in the warning message automatically
changes the selection to "Check all cases".

"Check all cases"

Makes a nozzle interference check without regard to the component placement order, or the machine
and head to be used.
When "Check all cases" is selected, the "Parts Group Number Auto Set" check box becomes available.
Select this check box when you want to automatically assign group numbers so as to avoid nozzle
interference. Those group numbers are then set in the Parts Group No. field on the [Option] tab in parts
information. Optimization should be conducted again to create data for avoiding interference.

3 Click the [Execute] button to start data check.

When the data check is complete, a dialog box then appears to show the results.

n NOTE
The nozzle interference check results can be checked on the Graphic View. If errors are found, the error status is
displayed in color.

1-111
 n When no error is found:
After "Normal Check"

1
The message "Data check finished" appears. Click the [Close] button to quit the data check.
After "Nozzle Interference Check"
The "Nozzle Interference Check Result" dialog box appears. Click the [OK] button to quit the data check.

n When an error is found:

After "Normal Check"
Creating and editing the board data

The "Board data error" dialog box appears. Click the [OK] button to quit the data check.
After "Nozzle Interference Check"
The "Nozzle Interference Check Result" dialog box appears. This dialog box shows colors used to display parts in the
Graphic View. In the Graphic View, part contours probably causing interference are displayed in the following colors.
Click the [OK] button to quit the data check.

n Nozzle interference check results

Part contour colors Description

Indicates parts which might cause interference with other parts during
Black
placement.
Indicates parts which might be hit by parts shown in black contour during
Red
placement.

Pink Indicates adjacent parts which might interfere with each other.

White Indicates parts which will not cause any interference.

Data check
Graphic View display example

Parts causing interference Parts not causing interference

64181-S1-00

Reference
To clear the results shown in the Graphic View, select "Data Check" - "Clear check result" from the Tool menu.

1-112
 9. Printing the board data
The Board Editor allows you to print information on board data.

9.1 Printing the board data

1

Creating and editing the board data

1 Open the board data you want to print.
2 In the tree view, select the item to be printed.
3 Select "Print" from the File menu.
The "Print" dialog box appears.

Reference
You can also click the [Print] button on the toolbar to open the "Print" dialog box.

Reference
When you are going to print "parts information" or "mark information", another dialog box appears to let you select
whether to print "List" or "Detail". Select "List" to print the contents of the main view or select "Detail" to print the
contents of the detail view, and then click the [OK] button. The "Print" dialog box will appear.

4 Start printing.
After checking the printer settings and the number of copies to print, click the [OK] button to start
printing.

Printing the Board data

64182-S1-00

1-113
 ● Printer settings
To make the printer settings:

1
1. Select "Printer Properties" from the File menu.
2. In the "Printer" dialog box, set the printer, paper size and orientation.
3. If using a network printer, click the [Network] button and select the printer.

Printer settings
Creating and editing the board data

64183-S1-00

● Print preview
To open the print preview window to check how the data will be printed, select "Preview" from the File menu.
When you are going to open the print preview of "parts information" or "mark information", another dialog box
appears to let you select whether to preview "List" or "Detail".

Print preview display

64184-S1-00

1-114
● If the data cannot be printed
Check that the printer is correctly connected to your PC. If the printer is not yet added to your PC, add it on

1
Windows as follows. (The Start menu items may slightly differ depending on the OS.)
1. From the Start menu, select "Settings" – "Printers" to open the Printers folder.

Start menu

Creating and editing the board data

64185-S1-00

2. Double-click the Add Printers icon.

3. When the Add Printer wizard starts, follow the instructions that appear.

Add Printer wizard

64186-S1-00

1-115
Chapter 2 Creating solder-print data

Contents

1. Registering and selecting the board data 2-1

1.1 Registering a new board data name 2-1
1.2 Selecting the board data 2-3

2. Board data setting 2-4

2.1 Board data detail setting 2-8

3. Mask data setting 2-11

3.1 Mask data detail setting 2-14

4. Squeegee data setting 2-15

4.1 Squeegee detail setting 2-19

5. Cleaner data setting 2-21

6. Creating the mark data 2-23

6.1 Creating procedure 2-24
6.2 Shape parameters 2-26
6.3 Vision parameters 2-28
 1. Registering and selecting the board data
First, you must register a new board name to create new data. Register a new board name as follows.

1.1 Registering a new board data name

1 Start the Board Editor.

2
From the Start menu on the Windows taskbar, select "Programs" - "YAMAHA Factory Tools P-Tool" and
then click "Board Editor".

2 Select the line to be used.

When two or more lines (production lines) are registered, the "Select Editing Line" dialog box appears.
Select the line to be used and click the [OK] button.

Creating solder-print data

3 Create new board data.
Select "Create New Board Data" from the File menu or click the [New Board Data] button on the toolbar.

Selecting "Create New Board Data" from File menu

64200-S1-00

2-1
 4 Save the new board data.
1. Select "Save Board Data" from the File menu or click the [Save Board Data] button on the toolbar.
The dialog box appears for selecting the board data.
2. Enter a board name (up to 20 alphanumeric characters) from the keyboard.
Also select "Printer Text" , "YGZ" or "Default" from the File Type drop-down list.
3. Check or select the folder in which the board data will be saved and click the [Save] button.
The registered board name is displayed in the tree view.

n NOTE

2
A space cannot be included in a board name. Use underbars in place of the space.

c CAUTION
An alert dialog box appears if board data with the same name already exists. Use a different name. (If you want to
register the same name by overwriting the previous data, press the [OK] button in the alert dialog box.)
Creating solder-print data

Saving the Board data

Enter the Board name.

Select "Printer Text","YGZ" or "Default".

64201-S1-00

2-2
 1.2 Selecting the board data
To select board data from those already registered, proceed as follows.

1 Open the board data.

Select "Open Board on This Editor" from the File menu or click the [Open Board on This Editor] button on
the toolbar.
The "Board data select" dialog box appears.

Reference
To open the board data, you may also select "Open Board on New Editor" from the File menu or click the [Open

2
Board on New Editor] button on the toolbar.

Opening the board data

Creating solder-print data

64202-S1-00

2 Select the board name.

When the "Board data select" dialog box appears, place the cursor on the board name you want to
open and click the [Select] button (or directly double-click the board name to open it). The selected
board data will be loaded and the board name displayed in the tree view.

Selected board name

Selected Board name is displayed.

64203-S1-00

2-3
 2. Board data setting
To check or edit the board data, select the Print - Board icon in the tree view (or select the [Board] tab in the
main view.)

Print – Board screen

1 4 2 5 6 3

2
Creating solder-print data

[Detail Setting] button

64204-S1-00

1. Board Fiducial
Set this parameter to "Use" when using fiducial marks on the board for position alignment by vision recognition. If not
using vision recognition then set to "NotUse". Select the desired item from the board Fiducial drop-down list.
2. Fiducial Type
When "Board Fiducial" is set to "Use", select the fiducial type (number of fiducial marks to be recognized) from among "
1 Point" to "4 Points". These marks can be different in shape and size from each other. Select the desired item from the
Fiducial Type drop-down list.

Fiducial Type example (2 points)

+Y Mark 2
(X, Y)

Mark 1
(0, 0) (X, Y)
X+

Board origin
Board Datum Position (See item D.)
63200-S1-00

2-4
3. Fiducial Position
This parameter sets whether to share the local fiducial mark position with the board and the mask.
Select "Board&Mask Individual" or "Board&Mask Common" from the Fiducial Position drop-down list.
• When "Board&Mask Individual" is selected:
The Fiducial Position, Fiducial Type and Standard Position parameters can be set separately on the board and the mask.
• When "Board&Mask Common" is selected:
The Fiducial Position, Fiducial Type and Standard Position parameters are jointly shared by the board and mask. A
confirmation message box appears when you select "Board&Mask Common". Clicking the [OK] button in the message

2
box will copy the board fiducial setting (Fiducial Position, Fiducial Type and Standard Position parameters) into the mask
fiducial setting.

Confirmation message
Copying from board fiducial setting to mask fiducial setting

Creating solder-print data

64205-S1-00

Reference
If the Fiducial Position, Fiducial Type and/or Standard Position parameter are changed on the board or Mask
parameter screen, the change is automatically applied to the other items.

4. X, Y (mm)
Enter the XY coordinates of each fiducial mark relative to the board origin in millimeters. Enter the center coordinates in
the case of circular, square and triangular marks.
5. Mark No.
Enter the mark No. of each fiducial mark. (Mark No. should be registered in advance on the Mark screen.)
6. Name
When the mark No. is entered, the corresponding name automatically appears here. (Mark name should be registered in
advance on the Mark screen.)
A, B: Borad Size X, Y (mm)
Enter the board size (mm) in the X direction (board transfer direction) and in the Y direction. The conveyor width (W-axis)
is adjusted to the Y dimension + 0.5mm when the board is clamped during automatic operation.

Board X, Y

Board
Y [mm]

W=(Y+0.5mm)
X [mm]

Conveyor rail
63201-S1-00

C: Borad Size Z (mm)

Enter the board thickness (mm).
D: Comment
Type any desired comment as needed. You can leave this field blank.
E: Solder Name
Enter the solder name as needed. You can leave this field blank.

2-5
 F: Borad Datum Position
Set the reference position on a board select by selecting from "Center", "Front Center", "Rear Center", "Front Left", "Front
Right, "Rear Left" or "Rear Right" as shown below. On standard machines, this is set to "Front Center" as the default.

Board Datum Position

Board

2
Board Datum Position

63202-S1-00

Reference
The board has "Origin XY", "Fiducial (Mark)" and "Board Inspection Position" parameters as its setting positions .
Creating solder-print data

G,H: Origin X, Y (mm)

If the fiducial mark on a board uses an origin different from the Board Datum Position, set the positional offset (mm) here
as the Origin XY.

Board Datum Position and Board origin

+Y

Board

+Y

X-

Fixed (front) conveyor rail

X+

Board Datum Position (Front Center)

Board origin
63203-S1-00

I: Spin Timer (sec)

Set to "1" second for normal shape boards. If specially configured boards (for example, boards with cutouts or through-
holes) are used and the conveyor exit sensor cannot detect them correctly, try setting this timer between 0.0 and 9.9
seconds. The conveyor motor continues turning for the specified time even after the board sensor turns off.
J: Borad Vacuum
This parameter is enabled only for machines equipped with an optional vacuum gripper. Set to "NotUse" in most cases.
When curved boards or thin boards are to be printed, setting this parameter to "Use" actuates the vacuum gripper to fix
the board from the backside. When this parameter is set to "Use", also specify an appropriate time (msec) in the Vacuum
Timer and Board Vacuum sequence parameters.
K: Vacuum Timer (msec)
When the Board Vacuum parameter is set to "Use", set the timer (msec) here to initiate the next action after the push-up
plate has moved up. This parameter is enabled only for machines equipped with an optional vacuum gripper.
L: Borad Vacuum Sequence
Select the timing for board vacuum operation from "Before Clamp" or "After Clamp". This parameter is invalid only when
the Board Vacuum is set to "Use".
M: Edge Clamp
Set this parameter to "Use" in most cases when using the edge clamps that hold the board in the mounting position by
pushing laterally on the board edge. If using a thin ceramic board or the like that cannot be supported from the edges,
set to "NotUse" and use a vacuum gripper (option).
N: Borad Flap
Select whether to use the board flaps that press on the board edge from the top to correct curvature in the board. Set this
parameter to "Use" in most cases.

2-6
 O: Borad Press (option)
The board press unit holds down the board surface to correct the overall warp. Set this parameter to "Use" when using
the board press unit (option), or to "NotUse" when not using it. (This parameter is enabled only for machines equipped
with an optional board press unit.)
P: Press Timer (msec) (option)
Set the time during which the board press stays lowered until it starts to rise.
Q: Board Pres Sequence
Set this parameter to "Before Clamp" or "After Clamp" to change the board press and edge clamp operation timing.

2
When set to "Before Clamp", the board is first secured by the board press and then by the edge clamp.
When set to "After Clamp", the board is first secured by the edge clamp and then by the board press.
R: Push Up Speed (%)
Specify the ascent/descent speeds for the push-up plate in percentage. Setting to "100" is acceptable in most cases, but
reduce it if you want to lessen the impact when the push-up jigs or pins move up against the board.

Creating solder-print data

S: Print Execution
Select whether to print solder during operation.
QWhen this parameter is set to "Exec", the machine operates to print solder under the specified conditions. When set to
"Skip", the machine operates without lowering the squeegee head to the printing surface so that solder printing is
skipped.
T: Alignment
Select the processing method after fiducial mark recognition. Set to "UseAlign" in normal operation, and the machine
immediately stops when a mark recognition error occurs. When this is set to "IgnoreErr", the machine continues operation
even if a mark recognition error occurs.
U: Print Feedback
Always set this parameter to "Use" when producing boards. (If you want to check the squeegee head movement without
controlling the printing pressure, set this parameter to "NotUse".
V: Board Distortion Tol.(mm)
This parameter specifies the allowable distortion limit when checking the distortion component in the board fiducial
recognition position and local recognition positions on the board. The distortion check is not performed when this
parameter is set to "0.00".

c CAUTION
If the distortion component calculated by recognizing the board fiducial marks or local fiducial marks during
automatic operation exceeds the allowable limit specified here, an error message box appears and the machine
stops.

2-7
 2.1 Board data detail setting
When you press the [Detail Setting] button on the [Print]-[Board] screen, the following dialog box with the
[Manual Board Check], [Board Distortion parameter] and [Local Fid.] tabs appears. You can set the board check
positions, board distortion offset parameters and local fiducial function here.
Reference
Clicking the [Detail Setting] button on the toolbar of the [Print]-[Board] screen also allows the same operation.

● Board check positions

2
On the [Manual Board Check] tab, you can prespecify the positions on the board where you want to make a visual check
of printed solder. Set whether to use this function or not, as well as the board interval to make a visual check.

[Manual Board Check] tab

Creating solder-print data

64206-S1-00

● Board distortion offset

When using the board distortion offset function, enter the offset values X, Y and R that will be added to the overall
inspection coordinates to obtain the correct position data during solder-print inspection.

[Board Distortion parameter] tab

64207-S1-00

2-8
 When boards in the same lot tend to be elongated or distorted in the same direction, or the same problem appears only
in the board fiducial positions, then overall position deviations might occur in the solder-print inspection. These
deviations can occur regardless of whether print accuracy was maintained by visual alignment. If this happens, use the
board distortion offset function to add correction offsets to the overall inspection coordinates to get the correct position
using solder-print inspection results (solder position) of the printed board used as the reference.

Board distortion offset

Creating solder-print data

1. When the board fiducial positions have 2. Solder accurately printed on the land patterns
elongation or distortion, the board clamping is recognized by the vision camera and the
deviation cannot be corrected, and overall position offset data is used as feedback.
position deviations will occur in the (overall shift)
solder-print inspection results.
63204-S1-00

n NOTE
The solder-print inspection is run to acquire distortion values so solder-print inspection data must be created in
advance. As much objects to be inspected as possible should be entered in order to detect the correct print position
for the entire board. (See the "YVP-Xg Solder-print inspection" user's manual for more information.)

l Local fiducial function

Uniform printing accuracy at important points can be ensured by recognizing marks near positions where it is essential
to maintain good printing accuracy. This is especially true when printing on board within the same lot having elongation
or distortion irregularities. The [Local Fid.] tab allows you to set the type of mark and position coordinates of the local
fiducial marks being used.
Reference
Position correction with local fiducial marks is also used to calculate the print position, as well as calculate the printing
position for running the solder-print inspection on machines equipped with the solder-print inspection function (option).

Board fiducial and local fiducial functions

Board fiducial function

Board fiducial function Local fiducial function

1. This function runs board 2. This function uses board fiducial 3. If there is no elongation or
fiducial recognition and recognition results to correct the distortion on the board then no
calculates the amount of offset board deviation that may occur local fiducial recognition offset is
for correcting the board when clamped on the print table. issued. But if elongation or
deviation that may occur when It then recognizes the marks at distortion is present, the local
clamped on the print table. the local fiducial positions that fiducial recognition offset (only in
were preregistered. XY direction) is added unchanged,
to the board fiducial offset.

63205-S1-00

Reference
When there are multiple positions on the board where you want to essentially maintain satisfactory printing accuracy
and the local fiducial function is used on each of these positions, the average of the recognition offset amount for
each local fiducial mark is used as the correction offset.

2-9
 Local fiducial mark setting

1 2 3 4 5

2
Creating solder-print data

64208-S1-00

1. No.
Shows the local fiducial No.
2. Skip
Sets whether to run or to skip the local fiducial function for the specified No. Clear the check box if running the local
fiducial function.
3. X(mm), Y(mm)
Sets the position for the local fiducial mark position for the specified No. The coordinate reference position is the same
as the board fiducial mark.
4. Mark No.
Specifies the mark No. to use for recognizing the local fiducial mark of the specified No.
5. Name
Shows the name of the mark data specified in the mark No.

c CAUTION
Always set the board fiducial function to "Use" when using the local fiducial function. The board fiducial function is
disabled if set to "NotUse".

2-10
3. Mask data setting
To check or edit the mask data, select the Print - Mask icon in the tree view (or select the [Mask] tab in the
main view.)

Print – Mask screen

1 4 5 2 6 3

Creating solder-print data

[Detail Setting] button

64209-S1-00

1. Mask Fiducial
Set this parameter to "Use for every board" or "Use for one" when using mask fiducial marks for position alignment by
vision recognition. If not using mark recognition then set this to "NotUse". When set to "Use for every board", position
alignment by mark recognition is performed each time a board is loaded on the conveyor. When "Use for one" is selected,
position alignment by mark recognition is performed only when the first board is loaded. Select the desired item from the
Mark Fiducial drop-down list.
2. Fiducial Type
When "Mask Fiducial" is set to "Use For Every Board" or "Use For Once", select the fiducial type (number of fiducial
marks to be recognized) from among "1 Point" to "4 Points". These marks can be different in shape and size from each
other. Select the desired item from the Fiducial Type drop-down list.

Fiducial Type example (2 points)

+Y

Mark 2
(X, Y)
Mark 1
(-X, Y)

Mask origin X+

63206-S1-00

2-11
 3. Fiducial Position
This parameter sets whether to share the local fiducial mark position with the board and the mask.
Select "Board&Mask Individual" or "Board&Mask Common" from the Fiducial Position drop-down list.
• When "Board&Mask Individual" is selected:
The Fiducial Position, Fiducial Type and Standard Position parameters can be set separately on the board and the mask.
• When "Board&Mask Common" is selected:
The Fiducial Position, Fiducial Type and Standard Position parameters are jointly shared by the board and mask. A
confirmation message box appears when you select "Board&Mask Common". Clicking the [OK] button in the message

2
box will copy the mask fiducial setting (Fiducial Position, Fiducial Type and Standard Position parameters) into the board
fiducial setting.

Confirmation message
Copying from mask fiducial setting to board fiducial setting
Creating solder-print data

64210-S1-00

Reference
If the Fiducial Position, Fiducial Type and/or Standard Position parameter are changed on the board or Mask
parameter screen, the change is automatically applied to the other items.

4. X, Y (mm)
Enter the XY coordinates of each fiducial mark relative to the mask origin in millimeters.
5. Mark No.
Enter the mark No. of each fiducial mark. (Mark No. should be registered in advance on the Mark screen.)
6. Name
When the mark No. is entered, the corresponding name is automatically displayed here. (Mark name should be registered
in advance on the Mark screen.)
A: Mask Name
Enter a mask name.
B Mask Size
Enter the mask frame size (L x W) in millimeters.
C: Mask Standard Position
Specify the reference position used to fabricate the mask, from among "Center", "Front" and "Rear".

Mask Standard Position (Mask reference position)

Mask Standard Position: Center Front Rear

Board Mask frame

Mask Standard Position
63207-S1-00

2-12
D, E: Standard Position Offset X, Y
If the mask standard position deviates greatly from the "Center", "Front" or "Rear" and the mark cannot be recognized, set
the positional offset values (millimeters) here.

Standard Position Offset X, Y (when Mask Standard Position is "Center")

X- X+
Mask Standard Position

2
+Y

-Y

Mask center

Creating solder-print data

63208-S1-00

F: Mask Datum Position

Based on the Mask Standard Position and Standard Position Offset settings, select the position used as the reference
position on the mask from among "Center", "Front Center", Rear Center, "Front Left", "Front Right", "Rear Left" and "Rear
Right" as shown below.
Reference
The mask has "Mask Origin", "Mask Fiducial (Mark)" and "Mask Inspection Position" parameters as its setting positions.

Mask Datum Position

Mask frame

Mask Datum Position

Board
63209-S1-00

G, H: Mask Origin X, Y (mm)

If the fiducial mark on a mask has an origin different from the Mask Datum Position, set the positional offset (mm) here
as the Mask Origin.

Mask Origin

Mask frame
+Y

Mask origin
Mask Datum Position

X- -Y Board

X+

When Mask Datum Position is set to "Front Left":

63210-S1-00

I: Mask Vacuum
Set this parameter to "Use" when you want to vacuum-grip the mask on the conveyor rails during solder printing. Set to
"NotUse" when not using this function.
Mask vacuum function is useful for preventing a positional shift in the Y direction between squeegees 1 and 2, and also
for improving the surface contact between the board and the mask.

2-13
 3.1 Mask data detail setting
When you press the [Detail Setting] button on the [Print]-[Mask] screen, the following dialog box appears. You
can prespecify the positions on the mask where you want to make a visual check after solder printing.
Set whether to use this function or not, as well as the board interval to make a visual check.
Reference
Clicking the [Detail Setting] button on the toolbar of the [Print]-[Mask] screen also allows the same operation.

Mask check position setup screen

2
Creating solder-print data

64211-S1-00

2-14
4. Squeegee data setting
To check or edit the squeegee data, select the Print - Squeegee icon in the tree view (or select the [Squeegee]
tab in the main view.)

Print – Squeegee screen

Creating solder-print data

[Detail Setting] button

64212-S1-00

1. Squeegee Type
Set to "Double" for standard YVP-Xg machines. For machines equipped with an optional enclosed head using a solder
supply cassette, set to "Enclosed Head". (When "Enclosed Head" is selected, unnecessary parameters are grayed out.)
A: Squeegee Detail Type
Select the squeegee type from the drop-down list.
B: One Way/Round
Select whether to print solder in one direction or in both directions.
C: F. & B. Print Condition
Select whether to use the same conditions for the forward and backward printing. When this parameter is set to "Same
Condition", the forward and backward printing operations are performed under the conditions specified for the "F.
Squeegee Speed" and "F. Squeegee Force", and the settings for the "B. Squeegee Speed" and "B. Squeegee Force" are
disabled.
D, F: F. Squeegee Speed (mm/sec), B. Squeegee Speed (mm/sec)
Set the forward and backward squeegee movement speeds to print solder. Find an optimum speed while checking the
scraped state of the solder on the mask. If this speed is too fast, the squeegee may not scrape solder properly. If too slow,
solder may spread into the backside of the mask.
E, G: F. Squeegee Force (N), B. Squeegee Force (N)
Set the force (pressure) to apply a load to the squeegee during printing in the forward and backward directions. Check
the scraped state of the solder on the mask to find an optimum squeegee pressure. Set this pressure at a lower pressure as
long as the solder is scraped properly. A larger squeegee pressure is required as the squeegee speed is set faster.
H: Solder Supply Stop
When this parameter is set to "Use", the machine automatically stops when solder supply is required.
I: Solder Supply Inter val (Board)
Set the number of boards to be printed per one supply of solder, based on the amounts of solder supplied and used
during printing.

2-15
 J: Rolling Stroke (mm)
Specify the distance (millimeters) from the position at which the squeegee lands on the mask to the edge of the board.
Usually set to 30 to 45mm.

Rolling stroke

Mask surface
Squeegee
Solder

2 Rolling stroke
Board
Conveyor

63211-S1-00

K: Over Stroke (mm)

Creating solder-print data

Specify the distance (millimeters) from the other edge of the board to the position at which the squeegee takes off the
mask after printing solder. Usually set to 5 to 10mm.

Over stroke

Mask surface
Squeegee
Solder

Conveyor
Board
Over stroke
63212-S1-00

L: F. Start Offset (Forward movement start offset)

This parameter sets how far to print (or that amount of offset) inwards on the board from the closer edge of the board (or
lower edge in drawing below).
M: B. Start Offset (Backward movement start offset)
This parameter sets how far to print (or that amount of offset) inwards on the board from the farther edge of the board (or
upper edge in drawing below).

n NOTE
The print range of the squeegee is basically a reference position determined by the F. Start Offset and B. Start Offset
parameters. You can use this print range to set the "Rolling Stroke" and "Over Stroke" parameters.

Squeegee print range

Return printing

B. Start Offset=30 (mm) Rolling Stroke=40 (mm)

Board size Y=130 (mm)

Over Stroke=10 (mm)

Forward printing

Over Stroke=10 (mm)

Rolling Stroke=40 (mm)
F. Start Offset=50 (mm)

63213-S1-00

As shown in the drawing above, let's consider cases where you print in the dark shaded area 50 mm from the closer edge
(lower edge in drawing) and 30 mm from the farther side of a board whose Y size is 130mm.
When the rolling stroke is made 40 mm and the "Over Stroke" 10 mm as a distance for good solder paste uniformity, the
print movement range of the squeegee during forward and return printing is the section shown by the arrows in the
drawing. The parameter settings will then be as follows.
Rolling Stroke (mm) 10.000
Over Stroke (mm) 40.000
S. Start Offset (mm) 50.000
B. Start Offset (mm) 30.000

2-16
N: F. & B. Mask Offset
Select whether to apply the same manual alignment offset for the forward and backward printing. When this parameter is
set to "Same Offset", the forward and backward printing operations are performed under the conditions specified for the
"F. Mask Offset X, Y, Z, R", and the settings for the "B. Mask Offset X, Y, Z, R " are disabled.
O: F. Mask Offset X (mm)
When printing in the forward direction (from the front side to the inner side), the mask surface may stretch in the
advancing direction, causing an X-direction shift versus the land patterns. To correct this positional shift, enter an offset
value here.
If shifted in the plus direction : Enter a plus offset value.

2
If shifted in the minus direction : Enter a minus offset value.
P: F. Mask Offset Y (mm)
When printing in the forward direction (from the front side to the inner side), the mask surface may stretch in the
advancing direction, causing a Y-direction shift versus the land patterns. To correct this positional shift, enter an offset
value here.

Creating solder-print data

If shifted in the plus direction : Enter a plus offset value.
If shifted in the minus direction : Enter a minus offset value.
Q: F. Mask Offset Z (mm)
When printing in the forward direction (from the front side to the inner side), the mask surface may stretch in the Z
direction. Enter this offset here. Leave this parameter set to "0.000" in most cases.
R: F. Mask Offset R (deg)
When printing in the forward direction (from the front side to the inner side), the mask surface may stretch in the
advancing direction, causing a R-direction shift versus the land patterns. To correct this positional shift, enter an offset
value here.
If shifted counterclockwise : Enter a plus offset value.
If shifted clockwise : Enter a minus offset value.
S: B. Mask Offset X (mm)
When printing in the backward direction (from the inner side to the front), the mask surface may stretch in the advancing
direction, causing a X-direction shift versus the land patterns. To correct this positional shift, enter an offset value here.
This parameter is disabled when the "F. & B. Mask Offset" is set to "Same Offset".
If shifted in the plus direction : Enter a plus offset value.
If shifted in the minus direction : Enter a minus offset value.
T: B. Mask Offset Y (mm)
When printing in the backward direction (from the inner side to the front), the mask surface may stretch in the advancing
direction, causing a Y-direction shift versus the land patterns. To correct this positional shift, enter an offset value here.
This parameter is disabled when the "F. & B. Mask Offset" is set to "Same Offset".
If shifted in the plus direction : Enter a plus offset value.
If shifted in the minus direction : Enter a minus offset value.
U: B. Mask Offset Z (mm)
When printing in the backward direction (from the inner side to the front), the mask surface may stretch in the Z
direction. Enter this offset here. Leave this parameter set to "0.000" in most cases. This parameter is disabled when the "F.
& B. Mask Offset" is set to "Same Offset".
V: B. Mask Offset R (deg)
When printing in the backward direction (from the inner side to the front), the mask surface may stretch in the advancing
direction, causing an R-direction shift versus the land patterns. To correct this positional shift, enter an offset value here.
This parameter is disabled when the "F. & B. Mask Offset" is set to "Same Offset".
If shifted counterclockwise : Enter a plus offset value.
If shifted clockwise : Enter a minus offset value.
W: Escape Position
This is the escape position where the squeegee head moves back from the solder printing area so that you can make
setups on the mask or conveyor table such as for supplying solder or changing the conveyor unit setups. Set to "Standard
Position" in most cases. If you specify another position, select "Defined Position" and set the SY and SZ coordinates for
the "Escape Position SY and SZ" parameters.
X, Y: Escape Position SY, SZ
If you want to specify the escape position where the squeegee head moves back from the solder printing area, enter the
desired SY and SZ (height) coordinates. Settings here will be valid only when the "Escape Position" parameter is set to
"Defined Position".

2-17
 Z: Squeegee lowering sequence
Changes the timing for replacement operation of the squeegees when a double squeegee is used.
When set to “Normal”, the squeegee will be replaced during board unloading/loading after printing. In case of solder
that drools easily, solder from the squeegee used in the previous print process may drip onto the mask opening.
When set to “Solder dripping prevention”, the squeegee will not be raised after printing and the squeegee replacement
will occur after loading the next board to be printed.

2
Creating solder-print data

2-18
4.1 Squeegee detail setting
When you click the [Detail Setting] button on the [Print]-[Squeegee] screen, the Squeegee dialog box appears
for adjusting the solder fill amount and setting the timing that the board separates from the mask after printing.
Various types of detail settings can be edited by selecting the [Filling (Dry)], [Filling (Wet)], [Filling (Manual)]
and [Detach Pattern] tabs.
Reference
Clicking the [Detail Setting] button on the toolbar of the [Print]-[Squeegee] screen also allows the same operation.

Filling Adjust
If you want to adjust the squeegee speed and pressure to compensate for the board solder fill amount just after mask
cleaning, make the necessary settings here while referring to the following description. 2
[Filling (Dry) ] tab

Creating solder-print data

4 5

1 2 3
64213-S1-00

1. Filling (Dr y)
Select "Use" from the drop-down list when using this function. Select "NotUse" if not using it.
2. Filling Adjust Count
Specify the number of boards on which you want to apply this function after mask cleaning. The data lines up to the
number of boards you specified become valid to allow data entry. (Up to 10 boards can be specified.)
3. Data grid display
Shows the squeegee speed and pressure that were set on the Squeegee parameter screen. Change these parameter values
as needed. Note that increasing the squeegee pressure improves only the scraping operation. Merely increasing the
squeegee pressure does not increase the solder fill amount and may scrape off the solder or cause the solder to spread
between the mask and board.
4. [Filling (Wet)] tab
If you want to adjust the squeegee speed and pressure to compensate for the board solder fill amount just after auto wet
cleaning, select this tab and make the necessary settings.
5. [Filling (Manual)] tab
If you want to adjust the squeegee speed and pressure to compensate for the board solder fill amount just after manual
cleaning, select this tab and make the necessary settings.

2-19
 Detach Pattern
When you want to adjust the timing that the board separates from the backside of the mask after solder printing, up to 10
timing steps can be set as needed. Taking the solder, mask and board materials into account, determine the optimum
separation timing by specifying the distances (mm) and speeds (mm/sec).

[Detach] tab

2
Creating solder-print data

64214-S1-00

c CAUTION
• In the "Distance From Printing Height" column, enter the absolute value of the distance from the back surface of
the mask to the board surface.
• When "0.00" is entered in a row, the machine will stop controlling the board separation movement at that row.

Board separation setting

Mask

No.1
Distance from Board separation speed
printing height (0.01mm/s steps)
(0.01mm steps) No.2
[0.01 to 20.0mm/s]
[0.01 to 3.00mm] Board

No.10

63214-S1-00

2-20
5. Cleaner data setting
To check or edit the squeegee data, select the Print - Cleaner icon in the tree view (or select the [Cleaner] tab
in the main view.)

Print – Cleaner screen

Creating solder-print data

64215-S1-00

Board count control

Set the following parameters to control mask cleaning by board count (number of boards produced).
A: Cleaning Method
Set the mask cleaning method to "Auto", "Manual", "Both" or "NotUse". When set to "Auto", the mask is automatically
cleaned according to the specified conditions. When set to "Both", the mask can be cleaned automatically and also
manually.
B: Auto Cleaning Type
When the "Cleaning Method" is set to "Auto" or "Both", select whether to use the cleaning solvent (alcohol). Set this
parameter to "Wet" when using the solvent, or "Dry" when not using it. If you want to use both methods, set to "Both".
C: Dr y Auto Inter val (Board)
Set the interval (board count) to perform automatic mask cleaning without using the solvent. When the "Auto Cleaning
Method" parameter is set to "Both" and the "Dry Auto Interval" and "Wet Auto Internal" are designated at the same board
count, wet automatic cleaning is given priority.
D: Dr y Auto Repeat
Specify the desired count at which to repeatedly move the cleaning unit back and forth during dry automatic cleaning.
E: Dr y Auto Speed (%)
Set the speed (%) at which the cleaning unit moves under the mask during dry automatic cleaning.
F: Wet Auto Inter val (Board)
Set the interval (board count) to perform automatic mask cleaning using the solvent. When the "Auto Cleaning Method"
parameter is set to "Both" and the "Dry Auto Interval" and "Wet Auto Internal" are designated at the same board count,
wet automatic cleaning is given priority.
G: Wet Auto Repeat
Specify the desired count to repeatedly move the cleaning unit back and forth during wet automatic cleaning.
H: Wet Auto Speed (%)
Set the speed (%) at which the cleaning unit moves under the mask during wet automatic cleaning.

2-21
 I: Manual Inter val (Board)
Set the interval (board count) to perform manual mask cleaning. When this parameter is specified at the same board
count as "Dry Auto Interval" or "Wet Auto Internal", manual cleaning is given priority.

n NOTE
When the "Cleaning Method" and "Auto Cleaning Type are set to "Both", dry automatic cleaning, wet automatic
cleaning and manual cleaning are all enabled. However, if they are specified at the same board count, only one
cleaning method is used according to the priority in order of "Manual", "Wet Auto" and "Dry Auto. (Settings at the lower
data lines take priority. When the cleaning is performed by the highest priority method, all board counts are reset.)

2
Time inter val control
Use this when you want to perform mask cleaning at certain time intervals even during standby status. For example, if the
"Cleaning Method" is set to "Auto" and the "Interval" to "10" (minutes), then the mask will be automatically cleaned when
10 minutes have elapsed after a board was last printed or the mask was last cleaned.
A: Cleaning Method
Creating solder-print data

Select the mask cleaning method from "Auto", "Manual" or "NotUse". When set to "Auto", the mask is automatically
cleaned according to the specified conditions.
B: Auto Cleaning Type
When the "Cleaning Method" is set to "Auto", select whether to use the cleaning solvent (alcohol) by specifying "Wet" or
"Dry".
C: Inter val
Set the interval (minutes) to perform automatic mask cleaning.
D: Repeat
Specify the desired count to repeatedly move the cleaning unit back and forth during automatic cleaning.
E: Speed (%)
Set the speed (%) at which the cleaning unit moves under the mask during automatic cleaning.

2-22
6. Creating the mark data
This section describes how to create fiducial mark data used on boards and masks. Mark data has various
parameters for each of the mark names registered as shown below.

Mark data parameters

Mark Type

2
Shape Type

Creating solder-print data

Mark Out Size
(Mark Out Size X)
(Mark Area)
(Outline)

Mark Name
Comment
(Mark Type)

Surface Type
Algorithm Type
Mark Threshold
Tolerance
Search Area
Outer Light
Inner Light
Coaxial Light
IR Outer Light
IR Inner Light
Cut Outer Noise
Cut Inner Noise

64216-S1-00

Reference
Actual parameters that appear depend on the selected "Shape Type" parameter, etc.

2-23
 6.1 Creating procedure
When you click the Basic icon under the Mark icon in the tree view, the mark information screen appears in
the main view. Enter the mark name and comment in the upper grid display and then set various parameters as
explained in the steps below.

1 Click the Basic icon under the Mark icon in the tree view to open the mark
information screen.
Mark information screen

2 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3

Creating solder-print data

Step 4
64217-S1-00

2 Enter the mark name in the Mark Name cell.

Enter a different name for each mark within 20 alphanumeric characters. A space cannot be included
in the name.

3 Enter a comment.
Type any desired comment in the Mark Comment cell as necessary. You can omit entering comments
here.

2-24
4 Set "Mark Type" on the [Basic] tab.
Set to "PCB Fiducial" when creating board fiducial mark data, or set to "Mask Fiducial" when creating
mask fiducial mark data.

"Mark Type" setting

Creating solder-print data

64218-S1-00

5 Set other parameters.

While selecting the [Basic], [Shape], [Vision] tabs and so forth, set the necessary parameters in the right
lower list. (See "6.2" to "6.3" in this section.)

6 Repeat the above steps for other marks.

Repeat the same procedure to register all marks to be used.

7 Save the data.

Select "Save Board Data" or "Save Board Data As" from the File menu to save the data.

Reference
Clicking the [Save Board Data] button on the toolbar saves the data over the original data.

2-25
 6.2 Shape parameters
In the grid on the [Mark]-[Shape] tab, set the following parameters relating to mark shape.

Shape parameters

2
Creating solder-print data

64219-S1-00

Shape Type
The "Shape Type" can be selected from the following 5 types.

Shape Type settings

Setting Description Example

Circle Select to detect a circular mark.

Square Select to detect a square mark.

Triangle Select to detect an equilateral triangular mark.

Sp. Shape Select to detect a special mark other than above.

Corner Select to detect a corner of a pattern as a mark.

63215-S1-00

Reference
If using a special mark composed of two or more objects, set "Algorithm" of the Vision parameters as a pattern ("PTRN
Outline" or "PTRN GrayLev"). In this case, the "Shape" parameter is ignored during mark recognition so you can set this
parameter to any type.

Example of special mark

63216-S1-00

2-26
A, B: Mark Out Size
Referring to the table below, enter the correct value in the mark size. The "Mark Size X" is displayed when "Mark Type"
on the [Basic] tab is set to "Sp. Shape".

Mark Out Size settings

Shape Type Example Mark Out Size setting

Circle Enter the diameter.

Square
X
Y
Enter the length of each side.
2
Triangle Enter the length of one side.

Creating solder-print data

Y Enter the X length for the MarkOutSize X, and the Y
Sp. Shape
length for the MarkOutSize Y.
X

Enter the length of the shorter side displayed within the

Corner
search area.

63217-S1-00

Reference
If using a special mark with two or more edges as shown below, enter the size of the shortest side in the rectangular
area to be detected.

Mark Out Size setting for special mark

Rectangular area to be detected

63218-S1-00

C: Mark Area
Enter the area of the mark in units of square millimeters. This parameter is displayed only when "Shape Type" on the
[Shape] tab is set to "Sp. Shape".
D: Outline
Enter the perimeter length of the mark in units of millimeters.
This parameter is displayed only when "Shape Type" on the [Shape] tab is set to "Sp. Shape".

2-27
 6.3 Vision parameters
In the grid on the [Mark]-[Vision] tab, set the following parameters used for mark recognition.

Vision parameters

2
Creating solder-print data

64220-S1-00

A: Surface Type
This specifies the bright and dark relation between the mark surface and the surrounding area. Select "NonReflect" when
the mark is darker than the surrounding area. Select "Reflect" when the mark is brighter than the surrounding area as
shown below.

Surface Type setting

Setting NonReflect Reflect

Brightness
Board is brighter than mark. Mark is brighter than board.
comparison

Image Mark Mark

63219-S1-00

B: Algorithm Type
There are 5 algorithm types selectable for mark recognition.
Normal
In typical recognition, all types of marks should be set to "Normal". Try setting to other parameters if the mark cannot be
recognized with the "Normal" setting.
Special 1
Select this if the mark cannot be recognized with the "Normal" setting.
Special 2
Select this if the mark which cannot be recognized with the "Normal" setting has a cutout area.
PTRN Outline, PTRN GrayLev
Use these parameters for marks that should be registered as a pattern.

2-28
C: Mark Threshold
This is the threshold level for the binary image used to recognize the mark.
D: Tolerance
This specifies a tolerance percentage for the mark size when the mark is recognized with the vision camera. (Typically
this should be set to "30".)
E, F: Search Area XY
As a general guide, set this parameter to the mark diameter plus 3mm. For example, when the mark diameter is 1mm, set
this parameter to "4mm" as shown below. If other marks (such as resist, silk print, other patterns) exist in this search area,

2
make the "Search Area" setting smaller.

Search Area

Search Area

Creating solder-print data

Mark

1mm
4mm
63220-S1-00

G to K: Light level
Lighting for recognizing a mark is divided into several zones. Light level in each zone is displayed here.
L, M: Cut Outer Noise, Cut Inner Noise
These parameters are used to cut the noise that usually appears within or outside the mark image when the mark is
recognized as a binary image.

2-29
Chapter 3 Data optimization
Production board data can be automatically rewritten into more efficient data with the Optimizer.

Contents

1. Starting and quitting the Optimizer 3-1

1.1 Starting the Optimizer 3-1
1.1.1 Starting the Optimizer from the Board Editor 3-1
1.1.2 Starting the Optimizer from the Feeder Viewer 3-2
1.2 Quitting the Optimizer 3-3

2. Optimizer window 3-4

3. Defining the optimizing conditions 3-7

3.1 Checking the information 3-7
3.2 Setting the basic conditions 3-9
3.2.1 Creating Basic Conditions and Registering a Template 3-9
3.2.2 Setting Enforcement Object of “Height difference to permit overtaking” 3-12
3.2.3 Pallet Number Automatic Decision 3-16
3.3 Setting the detailed conditions 3-19
3.4 Common setting 3-23
3.5 Initial setting 3-24
3.6 Specifying the dump station (option) position 3-25
3.7 Set layout of common parts 3-27
3.7.1 Settings 3-28
3.7.2 Auto Distribution Error 3-28
3.7.3 Reporting parts that cannot be the same layout 3-29
3.8 Setting the optimizing conditions for individual board data 3-30
3.9 Editing the data optimizing conditions 3-33
3.9.1 Editing each file of optimizing conditions 3-33
3.9.2 Editing multiple files of optimizing conditions 3-34

4. Executing data optimization 3-35

4.1 Checking the nozzles 3-38

5. Outputting the feeder setup lists 3-39

6. Changing the line to be optimized 3-41

7. Multi-lane Support 3-42

7.1 Optimize of single combined program 3-42
7.2 Optimize with same kind parts 3-42
7.3 [Set optimization parameters] dialog is extended 3-42
7.4 [Detail] setting is extended. 1 3-43
7.5 [Detail] setting is extended. 2 3-43
7.6 [Detail] setting is extended. 3 3-44
7.7 Result dialog is extended 3-45
 1. Star ting and quitting the Optimizer
You can start the Optimizer from the Board Explorer, Board Editor or Feeder Viewer. This section explains the
methods for using the Optimizer by starting it from the Board Editor and Feeder Viewer.

c CAUTION
Board data for solder paste printers, dispensers, i-Cube machines and waffle tray data cannot be optimized.

1.1 Starting the Optimizer

1.1.1 Starting the Optimizer from the Board Editor

1 Start the Board Editor.

Select "Board Editor" from the Start menu.

2 Select the line.

The "Select Editing Line" dialog box appears when two or more lines (production lines) are registered.
Select the line to work with the Board Editor and click the [OK] button.
3
c CAUTION

Data optimization
The "Select Editing Line" dialog box does not appear when only one line is registered.

3 Select "Start Optimizer" from the Optimizer menu.

The Optimizer window appears as shown below.

Starting the Optimizer

64300-S1-10

3-1
 1.1.2 Starting the Optimizer from the Feeder Viewer
From the Feeder Viewer, you can start the Optimizer to optimize individual board data.
To start the Optimizer to optimize individual board data, select "Start Optimizer" from the Optimizer menu.

Starting the Optimizer

3
Data optimization

64301-S1-10

Reference
When the Setup Optimizer (option) is installed, multiple board data registered in the plan information can be
optimized at one time.

3-2
 1.2 Quitting the Optimizer
To quit the Optimizer, follow these steps.

1 Select "Exit" from the File menu in the Optimizer window.

Reference
Clicking the [Close] button in the upper right corner also quits the Optimizer.

2 The Optimizer window closes and returns to the Board Editor window.
Quitting the Optimizer

[Close] button

Data optimization
64302-S1-10

3-3
 2. Optimizer window
When the Optimizer starts, the following window appears.

Optimizer window

1
2

4 6

3
8
3

9
Data optimization

64303-S1-10

1. Menu bar
The menu bar at the top of the Optimizer window contains pull-down menus with commands grouped by function.
• File
The File menu allows you to select commands, such as to load settings, save changes, switch the lines and quit the
Optimizer.
• Optimize
The Optimize menu allows you to select commands, such as to execute optimization, stop optimization and display
the results.
• Maintenance
The Maintenance menu allows you to select commands to set various information items.
• Tool
The Tool menu allows you to save or clear trace information.
• Help
The Help menu displays the program version information.
2. Toolbar
Among the Optimizer functions, those that are frequently used are registered as the toolbar buttons.

Toolbar

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

64304-S1-00

1. [Create Setting] button

Opens the "Set optimizing parameters" screen for setting the optimizing conditions for each board.
The same operation can be performed by selecting the "Make Setting" command from the File menu or clicking the
[Create] button under the left-hand grid pane.
2. [Delete Setting] button
Deletes the optimizing conditions for each board.
The same operation can be performed by selecting the "Delete Setting" command from the File menu or clicking the
[Delete] button under the left-hand grid pane.

3-4
 3. [Modify Setting] button
Opens the "Set optimizing parameters" screen for editing the optimizing conditions for each board.
The same operation can be performed by selecting the "Modify Setting" command from the File menu or clicking the
[Modify] button under the left-hand grid pane.
4. [Collective Editing] button
Opens a dialog box for editing the optimizing conditions for two or more boards listed in the left-hand grid pane.
The same operation can be performed by selecting the "Collective Editing" command from the File menu or clicking the
[Collective] button under the left-hand grid pane.
5. [Read List] button
Opens the list of boards that were stored for data optimization. From the list, select the board you want to load.
The same operation can be performed by selecting the "Read List" command from the File menu or clicking the [Read
list] button under the right-hand grid pane.
6. [Save List] button
Saves the list of optimized data.
Clicking this button opens a dialog box showing the list of optimized data. You can save the optimized data files as a
group.

3
The same operation can be performed by selecting the "Save List" command from the File menu or clicking the [Save
list] button under the right-hand grid pane.
7. [Add Target] button
Adds an optimizing condition setting to the data optimization list in the right-hand grid pane.
The same operation can be performed by selecting the "Add Target" command from the File menu or clicking the

Data optimization
[Arrow] button in the center.
8. [Delete Target] button
Deletes an optimizing condition setting from the data optimization list in the right-hand grid pane.
The same operation can be performed by selecting the "Delete Target" command from the File menu or clicking the
[Delete] button under the right-hand grid pane.
9. [Execute] button
Starts optimizing the board data in the data optimization list, in the order from top to bottom.
The same operation can be performed by selecting the "Execute" command from the Optimize menu or clicking the
[Execute] button under the right-hand grid pane.
10. [Cycle time estimate] button
Calculates the estimated cycle time for board data in the data optimization list.
The same operation can be performed by selecting the "CT estimate" command from the Optimize menu or clicking the
[CT estimation] button under the right-hand grid pane.
11. [Stop] button
Stops the optimization process.
The same operation can be performed by selecting the "Stop" command from the Optimize menu or clicking the [Stop]
button under the right-hand grid pane.
12. [About] button
Shows the program version information.
Selecting the "About YgEditor" command from the Help menu also shows the program version information.
3. Operation buttons
The operation buttons under the grid panes have the following functions.
• [Modify] button
Same as the [Modify Setting] button on the toolbar.
• [Editing] button
Same as the [Collective Editing] button on the toolbar.
• [Create] button
Same as the [Create Setting] button on the toolbar.
• [Delete] button
Same as the [Delete Setting] button on the toolbar.
• [Read list] button
Same as the [Read List] button on the toolbar.
• [Execute] button
Same as the [Execute] button on the toolbar.

3-5
 • [Save list] button
Same as the [Save List] button on the toolbar.
• [CT estimation] button
Same as the [Cycle time estimate] button on the toolbar.
• [Stop] button
Same as the [Stop] button on the toolbar.
• [Result view] button
Displays the past optimization results.
Same as selecting the "Result view" command from the Optimize menu.
4. List of optimizer parameter settings (left-hand grid pane)
Displays the list of board with optimizing conditions defined.
• Setting File Name
Shows the names of files that store the optimizing conditions you have defined.
The default name is the same as the board data name, but can be changed when defining the conditions.

3
• Target Board Name
Shows the names of the board data to be optimized.
• Save Board Name
Shows the names of the board data that has been optimized and saved.
5. List of optimization (right-hand grid pane)
Data optimization

Displays the list of board data to be optimized or already optimized.

• Result
Shows the optimization status and results by the messages "Executing", "OK", "NG", etc.
• Position
Shows the optimization method, whether to optimize individually or sequentially.
Use the [Sgl] button and [Cmn] button to switch the optimization method.
• Setting File Name
Shows the names of files that store the optimizing conditions you have defined.
• Trial
Shows the optimization count repeated and the optimization count that is specified.
• Line CT (sec)
Shows the optimized line tact.

n NOTE
• When the Position column is set to "Single", the board data is optimized under the conditions defined individually.
• When the Position column is set to "Common", the board data is optimized while the previously optimized board
data is treated as a fixed board.

6. [Move Up] [Move Down] buttons

Moves the selected board data one row up or down in the data optimization list (right-hand grid pane).
7. [Sgl] button, 8. [Cmn] button
Use these buttons to select the optimization method.
9. Trace view
Displays the optimization status.

3-6
3. Defining the optimizing conditions
There are two major procedures for defining data optimizing conditions: One is for initial condition settings
common to various board data and the other is for individual board data settings.

3.1 Checking the information

Before setting the optimization conditions, check the information such as "Line", "Number of nozzles" and
"Number of feeders". Check or change the number of nozzles as needed only when the machine has no auto
nozzle changer.

● Checking the line information

You can check the power coefficient and the correction factor for the estimated cycle time which are registered
for each machine in the line.
To check this, select "Line Information" from the Maintenance menu. The line Information window appears.

Line information
3

Data optimization
64305-S1-00

• Correction factor for estimated cycle time

This is used to correct the difference between the estimated cycle time and actually measured cycle time. Use the default
value when there is no difference. The estimated cycle time is corrected by using this factor as follows:
Displayed value = Estimated cycle time × Correction factor ÷ 100
The correction factor for the estimated cycle time is an important parameter used to determine the machine power
coefficient (power distribution). Enter the value that reflects the status of the actual machine as accurate as possible.
To change this value, double-click the field and enter the correct value.

● Checking the number of nozzles

You can check the number of nozzles for each nozzle type that can be installed in each machine at the same
time. To check this, select "Nozzle Number Information " from the Maintenance menu. The nozzle availlability
window appears.
If you want to change the number of nozzles, double-click the field and enter the correct value.

Nozzle information

64306-S1-00

3-7
 ● Checking the number of feeders
You can check the number of feeders that can be use on the line at the same time.
To check this, select "Feeder Number Information" from the Maintenance menu. The feeder availability window appears.
If you want to change the number of feeders, double-click the field and enter the correct value.

Feeder information

3 64307-S1-10
Data optimization

3-8
 3.2 Setting the basic conditions
This section explains the methods for setting basic conditions to optimize board data.

3.2.1 Creating Basic Conditions and Registering a Template

The basic conditions you created can be saved as a template. The method for registering a basic condition
template is also explained.

1 Press the [Create] button to set the optimizing conditions.

The "Set optimization parameters" screen appears.

Opening the "Set optimization parameters" screen

Data optimization
Step5

Step2 Step6

Step3

Step4

64308-S1-10

3-9
 2 Select the feeder set condition.
Select the desired condition from the "Feeder Set Condition" drop-down list.

"Feeder Set Condition" drop-down list

64309-S1-00

n Feeder set conditions

Optimizing
Feeder set conditions Description
location
Optimizes only the part placement sequence and placement

3
heads.
Within each
All Parts Fixed Feeder positions are not optimized.
machine An optimization error occurs with parts whose feeder positions
are unspecified.
Optimizes the part placement sequence and placement heads,
and also optimizes the feeder positions within each feeder
Within each
Move Within Feeders Plate plate.
machine Parts with feeder positions unspecified will be optimized within
Data optimization

the machine.
Within each Optimizes the part placement sequence and placement heads,
machine and also optimizes the feeder positions within each feeder
Move Within Table Front and table.
rear Parts with feeder positions unspecified will be optimized within
separately the machine.
Optimizes the part placement sequence and placement heads,
Within each and also optimizes the feeder positions within each stage.
Move Within Stage stage Parts with feeder positions unspecified will be optimized within
the machine.
Within each Optimizes the part placement sequence and placement heads,
Move Within Machine machine and also optimizes the feeder positions within each machine.
Performs fixed part data matching on all machines within the
Distribute in Line Within line line, and then optimizes the part placement sequence,placement
heads, and feeder positions within each machine.

Reference
• When the feeder set condition is set to “Distribute in Line” while a fixed board is specified, then “fixed data
matching” is performed based on the fixed board data for all machines within the line. If the other feeder set
conditions are selected, “fixed data matching” is performed based on the fixed board data within the movable
range of feeder positions for each condition.

3 Select the target parts.

When you have selected "Move Within Machine" in step 3, select "All Parts" or "Only set position
undecided parts".

"All Parts"
Optimizes all parts registered in the board data.

"Only set position undecided parts"

Optimizes parts whose feeder set numbers ("A: Feeder Set No." parameter on the [Parts]-[Pick] tab)
are "0" or invalid.

4 Set the execution level.

Select from among "Best Optimization Result", "Standard", and "Short Calculation Time".

"Best Optimization Result"

Performs optimization that gives better results than standard mode. Optimization time will be longer.

"Standard"
Performs optimization using standard processing.

"Short Calculation Time"

Performs optimization more quickly than standard mode. Optimization results are not as good as
standard mode.

3-10
5 Select the execution options.
"Nozzle interfere check"
When this check box is selected, a nozzle interference check is automatically performed on all
nozzles versus all parts during optimization. Part placement sequence is determined by considering
whether each nozzle interferes with parts to be mounted on the board. If possible interference points
are found, a "Parts Group No." is automatically assigned to the parts that may interfere with a nozzle,
in order to change the part placement sequence.

"Height difference to permit overtaking"

Selecting this check box creates data that places parts on a board at fixed height spacings starting
from low profile parts.

6 Set the finish condition.

When you have selected "Move Within Machine" from the "Feeder Set Condition" drop-down list in step 2,
set the following items.

"Distribution Count"
Enter the number of times you want to repeat the optimization task.

"Execution Time"
Enter the length of time during which to perform optimization.
3
c CAUTION
The time taken to complete optimization may exceed the time specified here depending on the process. In this case,

Data optimization
the optimization ends at a breakpoint.

"When CT is not improved"

While repeating the optimization task, if the cycle time does not improve more than the best cycle
time previously obtained, a specified number of times in a row, then the optimization will end.

n Registering a basic condition template

The basic conditions you have set in steps 2 to 6 can be registered as a template, which can then be used as a basic
condition template common to other board data.
After setting the necessary conditions, click the [Entry] button in the "Basic Condition" group [Link] the "Template
List Information" screen appears, enter the template name and click the [Save] button.

Registering a template
Basic conditions

Enter the template name.

64310-S1-00

To edit a registered template, click the [Select] button in the "Basic Condition" group box. When the "Template List
Information" screen appears, select the template and click the [Read] button. A check mark is placed in the "Basic
Condition Template" check box in the "Set optimization parameters" screen. Clear this check box, edit the conditions,
and register that template again.

3-11
 3.2.2 Setting Enforcement Object of “Height difference to permit overtaking”
"Height difference to permit overtaking" means a function to decide a mounting order that is to put a difference
of the height of both parts in the designated range when the parts that is lower than the maximum height of
allocated parts is allocated.
By setting this "Height difference to permit overtaking" in the optimizer, this function enables allocating in
order of low parts (light parts of the mass) from the upstream machine to the downstream machine. Setting of
Passing Permission for Enforcement Objects with Different Height
This function reduces the number of times of inertia movement during transporting (stop, start) by mounting
tall parts as much as possible in the down stream section. The mounting quality can be improved by this
function.

1 Set “Enforcement Object” of “Height difference to permit overtaking”.

"Enforcement Object" is limited to each parts supply package by setting a range for maximum height
and minimum height of parts.
• "Parts" - "Basic" - "Package" – "Stick"

3
• "Parts" - "Basic" - "Package" – "Bulk"
• "Parts" - "Basic" - "Package" – "Try"
• "Parts" - "Basic" - "Tape Type" – "(All Tape)"

Package
Data optimization

64350-S1-00

Tape Type

64351-S1-00

3-12
2 Set the maximum and minimum height of parts.
When "Setup Enforcement Object" is checked and the [Object Setting] button is clicked, an enforcement
object setting window appears. With this dialog, set the range condition of the “Height difference to
permit overtaking” for each parts package.

Setting of “Enforcement Object”

Try parts “C” less than 2mm, and

all 72mm tape parts “D” are out
3
Maximum height of
of “Height difference to permit
allocated parts (4mm)
overtaking”. They can be

Data optimization
mounted in spite of the 1.0mm
limitation.
4.0mm
Optimize within 1.0mm

A 2.0mm
B C
D
Upstream Downstream

64352-S1-00

n Explanation of the setting examples

1. Because “1.0” is set “Height difference to permit overtaking”, only the parts that is within -1.0mm form
maximum height of allocated parts, are optimized to be allocated on the downstream.
2. When “checked state” is set “Permit all parts to overtake in the stage”, all the parts in the stage, that is out
of “Enforcement Object” of “Height difference to permit overtaking”.
3. Because “unchecked state” is set on “72mm”-“Object” all the parts of “72mm tape” are out of “Enforcement
Object” of “Height difference to permit overtaking”.
4. Because “2.0” is inputted into “Tray”-“Min Height”, the tray parts less than 2.0mm in height are out of
“Enforcement Object” of “Height difference to permit overtaking”.
5. Because “15.0” is input into “Tape-A”-“Max Height”, the Tape-A parts higher than 15mm in height are out of
“Enforcement Object” of “Height difference to permit overtaking”.

3-13
 n Example of use
In a condition of which “1mm” is set on [Height difference to permit overtaking], When parts A(Parts with
special nozzle A, Tape type 44mm, Parts height 2.5mm) and parts B(Tray parts, Parts height 1mm) are
optimized; parts A are assigned in machine A and parts B are assigned in machine B. [Ea17634] occurred
and optimization failed before. The following is example to avoid this error by using this function.

Machine setting environment

Machine B Machine A
• Tray Changer Available • Tray Changer Unavailable
• Special Nozzle A Unavailable • Special Nozzle A Available

• “Height difference to permit overtaking” 1mm

3 Machine B Machine A Conveyor Direction

Data optimization

63310-S1-00

1. In the case of setting “Enforcement Object” in the [Object] check box

As indicated below, when the check box of [Object Kind] - [Tray] - [Object] and [Object Kind] - [Tray]
- [44mm] are “unchecked state”, these parts are out of “Enforcement Object” of “Height difference to permit
overtaking”.
However, as in this case all tray parts and 44mm tape parts are out of “Enforcement Object”, section 2.
“Setting an Enforcement Object by [Minimum Height] and [Maximum Height]” explains an object
appointment method by parts height.

Method of setting of “Enforcement Object”

64353-S1-00

3-14
2. In the case of setting “Enforcement Object” in [Max Height] and [Min Height]
When tray parts of 1mm in height and 44mm tape parts of 2.5mm in height are taken off from the object of
“Height difference to permit overtaking”, define the setting as shown below.
1) “1.1” is set on “Object Kind” - “Tray” - “Min Height”. (Tray parts of 1mm in height is out of object)
2) “2.6” is set on “Object Kind” - “44mm” - “Min Height”. (44mm tape type parts of 2.5mm in height is out of
object)

Method 1 of setting of “Enforcement Object”

These ranges are enforcement

25.5mm

Obje

Obje 2.6mm

1.1mm
Out of object
Out of object
3
0.0mm
Tray 44mmtape

Data optimization
64354-S1-00

And when 44mm tape parts of 2mm in height is object and parts of 2.5mm in height are taken off from the
object of “Height difference to permit overtaking”, define the setting as shown below.
3) “0.0” is set on “Object Kind” - “44mm” - “Min Height”. (44mm tape type parts of 2mm in height is object)
4) “2.4” is set on “Object Kind” - “44mm” - “Max Height”. (44mm tape type parts of 2.5mm in height is out of
object)

Method 2 of setting of “Enforcement Object”

These ranges are enforcement

25.5mm

Out of object

2.4mm

This range is
enforcement object

0.0mm
44mm Tape

64355-S1-00

3-15
 3.2.3 Pallet Number Automatic Decision
This optimization decides pallet assignment for tray parts, when there are tray parts on the board data that
needs to be optimized.
This function sets tray parts from the top of the tray changer in order not to overlap pallet numbers among the
tray parts. It saves your time and effort to distribute pallet number manually by taking away of overlapping
pallet numbers among the tray parts

c CAUTION
This function has the following specifications. Please read the following sentences certainly, and use it with care.

1. This function decides machines / tray changers / pallet numbers by optimization, but it does not change
the pick position (“Parts” – “Pick” – “X (mm)” – “Y (mm)”) etc.
When the parts need assigning to the tray supply device with different outside shape of the pallet or
different origin of the pallet by the optimization, please confirm the pick up position by teaching on the
actual machine.
2. This function can only assign one parts type to one pallet by optimization. Until now, if there is some space

3
on the pallet, the pallet can put plural parts with plural parts types on the same pallet No, but when
optimization is executed with this “Pallet Number Automatic Decision”, the tray parts which are put on one
pallet become one parts type only.

A pallet after optimization

Data optimization

Even if there is space that can be put

another tray part to the pallet, one pallet is
used with one parts type.

Tray Part Palet

63311-S1-00

3-16
 n Settings

1 To enable "Pallet Number Automatic Decision" function, check [Decide pallet

number automatically] of [Exec Option] on the "Set optimization parameters"
screen.

n NOTE
The initial value is “unchecked state”.

Setting of “Pallet Number Automatic Decision”

Data optimization
64356-S1-00

2 For tray parts set to "No" in the board data tree view via "Parts" - "Option" -
"Exec Optimize", "Pallet Number Automatic Decision" is not executed.

n NOTE
When you want to use an appropriate “Pallet Number Automatic Decision” for each parts, please use this setting.

An example of “Parts” - “Option”

64357-S1-00

3-17
 3 When this function was enabled and optimization executed, the following items are
changed after optimization.
An example of [Parts] - [Tray]

64358-S1-00

3 • Feeder Type
Either “Auto TC” or “[Link]“ is set.
(When there are “Auto TC” and “[Link]“ in the line, a tray changer is set automatically by optimization.)

• Pallet No. Start

Data optimization

The start number of the pallet of the tray parts is set.

• Pallet No. Last

The end number of the pallet of the tray parts is set.

• Pallet No. Current

[Pallet No. Current] becomes same as a value of “Parts” – “Tray” – “Pallet No. Start”.

• Pallet Pitch Z
Select “Parts” – “Shape” – “Externally Measured Parts Thickness” from board data tree view, select “Parts” – “Tray”
– “Tray Thickness” from tree view. Judging from “Tray Thickness” and “Machine Data” – “Tray Changer” – “Position
Coordinates” – “Pallet Pitch” of Machine settings, any of “Normal”, “Double Pitch” or “Triple Pitch” is automatically
set.

3-18
3.3 Setting the detailed conditions
This section explains the methods for setting detailed conditions to optimize board data.
Click the [Detail] button to open the "Set detail optimization parameters" screen and set the conditions.

Detailed conditions

Data optimization
64311-S1-10

When the above screen appears, set the necessary conditions by opening the [Fixed Board], [Stage], [Plate]
and [Nozzle] tabs.

3-19
 [Fixed Board]
When setting a fixed board, click the [Add] button to open the "Board data select" screen and select the board data.

n NOTE
Fixed boards refer to board data using the feeder set positions which are determined and not to be changed by
[Link] the [Fixed Board] tab, you can specify fixed boards so that their feeder positions will be referenced
(will not be changed) during optimization. You do not have to specify fixed boards unless necessary to reference
them during optimization.

"Set detail optimization parameters" screen

Fixed Board

3
Data optimization

64312-S1-00

After optimization is finished with a fixed board specified, the feeder set positions will be determined as follows:
Parts with the same name as those registered for the fixed board
These parts are set in the feeder positions used by the fixed board.
Parts with a different name from those registered for the fixed board
These parts are set in the feeder positions not used by the fixed board.
Available fixed parts flag (This can be set only when X series or earlier machines are used.)
Fixed parts that are always used in the same feeder set positions are divided into 5 groups, each consisting of 100
records. You can specify here whether to use each group by selecting or clearing the check box. Groups with the check
box cleared are not used for fixed parts.

n NOTE
When the "Copy of parts parameters from the fixed board" check box is checked, the optimized board data will be
updated to match the fixed board parts information. Leave this check box cleared if you want to retain the parts
information of the board data to be optimized.

3-20
 "Stage"

Stage setting

64313-S1-00

Set the stages to perform optimization. To perform optimization on all stages, select the "Execute optimization on all

3
stages" check box. To select a stage individually, clear the "Execute optimization on all stages" check box and select the
check box in the "Execute" column.

c CAUTION
Optimization is performed on each stage, but the cycle time is estimated for the machine. When
performingoptimization on the stages of a machine, if there is a stage that is not to be optimized, then it is necessary

Data optimization
that the cycle time on that stage can be estimated.

"Plate"

Plate setting

64314-S1-00

Set the feeder plates to perform optimization. To perform optimization on all feeder plates, select the "Execute
optimization by all plate use" check box. To select a feeder plate individually, clear the "Execute optimization
by all plate use" check box and select the check box for the plate to be used.
Feeder plate No. is designated from 1 to 4 and from 5 to 8, from the left as viewed from the outside of the
machine.

Feeder plate No. for plate setting (YG300)

Common to right-to-left and left-to-right flow
Plate8 Plate7 Plate6 Plate5
D D B B

C C A A
Plate1 Plate2 Plate3 Plate4
63300-S1-00

3-21
 "Nozzle"

Nozzle setting

64315-S1-00

This setting can be made for each head and each table. Select the desired nozzle setting method from

3
the "Nozzle Suggestion" drop-down list.
"Auto"
Automatically determines the nozzle used with each head by optimization.
"Edit"
Data optimization

Selecting this item allows each column in the lower grid to be edited. You can manually set the nozzle used with each
head, by selecting it from the drop-down list.
When "Auto" is selected, the nozzle for each head is automatically determined by optimization.
"Current"
Uses the nozzles currently specified (determined by the preceding optimization) for heads that are set to
"ManualNzlChg" (manual nozzle change).

n Registering a detailed condition template

The detailed conditions you have set can be registered as a template, which can then be used as a detailed
condition template common to other board data.
After setting the necessary conditions, click the [Entry] button at the lower right of the "Detail Condition
Template" check box. When the "Template List Information" screen appears, enter the template name and click
the [Save] button.

Registering a template
Detailed conditions

Enter the template name.

64316-S1-00

To edit a registered template, click the [Select] button in the "Basic Condition" group box. When the "Template
List Information" screen appears, select the template and click the [Read] button. A check mark is placed in the
"Detail Condition Template" check box in the "Set optimization parameters" screen. Clear this check box, edit
the conditions, and register that template again.

3-22
 3.4 Common setting
To set the common conditions for optimizing board data, follow these steps.

n NOTE
Parameters set here will be used as common conditions for optimizing all board data.
If you want to change the optimizing conditions for individual board data, then open the "Common Setting" dialog
box and set the conditions as needed.

1 From the "Maintenance" menu, select "Common Setting".

The "Common Setting" dialog box appears.

"Common Setting" dialog box

Step2
3

Data optimization
Step3

Step4

64317-S1-00

2 Set the common conditions.

Standard Data Unification
This function merges common data (board size, etc.) shared between machines by using the board
data for the most downstream machine as a reference. Select this check box to use this function.

Feeder Layout Mode

Select the desired feeder layout mode by clicking the radio button.

Cycle Time Priority

Assigns the feeder positions by giving priority to the cycle time.

Space Priority
Assigns the feeder positions by always giving priority to the feeder space.

3 Set the trace view display items.

"All"
Displays all optimization items and status in the trace view (lower pane) of the Optimizer window.

"Only Result"
Displays only the optimization results in the trace view (lower pane) of the Optimizer window.

4 Select whether to save the result information.

After optimization is complete, the result information such as the cycle time can be saved for each
board data.
By saving this information, you can check the detailed optimization information at the time the
optimization ends.
Select the "Save result information for each board" radio button to use this function.

3-23
 3.5 Initial setting
To set the initial conditions for optimizing board data, follow these steps.

n NOTE
Parameters set here will be used as common conditions for optimizing all board data.
If you want to change the optimizing conditions for individual board data, then open the "Initial Setting" dialog box
and set the conditions as needed.

1 From the "Maintenance" menu, select "Initial Setting".

The "Initial Setting" dialog box appears.

"Initial Setting" dialog box

3 Step2
Data optimization

Step3

Step4

64318-S1-00

2 Set the initial save board name.

Select the naming method from among "Same", "Prefix" and "Postfix".

"Same"
Select this radio button to save the optimized data under the same name as the board data to be
optimized.
The original board data will be overwritten by the optimized data.

"Prefix", "Postfix"
Select these radio buttons to save the optimized data under a different name from the board data to
be optimized.
After selecting the "Prefix" or "Postfix" radio button, enter a prefix or postfix in the "Add Characters" box,
which will be added to the beginning or end of the board data name.

3 Set the initial basic conditions.

When using a basic condition template, select the "Basic Condition Template" check box, press the
[Select] button to open the "Template List Information" screen, and select the desired basic condition
template.
Refer to the previous section 3.2, "Setting the basic conditions", for details on templates.
When not using a basic condition template, leave the check box cleared.

4 Set the initial detailed conditions.

When using a detailed condition template, select the "Detail Condition Template" check box, press the
[Select] button to open the "Template List Information" screen, and select the desired detailed condition
template.
Refer to the previous section 3.3, "Setting the detailed conditions", for details on templates.
When not using a detailed condition template, leave the check box cleared.

3-24
 3.6 Specifying the dump station (option) position
Make this setting to optimize board data for machines equipped with a dump station (option). Feeder positions
will be optimized by taking account of the dump station position, based on the conditions you set here.

c CAUTION
This function cannot be used to change the dump station position and feeder plate spec settings.

1 Set the dump station width information.

1. Open the Board Editor or Board Explorer.
2. In the tree view, select the machine icon, click the right mouse button to display the context menu,
and select "Machine Property" to open the VmSpec window.
3. In the tree view on the VmSpec Window, select "Setting" - "Specification Information" - "Dump Station
Specification".

Setting the dump station width information

Data optimization
Set the left and right widths occupied by the dump station.
64319-S1-00

4. In the "Left Possession Width (mm)" and "Right Possession Width (mm)" columns, enter the settings
shown below. Settings differ according to the dump station type, so use caution.

Dump station type Left Possession Width (mm) Right Possession Width (mm)

Current type (Motor-driven belt feed) 40.00 40.00

Previous type (Air cylinder-driven belt feed) 75.00 50.00

2 Start the Optimizer.

Start the Optimizer from the Board Editor or Feeder Viewer.

3-25
 3 Set whether to use the dump station.
From the "Maintenance" menu, select "Dump Station Information" to open the "Dump Station Setting"
screen
and set whether to use each dump station.

"Dump Station Setting" screen

Select whether to use the dump station.

3 Enable separate setting of dump station

64320-S1-00

When this check box is checked, you can set whether to use each dump station individually. Select from
the following three items.
Data optimization

Not Use
Does not use the dump station regardless of whether there are components that use the dump
station.

Use
Uses the dump station regardless of whether there are components that use the dump station.

Auto
Uses the dump station when there are components that use the dump station.
(Does not use the dump station unless there are components that use the dump station.)

3-26
3.7 Set layout of common parts
About an optimization using fixed board or sequence optimization, when the parts with the same names
cannot be set on the same feeder set position (the same layout), the following two behaviors can be selected

1. Prior Same Layout

When the same layout cannot be achieved, “Ea17635: Parts Thickness Order Error” is displayed and the optimization is
stopped (for details, refer to “3.7.2. Auto Distribution Error”). If you want to place parts with the same name on the exact
same position, select this mode.

2. Prior Optimization
When the common layout cannot be achieved, the different feeder set position is permitted. When you want to output
the optimization result even if the same layout using parts with the same name is not achieved, select this mode.

For an operation example, please refer to illustration below.

Example of “Prior Same Layout” and “Prior Optimization”

3
(Target Board of Optimization) (Fixed Board)
Board Name: OPT Board Name: FIX

Data optimization
[Parts Data] [Parts Data]

Feeder Set Parts Body Feeder Set Parts Body

Parts Mch Parts Mch
No. Size Z (mm) No. Size Z (mm)
Parts1 1 0 3.00 Parts1 1 10 3.00
Parts2 2 0 2.00 Parts2 2 10 2.00

Execute Optimization
(Optimization Parameters)
• Feeder Positioning Method: ‘Distribute in Line’
• Height difference to permit overtaking:‘0.0mm’

1. Prior Same Layout 2. Prior Optimization

Board Name : OPT Board Name : OPT
[Parts Data] [Parts Data]

Feeder Set Parts Body Feeder Set Parts Body

Parts Mch Parts Mch
No. Size Z (mm) No. Size Z (mm)
Parts1 1 10 3.00 Parts2 2 10 2.00
Parts2 2 10 2.00 Parts1 2 20 3.00

If the layout is the same as that of fixed

board, overtaking of the body size Z occurs.

–> Optimization Failed with Error Permit Different Layout of Fixed

(Ea17635:Parts Thickness Order Error) Board

* The Other Example of occuring the error

using Prior Same Layout

* Overtaking of the parts group number

occurs.

* The Fixed board Layout is wrong.

–Unreachable Feeder Set No. by nozzle is assigined.

64319-S1-00

3-27
 3.7.1 Settings

1 Select “Menu” – “Common Setting” on the “Optimization” screen.

2 Select “Prior Same Layout” or “Prior Optimization” on “Common Setting” –
“Common Condition” – “Common Parts Layout”.

n NOTE
• The initial state is “Prior Same Layout” in the first installation.
• When upgraded from the version that doesn’t support this setting, the initial state is “Prior Optimization”. By the later
upgrades, the former state is kept.

Common Parts Layout

3
Data optimization

64360-S1-00

3.7.2 Auto Distribution Error

n NOTE
This section relates only when “Prior Common Layout” is selected.

When the same layout cannot be achieved, “Ea17635: Parts Thickness Order Error” is displayed and the
optimization is stopped.

n Action for the recover y

• The result that satisfies both the settings such as “Parts group number” or “Height difference to permit overtaking”
and the same layout cannot be outputted (because contradiction occurs among settings). Execute the optimization
without using “Parts group number” or “Height difference to permit overtaking”, or select “Prior Optimization”.

• When fixed board layout is wrong, please correct

Parts Thickness Order Error

64361-S1-10

3-28
 3.7.3 Reporting parts that cannot be the same layout

n NOTE
This section relates only when “Prior Optimization” is selected.

As a result of an optimization, when the same parts cannot be set on the same feeder set position, the following
dialog is displayed after the optimization. Parts that cannot be the same layout are displayed in the dialog.

[Some parts cannot be set as common layout] Dialog

Data optimization
64362-S1-00

n Action for the recover y

About the parts that cannot be the same layout, prepare additional parts and setup to the different feeder set position.

n Saving the displayed result

The displayed parts list can be saved as the CSV (comma separated values) format file. Click [Save] button, specify the
file path, enter the file name and save.
Refer to the file and prepare the listed parts additionally.

Example of the Outputted CSV File

63363-S1-00

3-29
 3.8 Setting the optimizing conditions for individual board data
To set the optimizing conditions for individual board data, follow these steps.

1 Open the Optimizer window.

2 Click the [Create] button under the left-hand grid pane.
The "Set optimizating parameters" screen appears.

3 Select the board data to be optimized.

1. Click the [Select] button in the Target board group box to open the "Board data select" dialog box.
Then select the board data and click the [Select] button.

Selecting the board data

3
Data optimization

64321-S1-10

2. Check the name and location to save the board [Link] board name is displayed in the format
defined by "initial setting". If you want to rename the board data and/or change the save location,
click the [Select] button in the "Save Board" group [Link] the "Board data select" screen appears,
make the desired changes and click the [Close] button.

Selecting the save location

64322-S1-10

3-30
4 Set the basic conditions.
When a basic condition template has been specified by initial setting, a check mark is placed in the
"Basic Condition Template" check box and the template name is displayed.

• When no template has been specified by initial setting:

Set each parameter item by referring to the previous section 3.2, "Setting the initial conditions".

• When a template has been specified by initial setting:

When using the specified template, proceed to step 5.
When using another template, click the [Select] button to open the "Template List Information"
screen, select the template name you want to use, and click the [Read] button.
Selecting the basic condition template

Selecting the “Basic Condition” templates

Data optimization
64323-S1-00

If not using the template, clear the "Basic Condition Template" check box and then set each parameter
item. For details on setting each item, refer to the previous section 3.2, "Setting the initial conditions".

Reference
Basic conditions you set here can also be registered as a template.

5 Click the [Detail] button to set detailed conditions.

When a detailed condition template has been specified by initial setting, a check mark is placed in the
"Derail Condition Template" check box and the template name is displayed.

• When no template has been specified by initial setting:

Set each parameter item by referring to the previous section 3.3, "Setting the detailed conditions".

• When a template has been specified by initial setting:

When using the specified template, proceed to step 6.
When using another template, click the [Select] button to open the "Template List Information"
screen, select the template name you want to use, and click the [Read] button.

Selecting the detailed condition template

64324-S1-00

If not using the template, clear the "Detail Condition Template" check box and then set each parameter
item. For details on setting each item, refer to the previous section 3.3, "Setting the detailed conditions".

Reference
Detailed conditions you set here can also be registered as a template.

3-31
 6 Save the setting file.
By default the setting file name is identical with the name of the board data to be optimized. Enter the
desired name if you want to change the default name.
After confirming the name of the setting file, press the [Save setting] button.

Renaming the setting file

3
Data optimization

Enter the setting file name.

64325-S1-10

7 To optimize another board data, repeat the above procedure.

3-32
 3.9 Editing the data optimizing conditions
Data optimizing conditions already defined can be edited by any of the following two methods.

3.9.1 Editing each file of optimizing conditions

To edit each file of optimizing conditions, follow these steps.

1 Select the setting file.

From the left-hand grid pane (list of board data with optimizing conditions defined), select the setting
file you want to edit.

2 Click the [Editing] button.

The "Set optimization parameters" screen appears.

3 Edit the optimizing conditions.

Set the basic and detailed conditions. For the setting method, refer to 3.7, "Setting the optimizing
conditions for individual board data", in this chapter.

4 Save the settings.

Check the setting file name to be saved and then click the [Save setting] button. 3
Editing a file of optimizing conditions

64326-S1-10
Data optimization

3-33
 3.9.2 Editing multiple files of optimizing conditions
Two or more files of optimizing conditions can be edited at one time.

1 Select the setting file.

From the left-hand grid pane (list of board data with optimizing conditions defined), select multiple
items of board data you want to edit while holding down the [Shift] and [Ctrl] keys.

2 Click the [Editing] button.

The "Collective editing of optimization parameters" screen appears.

Editing multiple files of optimizing conditions

Step1

3
Data optimization

Step2

Step4
64327-S1-00

3 Edit the optimizing conditions.

Select the check boxes for the conditions you want to edit.

"Board Name"
Selecting this check box allows you to select the file naming method from among "Same", "Prefix"
and "Postfix". When this check box is unchecked, the files are saved under the same name as the
board data.

"Basic Condition"
Set whether to use a basic condition template.

"Detail Condition"
Set whether to use a detailed condition template.

4 Save the setting files.

Check the settings in the "Save Board" group box and click the [Save setting] button.

3-34
 4. Executing data optimization
When you have set the data optimization conditions, execute the data optimization as explained below.

n NOTE
When you want to store the optimization result information, you must first make settings for saving the result information
before executing data optimization. Refer to section 3.4, "Common setting" for details.

1 Select the board data to be optimized.

Place the cursor on the board to be optimized and then click the [Right arrow] button in the center. The
board data will be loaded in, and the board name will appear in the data optimization list (right-hand
grid pane).

Reference
The board data can also be loaded in the optimization list by selecting the "Add Target" command from the File menu
or clicking the [Add] button on the toolbar, or double-clicking the board data (or setting file name).

Selecting the board data to be optimized 3

Double-click to load the board Double-click the board data to open
data into the right-hand list. the "Set optimizing parameters" screen.

Data optimization
Set the optimization method.

Click this button to load the selected board data into the right-hand list.
64328-S1-00

2 Set the optimization method.

Click the [Sgl] (single) button or [Cmn] (common) button.

3 Click the [Execute] button to start data optimization.

All of the selected board data will be optimized and the results displayed.
The optimization results are automatically saved when optimization is complete.

3-35
 4 Check the results.
The optimization results are displayed in the trace view (bottom pane).
You can also check the results by pressing the [Result View] button when the setting for saving the result
information has been made by "common setting".

Optimization result display

3
Data optimization

Optimization resuls are displayed.

64329-S1-00

5 Save the results.

Click the [Save list] button to save the results. If you want to cancel saving, then select "Exit" from the
File menu and quit the Optimizer.

NOTE
When the [CT Estimation] button is clicked, the estimated cycle time after optimization can be confirmed.

3-36
n Checking the optimization results on the Feeder Viewer
You can check the optimization results of the board data marked "OK" in the Opt. column in the left pane.
Select the board data in the left pane and then select "Optimizer result" from the Optimizer menu. The
"Optimizer result" window appears.

Checking the optimization results

"Optimizer result" window

Data optimization
64330-S1-00

3-37
 4.1 Checking the nozzles
After optimization is complete, you can check the nozzle types to be used with each board and each machine.
In the Board Editor window, open the board data for which you want to check the nozzle types. Select
"Required Nozzle" from the Optimizer menu. The "Required Nozzles" list then appears.
When the machine is not equipped with a nozzle station or the machine uses a head not having an auto nozzle
changer, check that the correct nozzle is attached to each head by referring to this "Required Nozzles" list.

"Required Nozzles" list

3
Data optimization

64331-S1-00

3-38
 5. Outputting the feeder setup lists
After optimizing the board data in the Feeder Viewer, you can output, display and print feeder setup lists that
show the feeder positions and quantity of parts used with each board data.
The output data can be further edited to create "setup instruction sheets" and print them.

n NOTE
To use the feeder setup lists, you will need the following software.
• Microsoft Excel 2000 or 2003 or 2007

1 Select "Setup Assignment" from the Plan menu.

A confirmation dialog box appears.

2 Display the feeder setup lists.

1. Click the [OK] button in the confirmation dialog box.

Outputting the feeder setup lists

3

Data optimization
64332-S1-0

2. When Excel starts up, a macro virus warning message appears.

Click the [Enable Macros] button.

Macro virus warning message

64333-S1-00

3-39
 3. Excel worksheets appear to show the feeder setup lists for each machine.
Check the contents, edit the layout on each worksheet as needed, and print it out.

Feeder setup lists

When "Plural" was selected

3
Data optimization

64334-S1-00

Reference
The displayed worksheets can be further edited to create "setup instruction sheets" and print them.

3 Save the data and close Excel.

3-40
 6. Changing the line to be optimized
To change the line to be optimized, follow these steps.

1 Select "Select Line" from the File menu.

The "Select Editing Line" dialog box appears.

2 Select the line you want to change to and click the [OK] button.
The Optimizer window changes to display the selected line.

Optimizer window
Changing the line

Data optimization
64335-S1-00

Reference
When you attempt to change a line while the trace information is still displayed, a confirmation message appears
asking whether to clear the trace information.

3-41
 7. Multi-lane Suppor t
7.1 Optimize of single combined program
Each parts is used by all lane just after single program is combined. They are divided to all lane automatically
if it is optimized. Do optimize if the single combined program is used with [Parallel Lanes].

7.2 Optimize with same kind parts

The parts that its name and feeder type is same on different lane on the lane with dual lane machine are called
as same kind parts. There are some cases that they are unified to one parts in optimization.
If same kind parts have different parts group number, they are changed to same number. But magnitude
relation is kept. If they have contradiction, the error of optimization occurs

3 7.3 [Set optimization parameters] dialog is extended

"Mount Lane Designation" has been added. It is added only with single board data and not displayed with
combined board data. It is able to decide to optimize the single board data for which lane.
Data optimization

[Set optimization parameters] dialog

64365-S1-00

3-42
7.4 [Detail] setting is extended. 1
[Create] button - [Detail] button - "Fixed Board" tab support combined board data. The combined board data is
active for all lane as fixed board data.

Detailed setting of optimization

64366-S1-00 3
7.5 [Detail] setting is extended. 2

Data optimization
[Create] button - [Detail] button - "Stage" tab is changed to "Stage/Lane" tab. It is able to select the optimized
lane. Normally it is recommended to optimize with all lane. If it is necessary to optimize with only one lane,
change this setting.

Detailed setting 2 of optimization

64367-S1-00

3-43
 7.6 [Detail] setting is extended. 3
[Create] button - [Detail] button - "Mount Mode" tab has been added. Normally it is recommended to set
"Auto" to optimized with best condition by optimizer.

Detailed setting 2 of optimization

3 64368-S1-00

Mount Mode Decision Meth Contents

Data optimization

Auto Optimizer decides automatically.

Edit Set by manually.

Current Keep the board data setting.

Mount Mode Contents

Auto Optimizer decides automatically.

Parallel Each head mounts only for each lane.

Alternate Front lane and rear lane are mounted in order.

3-44
7.7 Result dialog is extended
It supports combined board data.
• CT of each lane is displayed on “Line CT(sec)”.
• “Cycle Time + Transfer (sec)” is displayed on optimization log. It is the total time of mount and transfer.

It is different by mount mode.

Mount Mode Contents

Parallel [Line CT (sec)]

It is Line CT of each lane.

Alternate [Line CT (sec)]

It is the total of mount time of each lane. It is mount time of
front lane and rear lane. Lane CT of each lane is same.

3
[Cycle Time + Transfer (sec)]
Transfer time is 0.0 because the board is finished to transfer
during another lane is mounting.

Data optimization
Trace information

Trace information

64369-S1-00

3-45
 Example : Mount Mode is [Parallel]

3
64370-S1-00
Data optimization

Example : Mount Mode is [Alternate]

64371-S1-00

3-46
Chapter 4 Setup Optimizer

Contents

1. About the Setup Optimizer 4-1

2. Executing the Setup Optimizer 4-2

3. Setting the Setup Optimizer sheet 4-5

3.1 Starting the Setup Optimizer sheet 4-5
3.2 Setup Optimizer sheet configuration 4-7
3.3 COMPXPCB worksheet setting 4-10
3.4 StandardTime worksheet setting 4-15
3.5 FeederPlate worksheet setting 4-16
3.6 Nozzle worksheet 4-18
3.7 Executing the Setup Optimizer under the defined conditions 4-19

4. Setting examples on the Setup Optimizer sheet 4-20

4.1 Setting as many feeders as possible 4-20
4.2 Giving priority to the cycle time 4-21

5. Optimizing the board data 4-22

5.1 Optimizing the board currently being set up 4-22
5.2 Optimizing the edited board data 4-24

6. Optimization Monitor 4-25

6.1 Starting the Optimization Monitor 4-25
6.2 Optimization Monitor sheet configuration 4-27
 1. About the Setup Optimizer
The Setup Optimizer minimizes the feeder setup work required when producing different type boards. This
allows you to continue producing boards without having to frequently stop the machine to change the feeder
set positions.

Production time example

Production time for multiple boards by normal optimization

Setup for board A Production of board A Setup for board B Production of board B Setup for board C Production of board C

Shared setup fro boards A, B, C Production of board A Production of board B Production of board C

Production time for multiple boards by "Setup Optimizer"

Production time

63400-S1-00

n NOTE
The Setup Optimizer has the following advantages:
• Ideal for small-quantity production of various board types
• Reduces setup time by using a common board setup.

c CAUTION
The cycle time for each board produced with the Setup Optimizer will be longer than when using normal board data
optimization 4
Reference
Even when the Setup Optimizer is installed, individual board data or currently edited board data can be optimized.

Setup Optimizer
See section 5, "Optimizing the currently edited CPB data", in this chapter.

4-1
 2. Executing the Setup Optimizer
This section describes how to run the Setup Optimizer.
If you need to decide some feeder set positions, make the settings on the Setup Optimizer sheet before
executing the Setup Optimizer. See section 4, "Setting examples on the Setup Optimizer sheet", in this
chapter.

1 Start the Feeder Viewer.

1. Select "Feeder Viewer" from the Windows Start menu.
The "Select Line" dialog box appears.
2. Select the line to use for production.

Reference
You can start the Feeder Viewer from the Data menu of the Board Explorer or from the File menu of the Board Editor.

2 Select the board data.

1. Select "New" from the Plan menu (or click the [New] button on the toolbar).
2. Select "Add Board" from the Edit menu (or click the [Add Board] button on the toolbar) to open the
Board Data Select dialog box.
3. Select the board data you want to optimize.

n NOTE

4
Up to 500 board data items or 2550 parts (components) can be loaded on the Feeder Viewer.

c CAUTION
You must select board data that can be individually optimized.
Setup Optimizer

3 From the Optimizer menu, select "Execute Optimizer" – "Setup Optimizer".

The "Setup Optimizer setting" dialog box appears.

Starting the Setup Optimizer

64400-S1-10

4-2
4 Make the Setup Optimizer setting.
1. Set the file name to save the optimized data.
For details on the file name setting, refer to section 3 "Setting the optimization conditions", in chapter
3.

c CAUTION
On the Factory Tools, the file name can be up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
A prefix or postfix can be added to the file name as long as it is within a total of 20 characters. If the file name exceeds
20 characters, a message dialog box will appear. Click the [Yes] button in the message dialog box to automatically
shorten the filename. If you want to change the file name manually, click the [No] button and change the file name
by using the Board Explorer, etc.

2. Set up "Optimization conditions".

Setting optimization conditions for each setup group

Tick this option to set optimization conditions for each setup group.

Setup group
Selects a setup group to set optimization conditions.

Basic conditions
Activates the Basic Condition Template.

Detailed conditions
Activates the Detail Condition Template.
3. Tick "Quit when an error occurs during optimization" if optimization should be stopped when
something goes wrong with optimization.

5 Execute the Setup Optimizer.

When finished making the settings in the "Setup Optimizer setting" dialog box, click the [Execute] button.
1. The Setup Optimizer window appears to execute optimization.
4

Setup Optimizer
Setup Optimizer window

64402-S1-00

Reference
When optimizing on the setup being edited with the Feeder Viewer, the file name in the "Setting File Name" column of
the optimization window will be "FV_Board data name". (The prefix "FV" is added to the board data name.)

4-3
 2. When the optimization has been completed, the Setup Optimizer window closes and returns to the
Feeder Viewer.
At this point, the board data names in the left pane list are changed according to the setting you
made in step 4.

Feeder Viewer window after optimization

Board data names are changed after optimization

4 64403-S1-00

6 Check the optimization results.

Select "Optimizer Result" from the Optimizer menu.
Setup Optimizer

The optimization results of the currently selected board data are displayed.

Optimization result display

64404-S1-00

7 Save the results.

4-4
 3. Setting the Setup Optimizer sheet
The Setup Optimizer sheet is used to determine the Setup Optimizer conditions. When there are feeders that
must be installed in the fixed feeder set positions, you can specify their positions on the Setup Optimizer
sheets. If there are no such feeders, you do not have to do anything on the Setup Optimizer sheet.

n NOTE
The following software is required to use the Setup Optimizer sheet.
• Microsoft Excel 2000, Excel 2002 or Excel 2003 or Excel 2007.

c CAUTION
Computation expressions and macro programs are written in the Setup Optimizer sheets. Take the following
precautions to run the Setup Optimizer sheets correctly.
• Do not use the Setup Optimizer sheet in any way that is not described in this manual and do not change the
contents of each cell.
• Do not delete any row and column.
• Some functions need time in order to run the process. When an hourglass appears or a command button stays
pressed or a message such as "Recalculating…." is displayed in the status bar of the Setup Optimizer sheet, check
how the software is operating (on the display).

c CAUTION
The Setup Optimizer sheet does not work on some models.
If you try to start the Setup Optimizer sheet for a line containing a model that is not compatible with the Setup
Optimizer sheet, it will not start and an error dialog box will appear.
4
3.1 Starting the Setup Optimizer sheet

Setup Optimizer
This section explains the method for starting the Setup Optimizer sheet based on the currently registered board
data.

1 Start the Feeder Viewer.

1. Select "Feeder Viewer" from the Windows Start menu.
The "Select Line" dialog box appears.
2. Select the line to use for production.

Reference
You can start the Feeder Viewer from the Data menu of the Board Explorer or from the File menu of the Board Editor.

2 Select the board data.

1. Select "New" from the Plan menu (or click the [New] button on the toolbar).
2. Select "Add Board" from the Edit menu (or click the [Add Board] button on the toolbar) to open the
board Data Select dialog box.
3. Select the board data you want to optimize.

n NOTE
Up to 100 board data items or 2550 components can be loaded on the Feeder Viewer.

c CAUTION
You must select board data that can be individually optimized.

3 Set the board production quantity.

In the Production column of the board list (left pane), enter the production quantity.

4-5
 4 Set the Setup Optimizer conditions.
1. From the Optimizer menu, select "Arrange Setup Optimizer with Excel" - "Using New Plan".
Excel will start to open the Setup Optimizer sheet.

Starting the Setup optimizer sheet

64405-S1-00

4 2. When Excel starts up, a macro virus warning message appears. Click the [Enable Macros] button.

Macro virus warning message for Excel

Setup Optimizer

64406-S1-00

3. The Setup Optimizer sheet opens for setting the Setup Optimizer conditions.

Setup Optimizer sheet

64407-S1-00

4-6
3.2 Setup Optimizer sheet configuration
The Setup Optimizer sheet consists of 4 worksheets and a floating toolbar, as shown below.

Setup Optimizer sheet

Setup
Optimizer toolbar

4
Setup Optimizer worksheets
64408-S1-00

● Setup Optimizer toolbar

Setup Optimizer toolbar

Setup Optimizer
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

64409-S1-00

1. Exit
Closes the Excel file and returns to the Feeder Viewer window.
2. Initialize
Reloads the Excel file to let you set the Setup Optimizer conditions from the beginning.
3. Option
Selects whether to enable the automatic update function.
4. Group
Changes the setup group number.
5. Stay/X
Switches the setup group status between "Stay" and "X".
Reference
For details on the setup group status, refer to section 3.3, "COMPXPCB worksheet", in this chapter.

6. MchReset (Machine reset)

Resets the feeder set positions and component layouts on the machine.
7. FdrReset (Feeder reset)
Resets the feeder set positions.
8. SetMch (machine distribution)
Calculates a distribution plan for the components for which no machines have been assigned, by taking the overall
distribution into account.

4-7
 9. SetFdr (Feeder position setting)
Calculates the feeder set positions for each setup group in order to minimize the width taken up by the feeder for
components whose feeder positions are unspecified.
Machines are also assigned to data for which no machines are specified.
If non-occupied feeder space is insufficient or feeder set positions cannot be assigned due to improper machine settings,
the cell (SetNum) of those feeder set positions will turn red.
The "SetFdr" dialog box appears when you click the [SetFdr] button. In this dialog box, make settings as follows.

"SetFdr" dialog box

64410-S1-00

1. In the "Setup Group" box, enter the setup group number to set the feeder positions.
2. From the "Non Target" drop-down list, select the feeder type when you want to narrow the choice of
feeder type.
3. In each of "Plt 1" to "Plt4" boxes on each machine, set the priority for using the feeder plates. If there

4
are unused feeder plates, leave them set to "NotUse".
(For usable area of each feeder plate, see the feeder plate setting on the FeederPlate worksheet.)
4. Click the [OK] button to set the feeder positions.

c CAUTION
Setup Optimizer

A message "Plate Setting Error" might appear when the "SetFdr" function is being run.
In this case, check the feeder plate setting and correct it to suit the machine.
To correct the setting, refer to section 3.5, "FeederPlate worksheet setting", in this chapter.

10. ChkFdr (Feeder interference check)

Checks whether the component data containing feeder set positions causes feeders to interfere with each other, according
to the setup group.
If the feeders interfere with each other, the cell (SetNum) of those feeder set positions will become red.
The "ChkFdr" dialog box appears when you click the [ChkFdr] button. In this dialog box, make settings as follows.

"ChkFdr" dialog box

64411-S1-00

1. Enter the setup group in the "Setup Group" box.

2. Click the [OK] button to check the feeders for interference.

c CAUTION
If feeder set positions have been set manually, execute "ChkFdr" before exiting Excel to make sure that there is no
error.

11. ChkData (data setting error check)

Checks whether data setting in the Excel file is satisfactory. If an error that might otherwise be found with this check is
ignored, the Setup Optimizer might not work correctly.

4-8
12. Update (update to latest information)
In the following cases, click the [Update] button to update the displayed contents.
• When the cell color has changed after executing "SetMch", "SetFdr" or "ChkFdr" and you want to return the cell to its
original color.
• When feeder set positions are specified manually
• When the order of component data rows is changed using the Excel sort function
Reference
To specify the range (component data rows) in which to execute the "MchReset", "FdrReset", "SetMch" and "SetFdr"
tasks, follow the procedure below.
1. Select the rows containing the target data and click the tool button for the task you want to execute.
2. Select the "Selected Data" check box in the dialog box that appears.
3. Click the [OK] button. The task will be executed only for the selected component data.

● Setup Optimizer worksheets

There are the following 4 worksheets to set the Setup Optimizer conditions.
• COMPXPCB worksheet
Shows a list of components to be used and allows you to set the machines and feeder positions.
The conditions set on the StandardTime, FeederPlate and Nozzle worksheets (explained later) will be referenced here.
For details, see 3.3, "COMPXPCB worksheet setting", in this chapter.
• StandardTime worksheet
Allows you to set the mounting time per part according to each feeder as needed, in units of seconds. The data set here
will be referenced to the COMPXPCB worksheet.
For details, see 3.4, "StandardTime worksheet setting", in this chapter.
• FeederPlate worksheet
Allows you to set the installation position of each feeder and the feeder plate assignment according to each machine as
4
needed. The data set here will be referenced to the COMPXPCB worksheet.
For details, see 3.5, "FeederPlate worksheet setting", in this chapter.

Setup Optimizer
• Nozzle worksheet
Allows you to set the usable feeder set positions for each nozzle. The data set here will be referenced to the COMPXPCB
worksheet.
For details, see 3.6, "Nozzle worksheet setting", in this chapter.

4-9
 3.3 COMPXPCB worksheet setting
The COMPXPCB worksheet shows a list of components for use.
The data on this worksheet can be sorted by any item such as feeder type, quantity of components to be used
and feeder set position, so you can easily grasp the production situation and determine the machine and feeder
set positions while checking the unused areas of the feeder plates and production line balance.

c CAUTION
After sorting, always click the [Update] button on the Setup Optimizer toolbar.

You can also copy the COMPXPCB worksheet onto another worksheet to make a setup instruction sheet or print
it.

c CAUTION
Always use a copy of the COMPXPCB worksheet when making an instruction sheet, etc.
The COMPXPCB worksheet might not work correctly if directly edited.

COMPXPCB worksheet

2 1 6 9 10

3
4
5
7

4
8

11
Setup Optimizer

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
64412-S1-00

1. Mount
Shows the total number of components to be used for each board data.
2. Block
Shows the number of blocks registered for each board data.
3. Schedule
Shows the production volume (number of boards to be produced).
4. Estimation
Shows the cycle time estimated from the StandardTime worksheet.

c CAUTION
The cycle time displayed in "Estimation" differs from the actual cycle time. Run the setup optimization to check the
accurate cycle time.

5. Unbalance (Imbalance)
Shows the difference between the maximum and minimum cycle times among the machines.
6. Total
Shows the estimated cycle time for all boards with production volume taken into account.

4-10
 7. Xsize, Ysize
Shows the board size.
8. SetupGroup
This is a setup group number and is set to "1" by default.
When making different setups for multiple boards, set the setup group number for each board.
If setup group setting has been changed, click the [Group] button on the Setup Optimizer toolbar.
When changing setup group numbers, set them sequentially like 1, 2, 3 and so on.
Reference
A group means a series of boards to be produced without changing the setup. When the group setting is changed,
the setup must also be changed.
When two or more groups are used to run setup optimization, the setup can be made while incorporating the setup
from the previous group. This reduces the number of components subjected to setup change.

Feeder installation space may be insufficient after setup groups are increased. In this case, follow the procedure
below.

(Method 1) Reducing the number of boards simultaneously to setup optimization:

1. Quit the Setup Optimizer sheet.
2. Return to the Feeder Viewer window.
3. Select the boards subjected to setup optimization. The number of boards must be reduced to maintain sufficient feeder
installation space.
4. Start the Setup Optimizer sheet and set the optimization conditions.

(Method 2) Grouping boards into setup groups:

When boards are grouped, the larger the group number, the lower the cycle time due to the influence by previous groups.
1. In the "SetupGroup", set the group number for each set of boards to be grouped.
4
2. Click the [Group] button on the Setup Optimizer toolbar.

Setup Optimizer
After grouping, make sure that a feeder set position is set for each group, starting from group 1.
9. Total
Shows the feeder plate space occupied by the feeders, in terms of the number of 8-mm feeders.
"F" indicates the front feeder plate.
"R" indicates the rear feeder plate.
10. Remain
Shows the estimated feeder plate space not used by feeders, in terms of the number of 8-mm feeders.
Check the value shown in "M" when you set the machines manually, and check the values shown in "F" and "R" when you
set the feeder positions manually.
• "F" indicates the front feeder plate space. Calculation is performed using components with the "SetNum" (feeder set
position) parameter specified.
• "R" indicates the rear feeder plate space. Calculation is performed using components with the "SetNum" (feeder set
position) parameter specified.
• "M" indicates the feeder plate space for all machines. Calculation is performed using components with the "Machine"
parameter specified.

c CAUTION
In some cases "M" might not equal the sum of "F" and "R".
This happens, for instance, when settings are made in "Machine" but not in "SetNum".

c CAUTION
The values shown in "Remain" are just an estimate and might differ from the actual unused feeder set positions.

4-11
 11. Board data name
Shows the name of board data loaded on the worksheet.
12. No
Shows serial numbers.
13. CompName
Shows the name of components to be used for the board.
14. Comment
Shows a comment on each component.
15. Alt
Not currently used.
16. DBName
Shows the name registered in the database that is referenced to by each component.
17. FdrType
Shows the feeder type.
18. FdrLeft, FdrRight
Shows the width taken up by the feeder on left and right or shows the tray changer name for tray components.
19. Nozzle
Shows the nozzle to be used with each component.
20. TotalQuantity

4 Shows the total number of components to be used for each board.

21. TotalSetup
Shows the total number of board data that uses each component.
22. Capability (component mount capability)
Setup Optimizer

Shows whether components can be mounted with each machine.

n Capability parameter

Parameter value Description

1 Component can be mounted with machine.

0 Component cannot be mounted with machine.

23. Machine
Shows whether to set components on each machine. This parameter can be edited.
When one machine is set to "1", other machines in the same row must be set to "0".
n Machine parameter

Parameter value Description

1 Set component on machine.

0 Do not set component on machine.

24. Location (Front/Rear)

Set this parameter when you want to specify the front or rear plate during optimization of feeder set positions.
Reference
To use the front plate, set as follows:
Front 1
Rear 0
SetNum 0
To use the rear plate, set as follows:
Front 0
Rear 1
SetNum 0

4-12
 25. SetNum
Use this setting when you want to specify feeder set positions for certain components that must not be changed on the
Setup Optimizer.

c CAUTION
Before setting the feeder set positions, the "Machine" setting must be made.

Reference
When you want to determine all feeder set positions with the Setup Optimizer, set as follows:
Front 0
Rear 0
SetNum 0

Reference
When using a multi-stick feeder, set as follows:
1. Choose one component from those in the same multi-stick feeder, as a typical component.
2. Set the "FdrLeft" and "FdrRight" parameters to "0.00" for other components in the multi-stick feeder.
3. Specify the "FdrNum" (feeder set position).
When specifying the feeder set position manually, other components in the same multi-stick feeder must be
set to the same feeder set position.
When using the [SetFdr] button on the Setup Optimizer toolbar:
1. Set the feeder set position for the typical component to "0".
2. Click the [SetFdr] button on the Setup Optimizer toolbar.
3. For components other than typical components, specify the same feeder set position used for typical component.

4
Reference
Tray component setting:
When an auto tray stacker (ATS) or external tray changer is used, the tray component setting such as the pallet
number cannot be entered on the Setup Optimizer sheet.
Make the tray component setting before or after running the Setup Optimizer. In this case, you can ignore the
"SetNum", "FeederNG" and "NozzleNG" warnings that might appear in the "Status" column.
When a manual tray feeder (MTF) is used, specify the feeder set position before running the Setup Optimizer because

Setup Optimizer
it cannot be edited on the Setup Optimizer sheet. Also set the FeederPlate worksheet so that other feeders are not
assigned in the area used by the MTF.

26. Status
Shows information on whether the setting is correct.

c CAUTION
To display the "Status" information, you must the make the necessary settings on the FeederPlate and Nozzle
worksheets. See 3.5,"FeederPlate worksheet setting", and 3.6, "Nozzle worksheet setting", later in this chapter.

n Status parameter

Parameter value Description

OK Data setting is correct.

Machine Not assigned to machine or machine setting is incorrect.

SetNum Feeder set position is not specified or setting is incorrect.

Feeder cannot be set in specified position.

FeederNG
(Refer to the FeederPlate worksheet.)
Component cannot be picked up at specified position.
NozzleNG
(Refer to the Nozzle worksheet.)

c CAUTION
• All components must be assigned to the machine used to mount each component.
When the "Status" shows "Machine", specify the machine used to mount the component.
• The Setup Optimizer will not work correctly if the "Status" shows "FeederNG" or "NozzleNG".
Check each setting and eliminate the error. However, you can ignore "FeederNG" and "NozzleNG" for tray
components.

4-13
 27. Component setup status for each setup group
Shows the setup status of components for each setup group.

n Setup group parameter

Parameter value Description

0 Components are used by a setup group.

Stay Components are still set on the machine, but are not used by a setup group.

X Components should be removed from the machine when changing the setup group.

(blank) These components have never been used when two or more setup groups are set.

Reference
If two or more setup groups have been set, then the message "Stay" will be displayed for those components used by
the previous group but not by the current group.
The feeder installation space can be increased by setting "X" (remove) for components for which "Stay" is specified.
This allows new components to be added to the group.
1. Select the cell to be edited.
2. Click the [Stay/X] button on the Setup Optimizer toolbar.

c CAUTION
Components that should be used (O) or left installed (Stay) on the machine by two or more setup groups, set their
feeder positions on the Excel worksheet.

4
Setup Optimizer

4-14
 3.4 StandardTime worksheet setting
The StandardTime worksheet allows you to set the time (seconds) required to mount one component from each
feeder. Make this setting as needed.

n NOTE
Settings made here are used to estimate the line balance on the COMPXPCB worksheet.

StandardTime worksheet

4
64413-S1-00

Setup Optimizer
Reference
If you have customized the settings, you must reenter them by using the Setup Optimizer backup files.

4-15
 3.5 FeederPlate worksheet setting
The FeederPlate worksheet allows you to set the feeder plate positions where each feeder can be installed and
also to specify the feeder plate layout. Clicking the [Load] button for a machine loads its feeder plate
information.

n NOTE
Settings made here are used to check the feeder set positions on the COMPXPCB worksheet (FeederNG alarm
appears if an error is found) and to determine the feeder set positions automatically.

FeederPlate worksheet

Feeder plate information is loaded.

Click [Load] button

for each machine.

4
Setup Optimizer

64414-S1-00

The feeder plate layout items appear by scrolling to the right on the worksheet screen.
Specify the feeder plate layout as needed while referring to the example below.

Plate layout setting

20 feeders × 4 plates

20 feeders × 2 plates
(Front side only)

50 feeders × 2 plates

64415-S1-00

c CAUTION
Feeder plate spec information on the YVL80 and II series surface mounters cannot be loaded into the FeederPlate
worksheet. To specify their feeder plate layout and feeders, refer to the feeder plate spec information from the
machine or from the Factory Tools machine property.

4-16
■ To delete the feeder plate setting
If the number of machines registered in the line is reduced due to upgrading of the Factory Tools version or changing the
line configuration, delete the settings for those machines removed from the line.
1. Deleting the feeder plate setting
Select the feeder plate setting range for the removed machines and press the [Delete] key.
The setting in the selected range of cells will be deleted.

Selecting and deleting the feeder plate setting

4
Drag the mouse to select the range of cells and press [Delete] key.
64416-S1-00

2. Deleting the feeder plate layout setting

Scroll the worksheet to the right until the feeder plate layout items appear.
Select the feeder plate layout setting range for the removed machines and press the [Delete] key.

Setup Optimizer
The setting in the selected range of cells will be deleted.

Deleting the feeder plate layout setting

Delete unnecessary data.

64417-S1-00

4-17
 3.6 Nozzle worksheet
The FeederPlate worksheet allows you to set the feeder set positions usable for each nozzle. Clicking the [Load]
button for each machine loads the effective nozzle set position information (feeder set positions accessible by
each nozzle).

n NOTE
Settings made here are used to check the feeder set positions on the COMPXPCB worksheet (NozzleNG alarm
appears if an error is found).

Nozzle worksheet

Effective nozzle set position information is loaded.

Click [Load] button

for each machine.

4
Setup Optimizer

64418-S1-00

c CAUTION
If you have changed the line configuration or head spec information, then the valid nozzle set position information
must be updated.
1. Select the line number to execute setup optimization.
2. Open the "Line" folder contained in the folder where Factory Tools is installed.
For example, open the "Line 1" folder for Line 1.
3. Open the "Prt" folder.
4. Delete all the "[Link]" files (x: number).
For example, all files named like "[Link]" or "[Link]" should be deleted.
5. Execute the setup optimization.
An Excel file will be automatically created.
6. Click the [LOAD] button for each machine on the Nozzle worksheet.

4-18
 3.7 Executing the Setup Optimizer under the defined conditions
When setting on each worksheet is complete, save the data. Then apply it to the Feeder Viewer and optimize
feeder setups. as explained below.

1 Save the data.

Click the [Exit] button on the Setup Optimizer toolbar. When the Save dialog box appears, click the [Yes]
button.
Another dialog box then appears asking whether to apply the Setup Optimizer sheet data to the Feeder
Viewer.

2 Apply the data to the Feeder Viewer.

Click the [Yes] button in the dialog box to apply the Setup Optimizer sheet data to the Feeder Viewer.

Saving the data

Setup Optimizer
64419-S1-00

3 Execute the Setup Optimizer.

Perform optimization by referring to section 2, "Executing the Setup Optimizer", earlier in this chapter.

4-19
 4. Setting examples on the Setup Optimizer sheet
This section gives two examples for making settings on the Setup Optimizer sheet.

4.1 Setting as many feeders as possible

The following steps explain how to set as many feeders as possible in a line.

1 Click the [MchReset] button on the Setup Optimizer toolbar.

The "MchReset" dialog box then appears. Click the [OK] button to clear the information on the machines
and feeder set positions.

"MchReset" dialog box

4
Setup Optimizer

64420-S1-00

2 Click the [SetFdr] button on the Setup Optimizer toolbar.

The "SetFdr" dialog box appears. Select the feeder plate to which you want to give priority and click the
[OK] button.
The feeder set position for each component will be optimized.

"SetFdr" dialog box

64421-S1-00

Reference
To check the feeder plates on which the feeder set positions are registered, refer to the FeederPlate work sheet. (See
section 3.5, "FeederPlate worksheet setting", in this chapter.)

4-20
 4.2 Giving priority to the cycle time
When there are feeder set positions available, the Setup Optimizer allows you to make settings so as to give
priority to the cycle time.

1 Click the [MchReset] button on the Setup Optimizer toolbar.

The "MchReset" dialog box then appears. Click the [OK] button to clear the information on the machines
and feeder set positions.

"MchReset" dialog box

4
64422-S1-00

Setup Optimizer
2 Specify the feeder set positions by manual input.
1. To specify the feeder set positions manually, make settings in the "Machine", "Location" and "SetNum"
columns (manual input).
2. When you want to find the optimal feeder set positions with the Setup Optimizer, set "0" in the
"Location" and "SetNum" column.
3. Click the [SetMch] button on the Setup Optimizer toolbar to open the "SetMch" dialog box, and click
the [OK] button.
Machines will be automatically assigned to the components for which no machine has yet been
specified.

"SetMch" dialog box

64423-S1-00

4-21
 5. Optimizing the board data
The Setup Optimizer optimizes the board currently being set up, or other board data edited on the Feeder
Viewer.

5.1 Optimizing the board currently being set up

To optimize the board data you are currently editing on the Feeder Viewer, select "Execute Optimizer" –
"Single Optimizer" or "Common Optimizer" from the Optimizer menu.

n NOTE
When "Single Optimizer" is selected, data optimization is performed under conditions set for each board data,
When "Common Optimizer" is selected, data optimization is performed while handling board data previously optimized
as a fixed board.

n When "Single Optimizer" is selected

When "Single optimizer" is selected, the Setup Optimizer starts to optimize only the board data that you are currently
editing with the Feeder Viewer.
1. From the Optimizer menu, select "Execute Optimizer" and then click "Single Optimizer".
The "Optimizer setting" dialog box appears.
2. A confirmation dialog box will appear to ask whether setup group number should be assigned automatically or not.
Click the "Yes" button to activate the automatic assignment. Group numbers will be entered automatically in the "Setup
group" field in the "Setup board list" window. (Different numbers will be entered for each board data.)
3. Check or set the optimization conditions and click the [Execute] button.

4
For details on the optimization conditions, refer to section 3.3.5, "Initial setting", in chapter 3.
4. The optimization window appears and starts optimizing the board data.
5. When the board data has been optimized, the optimization window closes and returns to the Feeder Viewer window. The
word "OK" appears in the Opt. column in the left pane when optimization was successful, or the word "NG" appears if
not.
Setup Optimizer

Optimizing individual Board data

64424-S1-10

4-22
 n When "Common Optimizer" is selected
When "Common optimizer" is selected, the Setup Optimizer starts to sequentially optimize all board data that is currently
loaded in the Feeder Viewer.
1. From the Optimizer menu, select "Execute Optimizer" and then click "Common Optimizer".
The "Optimizer setting" dialog box appears.
2. Check or set the optimization conditions and click the [Execute] button.
For details on the optimization conditions, refer to section 3.3.5, "Initial setting", in chapter 3.
3. The optimization window appears and starts optimizing the board data sequentially.
4. When the board data has been optimized, the optimization window closes and returns to the Feeder Viewer window.
The word "OK" appears in the Opt. column in the left pane when the optimization was successful, or the word "NG"
appears if not.

Optimizing Board data sequentially

Setup Optimizer

64425-S1-10

Reference
When optimizing the board in the Feeder Viewer, the prefix "FV" is added to the board data name shown in the
"Setting File Name" column in the optimization window.

n NOTE
If a value is inputted in the "Setup group", data of the same group are optimized in turn.

4-23
 5.2 Optimizing the edited board data
You can also optimize the board data that has been edited with the Feeder Viewer.
1. From the Optimizer menu, select "Execute Optimizer" and then click "Modified Boards Optimizer".
A confirmation message appears asking if you want to optimize the edited board data. Click the [OK] button to
optimize it.
Reference
The "Edit Board Optimizer" command is dimmed if no board data has been edited with the Feeder Viewer.

2. A confirmation dialog box will appear to ask whether setup group number should be assigned automatically or not.
Refer to "Single Optimizer" in the previous section "5.1 Optimizing the board currently being set up" for details.
3. The "Optimizer Setting" dialog box appears and only the edited board data is loaded.
Check or set the optimization conditions and click the [Execute] button.
For details on optimization conditions, refer to 3.3.5, "Initial setting", in chapter 3.
4. The optimization window appears and starts optimizing each board data.
Reference
When optimizing on a setup currently being edited with Feeder Viewer, the file name in the "Setting File Name" column
of the optimization window will be "FV_Board data name". (The prefix "FV" is added to the board data name.)

5. When the board data has been optimized, the optimization window closes and returns to the Feeder Viewer window.
The word "OK" appears in the Opt. column in the left pane when optimization was successful, or the word "NG"
appears if not.

Optimizing the edited board data

4
Setup Optimizer

64426-S1-10

4-24
 6. Optimization Monitor
When optimizing multiple board data with the Setup Optimizer, the CPH (number of components that can be
mounted per hour) might differ depending on the actual optimization conditions.
After optimizing on multiple board data, the Optimization Monitor allows you to check the CPH and load
time for each board data or each setup group, and make an automatic calculation to evaluate whether or
not the CPH meets the required count. Based on the results obtained with the Optimization Monitor, you can
decide whether to re-execute optimization.

6.1 Starting the Optimization Monitor

The Optimization Monitor can be started with board data that was successfully optimized (result was "OK").

1 Open the Feeder Viewer for board data that was successfully optimized.
2 Start the Optimization Monitor.
1. Select "Optimizer Results with Excel" from the Optimizer menu.

Starting the Optimization Monitor

Setup Optimizer
64427-S1-00

2. Excel starts up and a macro virus warning message appears. Click the [Enable Macros] button.

Macro virus warning message for Excel

64428-S1-00

4-25
 3. The Optimization Monitor window appears.

Optimization Monitor window

64429-S1-00

4
Setup Optimizer

4-26
 6.2 Optimization Monitor sheet configuration
The Optimization Monitor sheet consists of 3 worksheets ("Result", "Collect", "Input") and 2 customizing
worksheets ("Template", "Change Language").

c CAUTION
Precautions and description are also written on each worksheet. Always follow the instructions.

"Result" worksheet
Tabulates and displays the CPH, load time and line cycle time for each board data (program) or setup group.
The displayed results can be saved and reloaded with the buttons on the worksheet.
The characters and cells on the "Result" worksheet are displayed in color.
Red..........Results are outside the warning range
White.......Optimization results are "OK".
Pink.. ........Optimization results are "OK" but marks were not recognized.

"Result" worksheet

2 "Line No. and name 3

Setup Optimizer
4

Results are tabulated according to setup group.

64430-S1-00

1. [End] button
Saves the current data overwriting the original data, and quits the Optimization Monitor.
2. [Reload] button
Reloads information to apply changes to the corresponding cells.
3. [Save] button
Saves the current worksheets as another Excel file.
The currently displayed data on the "Result", "Collect" and "Input" worksheets are saved. However, since the [End],
[Reload] and [Save] buttons will then be unavailable, no data can be reloaded into the new file.
4. [Open TABLETACT] button
Clicking this button shows or hides the table (feeder plate table) cycle time in the machine column on the "Result"
worksheet.

4-27
 "Collect" worksheet
Tabulates and displays the CPH, load time and the number of feeders for each group.

"Collect" worksheet

Data on "Result" worksheet

Sum of number of feeders

64431-S1-00

Reference
The total number of feeders is displayed only when optimization was executed with the Setup Optimizer.

4
"Input" worksheet
Use this sheet to enter various settings for creating data on the "Result" worksheet.
To change a setting, directly enter the value in the cell. The change will be reflected in the "Result" worksheet when the
Optimization Monitor is restarted or the data is reloaded.
Setup Optimizer

"Input" worksheet

Enter the change directly.

64432-S1-00

Reference
• The "FidRec Time" is the time added to the machine cycle time when the fiducial recognition count is 0 (zero) and
the number of components to mount is 1 or more.
• The "Transport Time" is the time added to the line cycle time. (Line cycle time is equal to the maximum value of
machine cycle time.)

4-28
 "Template" worksheet
Use this sheet to set the cell color, change the column width, add columns or delete columns in order to create a
template for the "Result" worksheet.
Settings you make here are reflected in the "Result" worksheet next time.

"Template" worksheet

Use English
(alphanumeric) characters.

4
Do not insert columns where cycle time is displayed.
64433-S1-00

Setup Optimizer
c CAUTION
1 Only the cell attributes will be reflected. Buttons will not be reflected even if arranged.
2. A specific name is given to each cell. Do not change or delete the cell names.
3. When a column is inserted, always use alphanumeric characters for its heading.
4. Do not delete the second row showing "Optimize Monitor" and "LineName"
5. Do not insert any column where cycle time is displayed.

"Change Language" worksheet

On this worksheet, you can enter Japanese characters that correspond to English (alphanumeric) character strings written
in the "Template" worksheet. Use this worksheet if needed.
There are three English-Japanese tables.

"Change Language" worksheet

English-Japanese table on each sheet English-Japanese table for error message

English-Japanese table for dialog message

64434-S1-00

4-29
 • English-Japanese table on each sheet
English to Japanese conversion is performed based on this table, so add the conversion source if it is not in the table.
• English-Japanese table for error message
This is a list of English error messages and their corresponding Japanese error messages.
Directly rewrite the message if you want to change it.

c CAUTION
Never delete the cells.

• English-Japanese table for dialog message

This is a list of English dialog messages and their corresponding Japanese dialog messages.
Directly rewrite the message if you want to change it.

c CAUTION
Never delete the cells.

4
Setup Optimizer

4-30
Chapter 5 ASCII data conversion

Contents

1. About ASCII data conversion 5-1

2. Creating board data 5-2

3. Creating a conversion font file 5-10

3.1 Create a new font file 5-10
3.2 Editing a font file 5-30
3.3 Delete / copy a font file and change the font file name. 5-31
3.4 Import of font file. 5-32

4. Miscellaneous 5-34
4.1 How to express the logical formula. 5-34
1. About ASCII data conversion
Various CAD data and board data for other manufactures’ mounters stored in ASCII data files can be
converted to YAMAHA YGX format data.
To perform this data conversion, a "font file" used as the source for converting ASCII data into YGX data
must be created in advance. The following Steps explain the procedure for ASCII to YGX data conversion
using a font file already created. To create a font file, refer to section 3, "Creating a conversion font file", in
this chapter.

Flow to convert the CAD data to YGX data

Select CAD data / BOM data.

NO
Is a font file ready? Create a new font file.

Select delimiter.
YES

Select a font file.

Select quotation character.

Select a machine to save to and board

data name.
Select the contents included in CAD
data.

5
NO Select the origin of CAD data and
Are info for front machine.
and rear mixed?

Select method for acquiring board info.

YES

ASCII data conversion

Select the side for conversion.
Select method for acquiring fiducial,
bad mark and mounting info.

Conversion is performed.

Select method for acquiring BOM data.

Select fiducial and bad mark to be used.

Font file has been created.

Conversion has been completed.

63500-S1-00

5-1
 2. Creating board data
To create board data in YGX format from an ASCII data file, use the Board Explorer and follow the Steps
below.

1 Start the Board Explore.

2 Select "Ascii Data Conversion" from the Data menu.
"ASCII Data Conversion" dialog box appears.

3 Select "Data selection" from the Convert menu.

"CAD data selection" dialog box appears.

Data selection

5
ASCII data conversion

64500-S1-10

4 Select CAD data, BOM data and Font file to be used.

1. Click the [Browse(1)] button next to the "CAD data" text box.

Data selection

64501-S1-10

5-2
 2. The "CAD data selection" dialog box appears.

“CAD data selection” dialog box

64502-S1-10

Moving to the folder that contains the CAD data to be used.

Reference
YAMAHA sample CAD data is stored in the "Ascii" folder in the "Common" folder.
Clicking the [Default data folder] button moves to the "Font" folder mentioned above.

3. Select the CAD data to be used and click the [Open] button.

Select the CAD data

5
64503-S1-10

Reference

ASCII data conversion

When the desired file is not listed, select "All Files(*.*)" in the "File Type" box. For listing only files with the specified
extension, however the extension does not exist in the File Type list, type the extension in the "User define ext." box and
click the [Apply] button.

4. When BOM data is required, click the [Browse(2)] button next to the "BOM data" text box to move to
the folder that contains BOM data. Select the BOM data and click the [Open] button.

Select the BOM data

64504-S1-10

Reference
You do not need to select BOM data when the database name of the parts database is included in the mount
information of the CAD data.

5-3
 5. Clicking the FontFile arrow lists the stored font files. Select the font file to be used.

Arrow lists the font files

64505-S1-10

Reference
The listed files in the Font File box are those with FMT extension, which are in the "Font" folder in the "Common" folder.
The font file created in section 3, "Creating a conversion font file" is usually stored here.

Arrow lists the font files

5
ASCII data conversion

64549-S1-10

5-4
When CAD data for mounting coordinates and CAD data for marks are stored in another files, you need
to combine the information in the various files in order to create one board data. Continue to select the
CAD data, BOM data and Font file.

Arrow lists the font files

64550-S1-10

When the item of CAD data, BOM data and Font file needs to be deleted, right click on the line to be
deleted and click the [Clear] button.

The item to be deleted

ASCII data conversion

64551-S1-10

5-5
 5 Type the board name for the converted data within 20 alphanumeric characters.
If comment is required, type it in the "Comment" box. The typed comment will be shown in the [board
Comment] in the [Board] tab of the Board Editor.

Type the board name

64506-S1-10

6 Select the output machine.

1. Click the [Change Machine] button.

5 Select the output machine

ASCII data conversion

64507-S1-10

5-6
2. Click the [+] next to the displayed Line that has the output machine. Select the output machine.

Select the output machine

64508-S1-10

3. When the data both for the front and rear side of the board are mixed in the CAD data, select either
side to be converted in "Side". If data for either side is in CAD"data, select "Front".

Select either side to be converted

ASCII data conversion

64509-S1-10

5-7
 7 Select "Execution" from the Convert menu.
The conversion will be executed.

Select “Execution” from the Convert menu

64510-S1-10

1. When a fiducial mark or bad mark is found in the process of converting, the window for selecting a
mark appears. If the fiducial marks etc. with restrictions on the number of storage for one board data,
are found in CAD data, select which one will be used.

When two or more marks are found

5 64511-S1-10

2. When three or more coordinates information of a board fiducial are found in CAD data, they cannot
be stored all in the board data. Thus, select two from them. Clicking the white circle displayed on the
board image changes its color to green and allows you to select. To release the selection, click the
ASCII data conversion

circle again.

The board image

64512-S1-10

Reference
The restricted number of coordinates information of the fiducial and bad mark
Board fiducial 2
Block fiducial 2
Local fiducial 1024
Board bad mark 1
Block bad mark 1

5-8
3. Select block fiducial, board bad mark and block bad mark as needed.
4. Local fiducials can be paired on the screen. Select two or four fiducials to be paired and click the
[Make pairs of local fiducials ] button. To delete the created pairs of fiducials, highlight the desired
line and click the [Delete] button in the "Local Fiducial".

Screen of the Local Fiducial

64513-S1-10

5. For conversion with a board rotation, select the rotation angle in the "Rotate Board". When the board
needs to be flipped horizontally, select "Horizontal Flip", and when it needs to be flipped vertically,
select "Vertical Flip".With "Rotate Board" and "Mirroring", the setting for "Rotate Board" always comes
first before "Mirroring" and is applied.

Operation of the image

ASCII data conversion

64514-S1-10

6. After selecting the fiducial and bad mark and board rotation, click the [OK] button.
The dialog box appears, so click the [Yes] button.
7. The dialog box asking whether to save the converted board data appears. Click the [Yes] button.
8. The CAD data is finally converted to YGX format data.

5-9
 3. Creating a conversion font file
Some sample font files(conversion process files) are provided for converting ASCII data to YGX data. If data
conversion cannot be performed successfully by using the sample font files, you can create new font files to
utilize data created for various machine models. This allows you to perform data conversion very efficiently.
This section explains how to create a font file.

c CAUTION
To convert ASCII data to YGX format data, an optional software program is required. The ASCII to YGX conversion
function cannot be used without this software.

3.1 Create a new font file

To create a font file, you need to open the "Font File Editor" window.

1 Start the "ASCII Conversion".

2 Select "New Font File" from the FontFile menu.
1. When the CAD data selection screen is displayed, select CAD data and BOM data.
2. Press the [OK] button to start the font file editor.

Screen of the “New Font File”

5
ASCII data conversion

64515-S1-20

5-10
3 Set the data format.
1. Select the delimiter for CAD data or BOM data. Select the "Space" check box for CAD data or BOM
data separated by the space. Select the "Comma( , )" check box for CAD data or BOM data
separated by the comma.

Data format

n Continuous delimiters must be treated as one character

64516-S1-20
5
When blank characters such as a tab or a space are used to separate the data, they might be used
consecutively to equalize the digit number with the others. In that case, if you want to recognize

ASCII data conversion

them as one character, select "Continuous delimiters must be treated as one character" check box.
2. Select the quotation character.
When the parts name or pattern name in CAD data or BOM data includes the space(s), the string
might be enclosed in some quotation marks such as single(‘) or double(") quotation marks. In that
case, select the quotation marks here.

Reference
If the specified delimiter in "Delimiter" is in the string enclosed in the specified quotation marks, the character will not
be regarded as a delimiter.

3. Select the contents that are contained in CAD data or BOM data.

n Data include front and rear board information

Select the "Data include front and rear board information" check box when the coordinates data
both for the front and rear side of a board are mixed in the CAD data.

5-11
 4. Select the origin of the coordinates of CAD data and the machine. Specify the position on a board
that corresponds to the origin coordinates in CAD data. Specify the position of the origin set by the
mounter. The corner represented as "Bottom right corner" and "Bottom left corner" etc. is the corner
of a board. The standard hole (E.g. "Bottom right standard hole" and"Bottom left standard hole") is
the position where it moves 5mm inward from the board corner in both X and Y direction. Example:
Bottom left corner and Bottom left standard hole

Bottom left corner and Bottom left standard hole

5mm
Bottom left standard hole

Bottom left corner

5mm

63501-S1-10

Offset to the origin of the coordinates

5 Clicking "Auto" in "The Origin of the coordinates(CAD Data)" automatically determines the origin
64517-S1-10

position and offset value for X and Y so that all marks will be recognized and all components will be
ASCII data conversion

mounted on a board
5. Click the [Next] button after all settings are made.
Clicking the [Next] button displays the editor window for each item that has been selected in
"Contents" in order.

5-12
 Hereafter, we will explain the procedures supposing that all check boxes are selected in "Contents".

4 Set the method for acquiring the board information (board size).
Basic flow of retrieving each information.

Basic flow of retrieving each information

(1) Select the file containing the information.

(2) Specify the range to search for the line containing information.

(3) Set the conditions to select the line containing the information from the area.

(4) Settings to retrieve required information from each cell of the selected line.

63502-S1-10

Set the method for acquiring the board information

5
(1)

ASCII data conversion

(3)

(2)

(4)

64518-S1-10

5-13
 1. Firstly, click either "CAD" or "BOM" to select the source file that contains the board information.

Select the data

64519-S1-10

2. Select the unit for the board size (Length, Width and Height) in the "X,Y unit".

5 Select the unit for the board size

ASCII data conversion

64520-S1-10

5-14
Reference
Select [Keyword] button in "Start Line". Click the arrow, view the board information list to search for the board
information line from the CAD or BOM data efficiently. It allows quick checking of the board size.

Check the board size

Data window

64521-S1-10

3. Specify how the data is separated in the "Delimiter".

n Delimited by characters
Click the "Delimited by characters" check box when the board size information is separated by
specified characters such as commas and spaces.

n Fixed
In the following example, X coordinate is assigned in the column between the 10th and 15th, Y
coordinate is assigned in the column between the 18th and 23rd. Like this case, when each item has
the fixed room for its own data, select "Fixed" check box.
5
Fixed

ASCII data conversion

123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789
49 SMD 62.25 72.50 90.00 C2140
50 SMD 115.00 67.10 90.00 R16006
51 SMD 50.00 158.50 0.00 C216
52 SMD 51.75 80.00 90.00 R216
53 SMD 96.00 8.00 90.00 R21040
63503-S1-10

Reference
Even though the data is the fixed-width text file such as an example in "Fixed", the converted information can be
acquired by clicking the "Delimited by characters" under the following condition: an appropriate character such as a
space or tab is selected in the "Delimiter" in the "Data Format" and "Continuous delimiters must be treated as one
character" check box is selected. However, if a blank(s) is included in the strings as follows, the information could be
acquired improperly, therefore you need to select "Fixed".

Fixed

123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789

49 SMD 62.25 72.50 90.00 C2140
50 115.00 67.10 90.00 R16006
51 SMD 50.00 158.50 0.00 C216
52 SMD 51.75 80.00 90.00 R216
53 SMD 96.00 8.00 90.00 R21040
63504-S1-10

5-15
 4. Select an end Line in which the searching is completed to

n Line Number
Select the line in which the searching for the line containing the board information is completed to.

n Keyword
When there is a string that identifies the last line for the information(like "This is the end of the board
fiducial"), click "Keyword" to specify the desired string. Termination_of_the_Data represents "End Line".
When the first line is selected in the "Start Line" and "Termination_of_the Data" is selected in the "End
Line", the searching will be executed from the first line to the last one.
5. Select a start line.

n Line Number
Select the line in which the searching for the line containing the board information is started from.

n Keyword
When there is a string that identifies the start line for the information(like "if this string is found, the
later information is a board fiducial.), click "Keyword" to specify the desired string.
6. Specify which line is extracted between "Start Line" and "End Line" by setting extraction condition or
exclusion condition. First, find a feature to differentiate a line containing board information and other
lines. In this example, the line containing the character "PCB" is for board information. Like this case,
when there is a feature that identifies the line for board information, click "Extract" to set the
extraction condition. When there is an exception, click [Ignore] to set the exclusion condition.

Set the exclusion condition

5
ASCII data conversion

64522-S1-10

5-16
Hereafter, we will explain the procedures supposing that "Extract" is selected. The procedures to set the
exclusion condition are the same.
7. Specify the location of the feature that allows the differentiation between the line containing the
board information and the others. When "Delimited by characters" is selected in the "Delimiter", right
click on the cell which the distinctive string is entered to select any from Op1 to Op14.

Select from Op1 to Op14

64523-S1-10

In this example, the line containing the character "PCB" is for board [Link] right click on the
cell that "PCB" is entered to select the "Op1".

Reference
You do not need to use Op1~Op14 in order. Use one Op per feature. When "Fixed" is selected in the "Delimiter", drag

5
the mouse to select the range of the distinctive string, and right click on it to select any from "Selection range is made
Op1" to "Selection range is made Op14".

When “Fixed” is selected in the “Delimiter”

ASCII data conversion

64524-S1-10

5-17
 We will explain the procedures hereafter supposing that "Delimited by characters" is selected in the
"Delimiter". When "Fixed" is selected, the procedure may be slightly different.

8. Click the [Extraction] button "Extraction condition" window appears. (When "Ignore" is selected, click
the [Exclusion] button.)
9. Specify the distinctive character for the Op selected in Step 7 in the Extraction condition setting
window. When the condition is met, the line will be acquired for the board information.
10. In this example, if the characters specified for Op1 is "PCB", the line will be acquired as the line
containing the board information. So type [Op1="PCB"] in the first line.

Extraction

64525-S1-10

Reference
If [Op1="FD1"] is typed in the column "Extraction" of No.1 and [Op1="FD2"] is typed in the colmun "Extraction" of No.2, it
means that "Op1is either for FD1 or FD2", which is equivalent to typing [" Op1=FD1 || Op1=FD2 "] in the colmun
"Extraction" of No.1.

5
Please refer to " 4 . 1 How to express the logical formula" about allowable operators (such as "=" representing " equal "
and "!=" representing " not equal ") in the Extraction condition setting window.

n Examples of the conditional expression

Extract Meaning
ASCII data conversion

Op1="FD*" When Op1 begins with FD.

Op1!="FD*" When Op1does not begin with FD.

Op1 >= 50 &&Op1 < 60 When Op1 is 50 or more and less than 60.

Op1!="FD" || Op1 != "BD" When Op1 is other than FD, or when Op1 is other than BD.

The settings for "Extraction condition" ( or "Exclusion condition" ) are now completed.

5-18
 11. Next, specify each cell in the line that is regarded as the board size. Right click on the cell that is
acquired as board width, and select "Size X". Similarly, right click on the cell that is acquired as board
length, and select "Size Y". Right click on the cell that is acquired as board height, and select "Height".

Specify the place of the cell

64526-S1-10

12. The settings for acquiring method of board information are completed. Click the [Next] button.

5 Set the method for acquiring the block offset

1. Please refer to Step4 Set the method for acquiring the board information, 1to 10. about the settings
for the "X,Y unit", "Delimiter" and "Extraction condition" etc..
2. (When [Data include front and rear board information] check box is selected.) check box is
selected.) Set the condition of the rear side of the board. Click the [Condition of Rear Info] button.

[Condition of Rear Info] button

5

ASCII data conversion

64527-S1-10

Use Op1 to Op14 when setting the condition to extract the line for the rear side of the board.

Reference
The assigned OP for the "Extraction condition" or "Exclusion condition" can also be reassigned for the [Condition of
Rear Info.]

5-19
 3. In the extracted line, specify "X" in the cell of the X coordinate, "Y" in the cell of the Y coordinate and
"R" in the cell of the angle.
4. Select the "Block coordinate and angle type".

n Block coordinate type

For the coordinates in the line of block offset in CAD data are equivalent to the origin coordinates of
each block, click "Board origin to block origins". For the coordinates in the line of block offset in CAD
data are equivalent to the coordinates of the first mounting position of each block, click "First mount
position to other mount positions" For the coordinates in the line of block offset in CAD data are
equivalent to the coordinates of the block mark of each block, click "First block fiducial to other
block fiducials".

n Block angle type

When the angle in the line of block offset in CAD data is equivalent to the mounting angle of each
block, click "Block angle". When the angle of each block is opposite to the mounting angle of the first
block, (how much the block will be rotated from the first block position and mounted.) click "Angle of
the first mount part".

Example:
The board data with the first block with 90-degree rotation and the second block with 270-degree rotation.

The board data with the first block with 90-degree rotation and the second block with 270-degree rotation

First block Second block

A

63505-S1-10

5 When the information regarding the mounting angle for the first block(90 degrees) and that of the
second block(270 degrees) are included in CAD data, click "Block angle". When the CAD data has
the information that the first block is rotated 90 degrees and the second one is rotated 180
degrees,(180-degree rotation of the first block will be the state of the second block.), click "Angle of
the first mount part".
ASCII data conversion

5. Select the "angle".

Specify the unit of the angle if the angle is expressed as the value. When the angle is expressed with
a code, type the number of the codes next to First block Second block the "Number of code" and
type the corresponding relationship between the code and angle needs to be tabulated.

Angle

64528-S1-10

5-20
6. (When the [Data include front and rear board information] check box is selected.) Specify the
"Mirror". When the mounting coordinates for both front and rear side of the board are mixed in the
CAD data, the coordinate data of component mount position on the back of PCB is usually
described a layer using projection [Link] will explain how to reverse the data of the rear side of
the board at conversion.

n Y Mirror
Convert to the coordinates that are rotated in Y direction centered on X axis.

Y Mirror

P
P
63506-S1-10

n X Mirror
Convert to the coordinates that are rotated in X direction centered on Y axis.

X Mirror

P P
n None
Convert without any rotation.
63507-S1-10

ASCII data conversion

None

P P
63508-S1-10

5-21
 7. When skip data is included in block offset data, select Skip Condition.

Example of the skip data

1 T BLOCK -5.990 7.240 0.000 0

Skip data
2 T BLOCK -5.990 79.240 0.000 1

63511-S1-10

In such a case that, Block offset data is defined in CAD data.

Last value of the line is for skip information ("0" means Non-Skip, "1"means Skip) Please set the convert
condition like below.
Click the last column and select "Skip", and select Skip condition button. After that define skip
condition. (The block offset data matched to definition will convert to Skip Block.)

Select “Skip”

64552-S1-10

In this case, 1 means "Execute Skip", so set the condition "1" and select close button.

“Skip condition” dialog box

5
ASCII data conversion

64553-S1-10

How to set skip data conversion condition is same as another setting. For allowable operators refer to
"4.1 How to express the logical formula".

Reference
When you define the condition of Op for "Exclusion, Extraction", this Op setting is re-useful for Skip condition setting.

5-22
6 Set the method for acquiring the board fiducial
1. Regarding "X, Y unit", "Delimiter" and how to set the extraction condition to extract the line (or
exclusion condition), please refer to the procedures from 1 to 10 in "Step4. Set the method for
acquiring the board information". When the [Data include front and rear board information] check
box is selected, set the "Condition of Rear info" that shows which lines are for the rear side of the
board. Please refer to the procedure 2 in "Step5 Set the method for acquiring the block offset".
2. Specify the acquiring position of the fiducial coordinates in each cell of the line extracted PCB
fiducial line. If two sets of the coordinates information are included in the line, select "X1" and "Y1" in
the cell of the first coordinates information, and "X2" and "Y2" in the cell of the second coordinates
information. When only one set of the coordinates information is included in a line, select "X1" and
"Y1" in the cell.

Specify the acquiring position of the fiducial coordinates

64529-S1-20

3. Specify the acquiring position of the mark names When two sets of the coordinates information and

5
two mark names are included in a line, select "Lib" in the cell of the mark name corresponding to "X1"
and "Y1", and "Lib2" in the cell of the mark name corresponding to "X2" and "Y2". When two sets of the
coordinates information and only one mark name are included in a line, select "Lib" and "Lib2" in the
cell of the mark name. When only one set of the coordinates information is included in a line, select
"Lib" in the cell of the mark name.

ASCII data conversion

Specify the acquiring position of the mark names

64530-S1-20

4. Settings for acquiring the board fiducial are now completed. Press the [Next] button.

5-23
 7 Set the method for acquiring the block fiducial
1. Settings for acquiring the block fiducial are same as the "Step 6 Set the method for acquiring the
board fiducial". Please refer to it.
2. Click the [Next] button after the settings for acquiring the block fiducial.

8 Set the method for acquiring the local fiducial

1. Regarding "X, Y unit", "Delimiter" and how to set the extraction condition to extract the line (or
exclusion condition), please refer to the procedures from 1 to 10 in "Step4. Set the method for
acquiring the board information". When the [Data include front and rear board information] check
box is selected, set the "Condition of Rear info" that shows which lines are for the rear side of the
board. Please refer to the procedure 2 in "Step5 Set the method for acquiring the block offset".
2. Set the method for acquiring the X and Y coordinates and the mark name. Please refer to "Step 6 Set
the method for acquiring the board fiducial" as the settings are the same. Please refer to it. (However,
for local fiducial, X1~X4, Y1~Y4 and Lib~Lib4 exist as local fiducial can handle the four point fiducial,)
3. Set the link to the mount information Local fiducial should be linked to the mount information. If the
string that shows the link to the mount information in the line for local fiducial, right click on the cell
and select "Part".

Set the link to the mount information

5
ASCII data conversion

64531-S1-20

4. Settings for acquiring the local fiducial are now completed.

Press the [Next] button.

5-24
9 Set the method for acquiring the point fiducial
1. Settings for the point fiducial are same as the "Step 8 Set the method for acquiring the local fiducial".
Please refer to it. ( For local fiducial, there are 4 choices of each X(X1-X4), Y(Y1-Y4) and Lib(Lib-Lib4).
For the point fiducial, there are 2 choices of each X(X1-X2), Y(Y1-Y2) and Lib(Lib-Lib2))
2. Select either absolute coordinates or relative coordinates. When the coordinates of the point fiducial
in the CAD data or BOM data is the one from the PCB origin(absolute coordinates), select "Absolute".
When the coordinates of the point fiducial is the relative coordinates, which is from the specified
component position, select "Relateive".

Select either absolute coordinates or relative coordinates

5
64532-S1-10

ASCII data conversion

Reference
After the conversion process is completed, the coordinates of the point fiducial will be converted to the relative
coordinates from the linked component.

3. Settings for acquiring the point fiducial are now completed. Click the [Next] button.

0 Set the method for acquiring the PCB bad mark

1. Settings for acquiring the PCB bad mark are almost the same as the "Step 6 Set the method for
acquiring the PCB fiducial ". Please refer to it. (For PCB bad mark, there is only one set of
coordinates, therefore X2 or Y2 does not exist.)
2. Settings for acquiring the PCB bad mark are now [Link] the [Next] button.

q Set the method for acquiring the block bad mark

1. Settings for acquiring the block bad mark are almost the same as the "Step 6 Set the method for
acquiring the PCB fiducial ". Please refer to it. (For block bad mark, there is only one set of
coordinates, therefore X2 or Y2 does not exist.)
2. Settings for acquiring the block bad mark are now completed. Click the [Next] button.

w Set the method for acquiring the local bad mark

1. Settings for acquiring the local bad mark are almost the same as the "Step 8 Set the method for
acquiring the local fiducial ". Please refer to it. (For a local bad mark, there is only one set of
coordinates, therefore X2~X4 or Y2~Y4 etc. do not exist.
2. Settings for acquiring the local bad mark are now completed. Click the [Next] button.

5-25
 e Set the method for acquiring the mount information.
1. Regarding "X, Y unit", "Delimiter" and how to set the extraction condition to extract the line (or
exclusion condition), please refer to the procedures from 1 to 10 in "Step4. Set the method for
acquiring the board information". When the [Data include front and rear board information] check
box is selected, set the "Condition of Rear info" that shows which lines are for the rear side of the
board. Please refer to the procedure 2 in "Step5 Set the method for acquiring the block offset".
2. Specify the X and Y coordinates and mounting angle Select "X" in the cell of the X coordinate, "Y" in
the cell of the Y coordinate and "R" in the cell of the mounting angle.
3. Specify the feeder set number. When the feeder set number is included in the line for the mount
information, select the "FeederNo" in the cell.
4. Specify the pattern name. When the pattern name is included in the line for the mount information,
select the "Ref" in the cell.
5. Specify the parts name. When the parts name is included in the line for the mount information, select
the "Parts" in the cell.
6. Specify the database name of the parts database. When the database name of the parts database
is included in the line for the mount information select the "ShapeName" in the cell.
7. Specify the link to the local fiducial, point fiducial and local bad mark. Select "LocalFid" in the cell of
the string that shows the link to the local fiducial,"PointFid" in the cell of the string that shows the link
to the point fiducial, and"LocalBad" in the cell of the string that shows the link to the local bad mark..

Reference
When linking the local fiducial, point fiducial and local bad mark to the mount infromation, the pattern name in the
mount information may be used as the link in the local fiducial as follows.

When linking the local fiducial

[Local fiducial]

8, MK-LOCAL, 10.00, 10.00, MARU01, IC5001

Link to the mount information

5
9, MK-LOCAL, 25.00, 25.00, MARU01, IC5001

[Mount information]

804 , SMD , 17.50 , 37.50 , 270.00 , IC4001

Pattern name
ASCII data conversion

805 , SMD , 17.50 , 17.50 , 270.00 , IC5001

806 , SMD , 117.00 , 40.00 , 0.00 , CN1
63509-S1-10

In such case, select "LocalFid" in the cell specified as the pattern name.

Select “LocalFid”

64533-S1-10

5-26
 8. Set the angel and the rotation direction Specify the unit of the angle if the angle is expressed as the
value. When the angle is expressed with a code, type the number of the codes next to the "Number
of code" and the corresponding relationship between the code and angle needs to be tabulated.

Set the angel and the rotation direction

64534-S1-10

9. When the original data have skip information, set the skip data conversion [Link] to set,
please refer the No.7 chapter of [STEP5: Block offset].
10. Settings for acquiring the mount infromation are now completed. Click the [Next] button.

r Set the method for acquiring the "feeder set information".

1. Regarding "X, Y unit", "Delimiter" and how to set the extraction condition to extract the line (or
exclusion condition), please refer to the procedures from 1 to 10 in "Step4. Set the method for
acquiring the board information". When the [Data include front and rear board information] check
box is selected, set the "Condition of Rear info" that shows which lines are for the rear side of the
board. Please refer to the procedure 2 in "Step5 Set the method for acquiring the block offset".
(However, the mount information is not included in the feeder set information, therefore you do not
need to set the "X, Y unit".)
2. Specify the feeder set number When the feeder set number is included in the line for the feeder set
arrangement, select the "FeederNo" in the cell.
3. Specify the parts name When the parts name is included in the line for the feeder set arrangement,
select the "Parts" in the cell.
4. Specify the database name of the parts database When the database name of the parts database
is included in the line for the feeder arrangement, select "Lib" in the cell.

5
5. Settings for the "feeder set information" are now completed. Click the [Next] button.

t Set the method for acquiring the BOM data

1. Regarding "X, Y unit", "Delimiter" and how to set the extraction condition to extract the line (or
exclusion condition), please refer to the procedures from 1 to 10 in "Step4. Set the method for
acquiring the board information". When the [Data include front and rear board information] check

ASCII data conversion

box is selected, set the "Condition of Rear info" that shows which lines are for the rear side of the
board. Please refer to the procedure 2 in "Step5 Set the method for acquiring the block offset"
2. Specify the parts name Select the "Parts" in the cell of the parts name of the line for BOM data.
3. Specify the parts reference Select the "Ref Start" in the cell of the parts reference of the line for BOM
data. When you specify the location of the parts reference, the""Input of the number of Ref item con
…" dialog box appears. Select "Input of the number of items " when parts reference is constant. For
other case, select "To the end". If several references exist in one column, select “Group several Ref in
1 column (free serial number)”.
4. Specify the character that omits the consecutive Refs. If a lot of parts reference corresponding to
the parts name exist and their number is consecutive like from C1000 to C1100, "C1000 – 1100" could
be displayed in order to indicate the number is from C1000 to C1100. In such case, specify the "-
hyphen" as the character that omits the consecutive Refs. When the character other than the
displayed character in the window(slash, hyphen, underscore or tilde) is used as an omitting
character, select the "Other" check box. Click the [Ref Continues character] button to display the
"Ref Continues character" dialog box. Type the omitting character and click the [Close] button.
5. Settings for acquiring the BOM data are now completed. Clicking the [OK] button displays the dialog
box to save the file. When you type a file name and click the [Save] button, the acquiring conditions
that have been created are stored in a font file.

5-27
 y Make sure that the created font file can be used at conversion
1. In the main window select "Data selection" from the “Convert” menu. "CAD data selection" dialog
box appears.
2. After selecting the CAD data, BOM data and the created font file, click the [OK] button.
3. Going back to the main window, select the data to be checked from the list of the CAD data, BOM
data and the font file. Then select "Preview" from the “Convert” menu.
4. The preview window appears. Check to see that the each specified item has the correct string..

n The tabs other than the "Mounting coordinate"

The object lines to be acquired are displayed on a white background.
The lines to be acquired when the opposite side is selected in the "Convert" main window (for
example the lines for the rear side when the convert window is displayed) are displayed on a light
blue background. The lines other than the object lines to be acquired are displayed on a yellow
background. In addition, the characters for Op of lines that match the "Extraction condition" or
"Exclusion condition" are displayed in blue and the characters for Op of the lines that match
"Conditions of Rear Info" are displayed in red.

n Mounting coordinate tab

In the Mounting coordinate tab, it includes the display features about BOM data besides the
features described above. For the conversion with using the BOM data, the searching for the parts
reference, which is included in the CAD data, in the BOM data is executed. If the parts reference is
found, the database name of the parts will be acquired and displayed in the column "Parts" in the
mounting coordinate tab of the preview window.

Preview window

5
ASCII data conversion

64535-S1-10

5-28
When several data are selected in the main window, switching the "Data Number" in the preview window
displays the other preview window.

Open the preview window

64536-S1-10

5. If the each specified item does not have the correct strings, click the [Editor] button to edit the font
file, and click the [OK] button to save the changes. The changes made on the font file will be

5
applied after saving the font file. The preview window appears again.
6. Make sure that the each specified item has the correct string. Click the [Close] button to go back to
the main window. Settings for creating a new font file are now completed.

ASCII data conversion

5-29
 3.2 Editing a font file

1 Start the ASCII data conversion.

2 Select "Data selection" from the “Convert” menu.
The "CAD data selection" dialog box appears.

3 Select CAD data, BOM data and the font file to be edited.
When the BOM data does not need to be used, please leave the filed blank. For the font file that has
been created with using both CAD data and BOM data, you also need both of them at editing.

4 Click the "Edit Font File" icon on the tool bar.

The "Font File Editor" dialog box appears.

“Revise font file” button

5
ASCII data conversion

64537-S1-10

5 Edit the font file.

After editing the font file, click the [OK] button to save it. click the [Cancel] button for not saving the
font file.

Settings for editing a font file are now completed.

5-30
3.3 Delete / copy a font file and change the font file name.
Select "Delete" from the FontFile menu to delete the font file. The "Delete" dialog box appears. Select the font
file to be deleted and click the [Execute] button.

Delete a font file

64538-S1-10

Select "Copy" from the FontFile menu to copy the font file. The "Copy" dialog box appears. Select the font file
to be copied and click the [Execute] button.
Select "Rename" from the FontFile menu to change the font file name. The "Rename" dialog box appears. Select

5
the font file to be renamed and click the [Execute] button.

ASCII data conversion

5-31
 3.4 Import of font file.

1 Select the menu of FontFile(T) -> Import(I).

2 Select Add button and open file select dialog.
Screen of “Import font file”

64554-S1-10

3 Select Open button, the import file list will be displayed.

4 Select Import button, the import operation will be start.

5 Start of Import
ASCII data conversion

64555-S1-10

5-32
Reference
During import operation, the message like below will be displayed.

Message during import operation

64556-S1-10

When same error happened, Select "YES", import operation will be continued, same message is
displayed again.
Select "No", import operation will be continued, and no same message is displayed.
Select "Cancel", import operation is aborted.

ASCII data conversion

5-33
 4. Miscellaneous
4.1 How to express the logical formula.
• "Exclusion condition", "Extraction condition" and "Condition of Rear Info","Skip Condition" are specified by
"formula".
• The "formula" consists of "operator", "constant", "string" and "identifier".
• If the "formula" is expressed in several lines, each line is dealt with as OR; "||".
• The formula is judged as been corresponded if the value turns other than 0.
n Operator
Applicable operators are as follows.

Operator Meaning Remarks

== If the condition is true, then "1" is returned, otherwise "0" is returned.

Match The result may differ depending on the comparison made by string or
=
numerical value.
!=
Mismatch Numerical
String order
<> Smaller value order
1 "1"
>= Or more 2 "10"
Bigger
10 "2"

> More than For the comparison as a string, the result also defers if the wild card(s)
is included in a string.

Wild card Relation String Status

<= Or less
"A?" > "A" Lack of string

= "AA" Matched with string

< Less than
< "AAA" Excess of string

5 + Addition Unary plus

(Addition)
For an operation as a numerical value, the result turns the added value.
For an operation as a string, the result turns the connected one.
(Unary plus)
String is converted to either integer or decimal number.
ASCII data conversion

The sign of the value will not change.

(Subtraction)
String is converted to either integer or decimal number.
Subtraction The result turns the subtracted numerical value.
-
Unary minus (Unary minus)
String is converted to either integer or decimal number.
The sign of the value will change.
String is converted to either integer or decimal number.
∗ Multiplication
The result turns the multiplied numerical value.
String is converted to either integer or decimal number.
/ Division The result turns the divided numerical value.
For the division by 0, the result turns 0.
String and decimal number are converted to integer number.
% Surplus The result turns the remain after the division.
For the division by 0, the result turns 0.
String and decimal number are converted to integer number.
!
Negation For other than 0, the result turns 0.
~
For 0, the result turns 1.
String and decimal number are converted to integer number.
Logical AND by bit operation.

&& Item 1 Item 2 Value

Logical AND
& 0 0 0

0 1 0

1 1 1

5-34
 Operator Meaning Remarks

String and decimal number are converted to integer number.

Logical OR by bit operation.

Item 1 Item 2 Value

||
Logical OR 0 0 0
|
0 1 1

1 0 1

1 1 1

String and decimal number are converted to integer number.

Exclusive logical OR by bit operation.

Item 1 Item 2 Value

^ Exclusive logical OR 0 0 0

0 1 1

1 0 1

1 1 0

If the item1 is a string or decimal number, they are converted to integer

number.
?: Ternary operation
If the item1 is other than 0, the result turns the value of item2.
If the item1 is 0, the result turns the value of item3.

() Parenthesis The operation within parentheses is prioritized.

Operator priority
Operator is interpreted in higher priority order as

Higher Lower

! ∗ + >= == && ^ || ?

5
~ / - > = & |
()
+ % <= !=

- < <>

If operators whose priority is the same level are next to, the one in the left side will be interpreted first.

ASCII data conversion

<Example>
8/3∗2 -> 4
8∗2/3 -> 5

5-35
 Constant
Constant is classified into three typies below.

Constant Type

"abc" String

123 Integer number

4.56 Decimal number

c CAUTION
1. In constant value and the calculated result, the type of constant is prioritized.
2. When there is no difference between the constant value and the calculated result, the type of Item1 is prioritized.
3. Operation is performed with the value automatically converted to the prioritized type.
4. Wild card can be used in a string. ("∗" or "?" is applicable.)
5. Capital letters and lowercase letters are distinguished in a string.( "ABC" and "abc" are interpreted as another
string.)

<Example>
Type conversion is performed as follows.

String Integer number Decimal number

"AAA" 0 0

"100" 100 100.0

"1.23" 1 1.23

"10" 10 10.0

"8A" 8 8.0

5 Integer number

0
Decimal number

0.0
String

"0"

10 10.0 "10"
ASCII data conversion

100 100.0 "100"

Decimal number String Integer number

0.0 "0.000000" 0

10.0 "10.000000" 10

100.0 "100.000000" 100

1.23 "1.230000" 1

<Example> Method to perform the forceful type conversion. (by the rule that gives the priority to the type of item1.)
" "+100 -> "100"(string)
0+"1.23" -> 1(integer number)
0.0+"1.23" -> 1.23(decimal number)

<Example> Connection and addition of the string

1+2+3 -> 3+3 -> 6(integer number)
"1"+2+3 -> "12"+3 -> 15(integer number)
1+"2"+3 -> 3+3 -> 6(integer number)
1+2+"3" -> 3+"3" -> "33"(string)
∗ The priority of the calculated result is lower than that of the constant, therefore the type of item2 is prioritized in the
second operation.

5-36
Chapter 6 Database management

Contents

1. Unified database management function 6-1

1.1 Outline of operation 6-1
1.2 Feature of “Unified database management” 6-2
1.2.1 Commonness of database 6-2
1.2.2 Management of database 6-3
1.3 Preparation for “Unified database management” 6-4
1.4 Setting 6-5
1.4.1 Setting of Database Folder 6-5
1.4.2 Setting of [Link] “Use Database” 6-7
1.5 Database collection 6-8
1.5.1 Method of using Database Matching (Database Write from Board) 6-10
1.5.2 Method of using Parts Database Editor 6-12
1.6 Limitations 6-14

2. “Database Synchronize mode” function 6-15

2.1 Introduction 6-15
2.2 Outline of operation 6-16
2.3 Preparation of database 6-20
2.4 Setting 6-23
2.4.1 YG Series or subsequent machine 6-23
2.4.2 Xg Series 6-24
2.4.3 [Link] 6-25
2.4.4 YRS 6-26
2.5 Detailed explanation of operation 6-27
2.5.1 YG Series or subsequent machine 6-27
2.5.2 Xg Series 6-30
2.5.3 [Link] 6-32
2.6 Limitations 6-34
2.6.1 Limitations when beginning to operate 6-34
2.6.2 Other limitations 6-34

3. Unified database management support checklist 6-35

3.1 Introduction 6-35
3.2 Unified database management support checklist 6-36
3.2.1 Database backup 6-36
3.2.2 The path for Unified database management 6-36
3.2.3 Database preparation 6-36
3.2.4 Necessity judgment of “Database Synchronize mode function” 6-36
3.2.5 Database Synchronize mode function is necessary 6-37
3.2.6 Database Synchronize mode function is unnecessary 6-39

4. Series Database 6-40

4.1 Outline of functions 6-40
4.2 Detailed explanation of operation 6-40
4.3 Settings 6-41
4.3.1 Setting method 6-41
4.3.2 Database allocation to each machine 6-42
4.4 Limitations 6-43

5. Shape Database 6-44

5.1 Outline of function 6-44
5.2 To use Shape Database 6-45
5.3 Details of function 6-46
5.3.1 Database Matching by Shape Name / Database Matching from Board by Shape Name 6-48
5.3.2 Set from DATABASE automatically after Board data is read – Referring Parts Shape List 6-48
5.3.3 Making of “Parts / Shape List” 6-48
5.4 Transition Tool of Shape Database 6-49
5.4.1 Outline of function 6-49
5.4.2 To use this function 6-50
5.4.3 Flow of processing and composition of each dialog 6-51
5.5 Registration function of “Parts / Shape List” 6-55
5.5.1 Outline of function 6-55
5.5.2 To use this function 6-55
5.5.3 Outline of operation 6-55
5.5.4 The flow of processing and the composition of each dialog 6-61
5.5.5 New registration 6-65
5.6 Limitations 6-69

6. Additional parameter handling on database 6-70

6.1 Outline of function 6-70
6.2 Details of operation 6-70
6.2.1 Pick Pos. Parameters 6-70
6.2.2 Tray Parameters 6-70
6.2.3 Comment 6-70
6.2.4 Target command 6-71
6.3 Settings 6-72
6.4 Moving existing data 6-73
6.4.1 Reason to prepare to introduce 6-73
6.4.2 How to prepare to introduce 6-74
6.5 Limitations 6-74

7. Parts Database Duplicate Check 6-75

7.1 Outline of function 6-75
7.2 Settings 6-75
7.3 How to setup 6-76
7.3.1 Duplicate Data Check Function 6-76
7.3.2 Error Message and its Counter Measures 6-76
7.4 Limitations 6-80
1. Unified database management function
The preparation for the unified management of database use is described in detail.
Refer to “3.2 Unified database management support checklist” in this chapter when introducing this function,
and prepare for introduction according to the instructions.

1.1 Outline of operation

“Unified database management” means that Xg/YG Series or subsequent machine and offline software ([Link])
refer to one database. Each machine uses the network and it is recommended to refer to the database of
[Link].

Unified database management

YV100Xg YG100 YG200

[Link]

D_Base D_Base D_Base

Reference
D_Base

63601-S1-00

Usually (Default), machine and [Link] refer to each default database folder.

Default Setting

YV100Xg YG100 YG200 [Link]

Reference Reference Reference Reference

6
Database management
D_Base D_Base D_Base D_Base

63602-S1-00

Parts database, mark database, and Inspection database can be managed in “Unified database management”.
n Database that can be managed

Database Support

Parts database Yes

Mark database Yes

Inspection database Yes

6-1
 1.2 Feature of “Unified database management”
“Unified database management” has some points that are more effective than the default
operation.

1.2.1 Commonness of database

To share and to refer to one database with machine and [Link], it excels in commonness of database in
“Unified database management”.
Because machine and [Link] refer to each database, it is not possible to share in default setting.

Commonness of database in “Unified database management”

YV100Xg YG100 YG200

[Link]

D_Base D_Base D_Base

D_Base
Set from Database

Copy back to Database

63603-S1-00

The data that copy back from YV100Xg to database can be set from database to YG200.

Commonness of database in “Default setting”

YV100Xg YG100 YG200 [Link]

6 Copy back to
Database

D_Base D_Base D_Base D_Base

Database management

Set from Database

63604-S1-00

The data that copy back from YV100Xg to database cannot be set from database to YG200.

6-2
1.2.2 Management of database
To share and to refer to one database with machine and [Link], it excels in management of database in
“Unified database management”.
Because machine and [Link] refers to each database, management of database is not good in default setting.

Management of database in “Unified database management”

YV100Xg YG100 YG200 [Link]

D_Base D_Base D_Base D_Base

Back up

For [Link]

63605-S1-00

It is necessary to back up database only to [Link].

Management of database in “Default setting”

YV100Xg YG100 YG200 [Link]

D_Base D_Base D_Base D_Base

Back up Back up Back up Back up

6
Database management
For YV100Xg For YG100 For YG200 For [Link]

63606-S1-00

It is necessary to back up database to machine and [Link].

n Feature of operation

Operation Commonness Management

Unified database management Good Good

Default setting Not Good Not Good

6-3
 1.3 Preparation for “Unified database management”
Before starting “Unified database management”, it is necessary to bring the data that exists in Board data and
another database data together in one.
When Xg Series machine exists together with YG Series or subsequent machine, it is necessary to activate the
Database Synchronize mode. This is because the database format supported by Xg Series and that by YG Series
or subsequent machine are different.
For database synchronization refer to “2. Database Synchronize mode function” in this chapter.
n Necessity of Database Synchronize mode function

Series combination Database Synchronize mode function

Only Xg Series Unnecessary

Only YG Series and subsequent machines Unnecessary

Xg Series and YG Series or subsequent

Necessary
machines exist together
* Only YG200 can be used as either “Xg Series” or “YG Series or subsequent machine”.
(FD/MD and FDX/MDX are possible by the selection.)

It is necessary for “Unified database management” that the network of managed machines and [Link] is built
by Ethernet and the network path can refer.

Possible

LAN (Reference)

YV100Xg YV100Xg YG200 [Link]

Possible

D_Base D_Base D_Base D_Base

63616-S1-00

The database can be made the same about dos machine by database data communication, but it is not “Unified
database management” because the database exists in each machine.

6 Impossible

LAN (Reference)

YV100Xg YV100Xg YG200 [Link]

Database management

Impossible

D_Base D_Base D_Base D_Base

RS232C (Copy)
63617-S1-00

* It is not necessary to set up according to this document if database set or write is executed through [Link]
only without referring to the database from the machine to execute database set or write.

There are FD/MD format (for Xg Series or previous machine) and FDX/MDX format (for YG Series or subsequent
machine) in the database. It is necessary to activate Database Synchronize mode function in order to conduct
“Unified database management” when Xg Series machine exists together with YG Series or subsequent
machine. Please execute the function setting referring to “3. Database Synchronize mode function” after
completing the preparation for “Unified database management” in this document.

6-4
1.4 Setting
“Unified database management” is enabled by matching the referenced database of machines and [Link].
You must set up the <Setting of [Link] “Use Database”> as setting varies depending on combinations of
machines for “Unified database management”. The following is a precaution for using “Unified database
management”.
1. It is necessary that the network of managed machines and [Link] is built by Ethernet, and the network path can refer.
2. The common setting of network is needed the reference folder.
3. The OS of referring PC limits the number of possible simultaneous accesses users.

OS The number of possible simultaneous accesses users

Windows XP Home 5

Windows2000 Professional

Windows XP Professional 10

Windows Vista

1.4.1 Setting of Database Folder

We recommend that you set the database folder of [Link] as file sharing configuration and assign it as the
database folder referred to by machines and [Link].

Setting of Database Folder

YV100Xg_1 YV100Xg_2 YV88Xg [Link]

Reference Reference Reference Reference

D_Base D_Base D_Base D_Base

63618-S1-00

[Link]
“Option Setting” – “Database” tab
6
Database management

64603-S1-00

Machines
“Setup” – “Database” – “Database Utility” screen

64604-S1-10

6-5
 It is also possible to put the database file on an arbitrary folder so that [Link] and machines refer to it. In that
case, specify the database folder for [Link] and machines.

Setting where [Link] and machines refer to the same database

[Link] YV100Xg_1 YV100Xg_2 YV88Xg Server

Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference

D_Base D_Base D_Base D_Base D_Base

63619-S1-00

6
Database management

6-6
1.4.2 Setting of [Link] “Use Database”
The setting of “Unified database management” is different according to the combination of the machines.

The combination of the machines Setting

Xg Series Machine only FD/MD

YG Series or subsequent machine only FDX/MDX

Xg Series machine exists together with YG Series or

FDX/MDX (with saving FD/MD)
subsequent machine
*The YG200/YG200L can be used as either “Xg series” or “YG series or subsequent machine”.
(FD/MD or FDX/MDX can be selected with setting)

Xg Series Machine only

Select “FD/MD”

64605-S1-00

YG Series or subsequent machine only

Select “FDX/MDX”

64606-S1-00

Xg Series machine exists together with YG Series or subsequent machine

Select “FDX/MDX (with saving FD/MD)” 6
Database management

64607-S1-00

It is necessary to activate the Database Synchronize mode function in order to conduct the “Unified database
management” when Xg Series machine exists together with YG Series or subsequent machine. For database
synchronization refer to "2. Database Synchronize mode function" in this chapter.

6-7
 1.5 Database collection
Before starting “Unified database management”, it is necessary to bring the data that exists in Board data and
another database data together in one.
Outline of bringing the data together

Outline of bringing the data together

Outline of bringing the data together

Before data After data

Database A Database A
Database A
Parts A Parts A
Parts D
Parts D Parts D
Parts F
Reference Parts F Parts F
Database

Parts A
Database B Database B Parts B Database B
Parts E Parts B Parts C Parts B
Parts F Parts E Parts D Parts E
Parts F Parts E Parts F
Parts F
Reference

Database C Reference Database C

Parts C Parts C
Parts E Parts E
Parts F Parts F

Parts A/B/C : Master data exists in Board data. All Parts : Master data exists in Database.
Parts D/E : Master data exists in Database.
Parts F : Master data exists in two or more Database.

63620-S1-00

There are the following two methods of bringing the data together.
1. Method of using Database Matching (Database Write from Board)
Parts data is updated to the database by the key of the parts name or partscomment in the board data.
Refer to “1.5.1 Method of using Database Matching (Database Write from Board)” for details.
2. Method of using Parts Database Editor
You open two or more database by Parts Database Editor, and you execute the Copy & Paste of the Parts Data.

6
In this case you must execute Database Matching (Database Set to Board) because the relation of Parts data and
Database is necessary.
Refer to “1.5.2 Method of using Parts Database Editor” for details.
Database management

6-8
It explains as an example of outline of bringing the data together.

Board A Board B Board C Db A Db B

Parts A M

Parts B M

Parts C M

Parts D R M

Parts E R R M

Parts F U U U U U

(M: Master Parts Data / R: Refer to Database / U: Master Data is unknown)

Parts A/B/C exists in Board data.

Parts D/E exists in Database.
Parts F exists in two Database and the Master data is unknown.

The method is selected by these cases.

· The case of Parts A/B/C
Please select the Method of using Database Matching (Database Write from Board).
· The case of Parts D/E
Please select the Method of using Parts Database Editor.
· The case of Parts F
Please check which the Master data in two database.
And select the Method of using Database Matching (Database Write from Board).
· The case of existing Parts A/B/C, Parts D/E and Parts F together
Please select the Method of using Database Matching (Database Write from Board).

Please select a method suitable by the condition.

6
Database management

6-9
 1.5.1 Method of using Database Matching (Database Write from Board)
Parts data is updated to the database by the key of the parts name or parts comment in the board data.
Therefore, it is necessary that the Parts data of the Board data be made the latest.
Moreover, the data overwrites in Parts data executed later if there is part data on the same name. And the data
of the same name is not registered to the database.
The figure below shows the situation when Database Matching (Database Write from Board) is repeatedly
executed.

Process of parts information in parts database

Board Data for Matching Parts Database Overwritten data

Board data A Database

Parts A Parts D
Matching
Parts D Parts F
Parts F
Parts D
Parts F

Board data B Database

Parts B Parts D
Parts E Matching Parts F
Parts F Parts A

Parts F

Board data C Database

Parts C Parts D
Parts E Matching Parts F
Parts F Parts A
Parts B
Parts E

Parts F

6
Parts E

Database
Parts D
* About two or more Board data with Parts F
data of the same name, the data
Database management

Parts A
overwrites in Parts data executed
later if there is part data on the same Parts B
name. And the data of the same name is
not registerd to the database. Parts E
Parts C

63621-S1-00

6-10
1 Open the Board data
Please open the Board data with Parts data to register from Board Explorer.

Board data

64608-S1-00

2 Execute Database Matching (Database Write from Board)

Please select the menu.
[Tool] -> [Database Support] -> [Database Matching] -> [Database Write from Board]

Execute Database Matching

64609-S1-00

Please check the check box of “Write new parts to the database”, and push [OK] button.

Check the check box of “Write new parts to the DATABASE”

6
Database management

64610-S1-00

The database is added by this work since the 1001st. When there is part data of the same name in database,
the data dose not add to database.

3 Repeat Step1 and Step2

Please open the Board data, and repeatedly execute Database Matching (Database Write from Board).
Please execute it for all Board data containing information to be registered.

Reference
Database Matching (Database Write from Board) can be performed efficiently using the database utility function.
Refer to the separate “Factory Tools Common Function” manual for details.

6-11
 1.5.2 Method of using Parts Database Editor

1 Start the Parts Database Editor

Select “Parts Database Editor” from the “File” menu of the Board Editor.

Start the Parts Database Editor

64611-S1-00

2 Open the Database file that want to bring the data together
Please select and open the Database file that want to bring the data together.
It is necessary to start by "Open Database on New editor" to start two or more Database
Editor since the second.
*The Database file name is "Database" only.
Please open the Database file by "Open Database on New editor" since the second.

Open the Database file that want to bring the data together

6
Please select the Database folder.
Database management

Please select the Database file type.

64612-S1-00

6-12
3 Bringing the data together.
Shortfall data is put on the original Database by line selection copy & paste.
Please save the Database file by FDX/MDX format when either is the data of FDX/MDX format. The
expanded parameter is initialized if it saves it by FD/MD format.

Bringing the data together

To

Paste From

Copy

64613-S1-00

4 Database Matching
You must execute Database Matching (Database Set to Board) because the relation of Parts data and
Database is necessary.
Database Matching sets a new Database number in the Board data.
However, it is necessary to relate parts to the database in part name*.
Create a relation by executing the matching procedure when there is no relation.
* Parts database matching can be conducted not only with parts name but also with parts comment.
“Relation” means that names correspond or that names are related with shape table (refer to “5.
Database by types” in this chapter).

Reference
Database Matching can be performed efficiently using the database utility function.
Refer to the separate "Factory Tools Common Function" manual for details on the database utility function.

6
Database management

6-13
 1.6 Limitations
· In “Unified database management”, PC where the referring database exists is started and the network reference should
be possible.
· When there is no [Link] “Unified database management” is possible, but it is not recommended because bringing the
data together is difficult.
· In Database Matching the data overwrites in Parts data executed later if there is part data on the same name. And the
data of the same name is not registered to the database.
· Refer to “4. Database by models” in this chapter to use the management function for database by models of [Link].
· Refer to “5. Database by types” in this chapter to use the management function for database by types of [Link].
· The Database Synchronize mode function should be activated to conduct “Unified database management” when Xg
Series machine exists together with YG Series or subsequent machine. Refer to “2. Database Synchronize mode
function” in this chapter.

6
Database management

6-14
2. “Database Synchronize mode” function
2.1 Introduction
Details of the “Database Synchronize mode” are described.
Refer to “3.2 Unified database management support checklist” in this chapter when introducing this function,
and prepare for introduction according to the instructions.
The target model and the software version of these specifications are as follows.
n Target model and software version of this function

Item name Target Note

YS Series
YG Series
Target model
Xg Series
Offline soft([Link]/YRS)
YS Series (all versions)
YG Series V2.41R0.220
Software version Xg Series V1.20R0.050
[Link] (all versions)
YRS V2.03R0.010 or later

6
Database management

6-15
 2.2 Outline of operation
The Database Synchronize mode is used to solve the following problem.
n Problem
The Xg machine (parts database FD operation) and the YG Series or subsequent machine (parts database FDX operation)
use different types of parts database file. Therefore, there are the following problems when unifying the management of
the parts database if an Xg Series machine exists together with a YG Series or subsequent machine.
1. When the Xg machine updates the database FD (Copy back to database), the modified content is not reflected in the
database FDX that the YG Series or subsequent machine uses.

Problem in a condition where Xg Series machine exists together with YG Series or subsequent machine

YV100Xg YG100 YG200

[Link]

D_Base D_Base D_Base

D_Base

Set from Database

Parts Parts
Database Database
FD FDX

Copy back to Database

63623-S1-00

2. When the YG series or subsequent machine updates the database FDX (Copy back to database), the modified content
is not reflected in the database FD that the Xg machine uses.

Problem during update of the database FDX

YV100Xg YG100 YG200

6
[Link]
Database management

D_Base D_Base D_Base

D_Base

Copy back to Database

Parts Parts
Database Database
FD FDX

Set from Database

63624-S1-00

6-16
n After using the function
The database FDX and the database FD synchronize by using “Database Synchronize mode” function. And the problem
of previously describing is solved.
1. Both the database FDX and the database FD are set to the YG Series or subsequent machine. When the database FD is
modified through “Copy back to Database” from Xg machine, the modified content is reflected in the YG Series or
subsequent machine.

Solution of problem 1

YV100Xg YG100 YG200

[Link]

D_Base D_Base D_Base

D_Base

Set from Database

Parts Parts
Database Database
FD FDX

Copy back to Database

63625-S1-00

2. The database FDX and the database FD are written from the YG Series or subsequent machine. The content of database
modified through “Copy back to Database” from the YG Series or subsequent machine is thus set to the Xg machine.

Solution of problem 2

YV100Xg YG100 YG200

[Link]

D_Base D_Base D_Base

6
D_Base Database management
Copy back to Database
Parts Parts
Database Database
FD FDX

Set from Database

63626-S1-00

6-17
 The format of the database supported by each machine series is different.
“Database Synchronize mode function” is the function to synchronize and to use these different databases.
n Database format about each series
FDX/MDX FD/MD

II Series

X Series

Xg Series Not Use Use

YVOSX

YGOSV1

YG200/YG200L* Use use

YHP-2
YG Series
Use Not Use
(except YG200/YG200L)
YS Series

[Link] Use Use

* YG200/YG200L can be used for either FD or FDX.

Image of Database Synchronize mode

[Link] (Reference ahead)

D_Base

Parts Synchro. Parts

Database Database
FD FDX

63607-S1-00

6
Database management

6-18
The state that has synchronized is as shown in the table below.
n The state that has synchronized, or not synchronized
Database has synchronized
Database FD Database FDX

No. Parts Name Comment Feeder Type Alignment Type No. Parts Name Comment Feeder Type Alignment Type

1000 Parts1000 1000 8mmTape Std. Chip 1000 Parts1000 1000 8mmTape Std. Chip

1001 Parts1001 1001 16mmEmboss SOP 1001 Parts1001 1001 16mmEmboss SOP

1002 Parts1001 1002 32mmEmboss SOP 1002 Parts1001 1002 32mmEmboss SOP

Database has not synchronized (There is no data in No.1001 of FDX. )

Database FD Database FDX

No. Parts Name Comment Feeder Type Alignment Type No. Parts Name Comment Feeder Type Alignment Type

1000 Parts1000 1000 8mmTape Std. Chip 1000 Parts1000 1000 8mmTape Std. Chip

*1001 Parts1001 1001 16mmEmboss SOP *1001

1002 Parts1001 1002 32mmEmboss SOP 1002 Parts1001 1002 32mmEmboss SOP

Database has not synchronized (The content of No.1001 is different in FD and FDX. )
Database FD Database FDX

No. Parts Name Comment Feeder Type Alignment Type No. Parts Name Comment Feeder Type Alignment Type

1000 Parts1000 1000 8mmTape Std. Chip 1000 Parts1000 1000 8mmTape Std. Chip

*1001 Parts1001 1001 16mmEmboss SOP *1001 Parts5555 5555 8mmEmboss Std. Chip

1002 Parts1001 1002 32mmEmboss SOP 1002 Parts1001 1002 32mmEmboss SOP

• The parts number with an asterisk (*) indicates that the parts data is not synchronized. The parts number without an asterisk (*)
indicates that the parts data is synchronized.

The “Database Synchronize mode function” is available for parts database of Xg Series, YG Series or
subsequent machine, and [Link].
n Support model

Model Series Support

Before X Series No

Machine Xg Series Yes

YG Series or subsequent machine Yes

6
Before YGOSV1 No

Offline Soft YGOSV2

[Link] Yes
Database management
n Support database

Database Support

Parts database Yes

Mark database No

Inspection database No

6-19
 2.3 Preparation of database
The database FD and The database FDX should be the same content (a Value of Basic, a record num.).
Only the database FD or the database FDX might exist according to current Database Use.
Therefore, please execute the confirmation and the preparation of Database, and begin operating.

Preparation of database

FD synchronizes with FDX

[Link]

Use only the database FD Use only the database FDX

[Link] [Link]
D_Base

Parts Parts
Database Database
FD FDX

D_Base D_Base

Parts Parts Parts Parts

Database Database Database Database
FD FDX FD FDX

63627-S1-00

c Caution
The mark database is not supported. The database MDX is always used.
Mark Database Write from the machine cannot be executed though data is saved in the database MD.

1. Let's execute the backup of the Database.

6
Refer to “n [Back Up], [Restore] (Backup and Restore parts database)” in the section “2.5.3 [Link]” for backup
procedures.

2. The Database is copied to the other according to current Database Use.

n NOTE
Database management

The Mark Database is not supported for “Database Synchronize mode”. But it is necessary to copy Mark Database.

FD/MD had been selected

It is necessary to copy the content of Database FD to Database FDX.
It is necessary to copy the content of Database MD to Database MDX.
FDX/MDX had been selected
It is necessary to copy the content of Database FDX to Database FD.
It is necessary to copy the content of Database MDX to Database MD.
FDX/MDX (also saved on FD/MD) had been selected
FDX contents are saved on FD, so no special action is required.
MDX can be used as is.

6-20
 3. Copy

1 Database Editor is started.

You can start Parts Database Editor and Mark Database Editor from Board Editor.

Database Editor is started

64614-S1-00

2 The data of the copy origin is opened.

FDX/MDX had been selected
Select FDX for parts database and MDX for mark database.

FD/MD had been selected

Select FD for parts database and MD for mark database.

The data of the copy origin is opened

6
64615-S1-00
Database management

6-21
 3 “Save Database As” is selected and the save dialog is started.
FDX/MDX had been selected
Save as FD for parts database and as MD for mark database.

FD/MD had been selected

Save as FDX for parts database and as MDX for mark database.

Save Database As

64616-S1-00

It is preparation completion in the above.

6
Database management

6-22
2.4 Setting

2.4.1 YG Series or subsequent machine

n Machine setting
Set “Machine Information” “Installation setting” “Database Synchronize mode” of “Machine setting”.

Database Synchronize mode

64617-S1-00

Setting Explanation

None “Database Synchronous function” is not used.

“Database Synchronous function” is used. However, it becomes effective when

“Database type” is only “FDX/MDX”.
Synchronize by machine
Synchronous operation becomes invalid even if set to “Synchronize by machine”
when “Database type” is “FD/MD”.

Please read the board data again after the setting change. The setting becomes effective by this operation.

6
Database management

6-23
 n “Database path” setting
The database path of file is displayed to “Database path” of “Database utility” dialog.
When “Database Synchronize mode” is used, “Database path” of all the target machines for the same database
operation is set to the same path.

Database path

When “Database Synchronize mode” is used, this path is set to the path of sharing network PC usually.

64618-S1-10

2.4.2 Xg Series

n Machine setting
Set “Machine Information” “Installation setting” “Database Synchronize mode” of “Machine setting”.

Machine setting

6
Database management

64619-S1-10

6-24
 Setting Explanation

None “Database Synchronous mode” is not used.

The database operation (“delete”, “Backup”, “Restore”) is invalidated.

This is because there is a possibility of causing the obstacle in “Database
Synchronize by machine
Synchronize mode” when only the database FD file is deleted or only the
database FD file is restored.

Please read the board data again after the setting change. The setting becomes effective by this operation.

n “Database path” setting

The database path of file is displayed to “Database path” of “Database utility” dialog.
When “Database Synchronize mode” is used, “Database path” of all the target machines for the same database
operation is set to the same path.

Database path setting

When “Database Synchronize mode” is used, this path is set to the path of sharing network PC usually.

64620-S1-10

2.4.3 [Link]
The setting of “Database Synchronize mode” is set by “Option” in [Link].
Moreover, it is necessary to prepare it according to current Database Use.
Set up as follows to activate the “Database Synchronize mode”.
• Set “Use Database” to “FDX/MDX (with saving FD/MD)”
6
• Set “Database Synchro” to “Synchronize”. Database management
The “Database Synchro” can be set when the “Use Database” is set to “FDX/MDX (with saving FD/MD)”.
Specify the folder containing the parts database. The “Database path” should be the same as those of the machines that
operate with the “Database Synchronize mode”. It is set to “Common¥D_Base” under the YFacT folder by default.

Option Setting

64621-S1-00

6-25
 2.4.4 YRS
When YRS exists, it is necessary to set “Database Synchronize mode” by Database YRS.
The setting of “Database Synchronize mode” is set at “Application Setting” in YRS.
(It is only Database YRS to set.)

It starts from “Application Setting” of “Settings” of the menu.

Starting the Application Setting

64622-S1-00

Please put the check in “Use Database Synchro” of the dialog.

Put a check in the “Use Database Synchro” check box

64623-S1-00

6
Database management

6-26
2.5 Detailed explanation of operation
Only the parts database is supported to this software.
The mark database is not supported.

2.5.1 YG Series or subsequent machine

In the following explanations, ‘Database Synchronize function is effective’ means that the “Database
Synchronize function” has been set up*.
* Refer to “n Machine setting” of “2.4.1 YG Series or subsequent machine” in this chapter.

n “Parts database over view” dialog

1. In case of “Database synchronous function” is not effective

The list content of the type (FD file or FDX file) set to “Database type”* is displayed in“Parts database overview” dialog.
* Refer to “n Machine setting” of “2.4.1 YG Series or subsequent machine” in this chapter.
The following example has changed the part data name and the comment on parts of “DB No.10”.
• When “Database type” is FD, the list of the FD file is displayed.

When “Database type” is FD

Example of YG machine

64624-S1-00

• When “Database type” is FDX, the list of the FDX file is displayed.

When “Database type” is FDX

Example of YS machine 6
Database management

64625-S1-00

6-27
 2. In case of “Database synchronous function” is effective
The list content of the database FD file is displayed in “Parts database overview” dialog.
Only the data that exists in the database FD file becomes the object of the database operation in “Database Synchronize
mode”.
The data that exists only in the database FDX file is not displayed.
When the content of the database FD file and the database FDX file is the explanation 1, the content of the FD file is
displayed as follows.

In case of “Database synchronous function” is effective

64626-S1-00

n [New], [Write] (Copy back to database)

1. In case of “Database synchronous function” is effective
Both the FD file and the FDX file content can be updated, and both files synchronize.
2. In case except above-mentioned
Only the file (FD file or FDX file) set to “Database type”* is updated.
* Refer to “n Machine setting” of “2.4.1 YG Series or subsequent machine” in this chapter.

n [Set], [All set] (Read parts database)

1. In case of “Database synchronous function” is effective.
After the content of the database FDX file is read, the content of the database FD file is read. The content of the database
FD file is set about the overlapping parameter. As for the parameter part that exists only in the database FDX file, the

6
content of the database FDX file is set. The content of the database FD file is set for the data that exists only in the
database FD file.
2. In case except above-mentioned
The content of the file (FD file or FDX file) set to “Database type”* is set.
* Refer to “n Machine setting” of “2.4.1 YG Series or subsequent machine” in this chapter.
Database management

n [Delete] (Delete parts database)

1. In case of “Database synchronous function” is effective

Data is deleted from the database FD file and the database FDX file.

2. In case except above-mentioned

Data is deleted from the file of the type set to “Database type” *.
* Refer to “n Machine setting” of “2.4.1 YG Series or subsequent machine” in this chapter.
Reference
This feature is available on the YG12, YG12F, YG300, YS series only.

6-28
n “Database Utility” dialog
The database folder path can be set.
The database can be saved, and be restored.
Moreover, the content of “Database type” and “ Database Synchronize mode”* set can be confirmed.
* Refer to “n Machine setting” of “2.4.1 YG Series or subsequent machine” in this chapter.

“Database Utility” dialog [YG Series or subsequent machine]

Example of YG machine

The content of “Database Synchronize mode” of “Machine setting” is displayed.

In case of “Database type” is “FDX/MDX” and “Database Synchronize mode” is

“Synchronize by machine”, parts database synchronization becomes effective.
The content of “Database type” of “Machine setting” is displayed. Setting of
“Database type” is done at the “machine setting”.

The database path of file is set to “Database path” of “Database utility” dialog.
When “Database Synchronize mode” is used, “Database path” of all the target
machines for the same database operation have to be set to the same path.

64627-S1-10

n [Backup], [Restore] (Backup and Restore parts database)

1. In case of “Database synchronous function” is effective
The FD file and the FDX files are backed up.
2. In case of “Database type”* is “FD/MD” and “Database synchronize mode”* is effective
6
(Only for YG200 and YG200L) Database management
[Backup] and [Restore] buttons of the parts database were nullified.
So database cannot be saved and be restored.
This is because there is a possibility of causing the obstacle in “Database Synchronize mode” when only the FD file is
restored.
[Back Up] and [Restore] should be conducted with the YG Series or subsequent machine with FDX operation or [Link].
* Refer to “n Machine setting” of “2.4.1 YG Series or subsequent machine” in this chapter.
3. In case except above-mentioned
Only the file of the type set to “Database type”* (FD file or FDX file) is backed up.
It is not possible to restore it excluding the one that the backup was taken by “Database Synchronize mode” (one that
the FD file and the FDX file were backed up).
* Refer to “n Machine setting” of “2.4.1 YG Series or subsequent machine” in this chapter.

6-29
 2.5.2 Xg Series

n “Parts database over view” dialog

The list content of the FD file is displayed in “Parts database overview” dialog.

“Parts database overview” dialog

64628-S1-10

n [New], [Write] (Copy back to database)

When [New] (New registration) or [Write] (Copy back to database) is executed, only the database FD file is updated.

n [Set], [All set] (Read parts data base)

When [Set] or [All set] is executed, the content of the FD file is set.

6
Database management

6-30
 n “Database utility” dialog
The database folder path can be set. The database can be saved, and be restored.
Moreover, the content of “Database Synchronize mode”* set can be confirmed.
* Refer to “n Machine setting” of “2.4.2 Xg Series” in this chapter.

“Database utility” dialog

The content of “Database Synchronize mode” of “Machine setting” is displayed.

Setting of “Database type” is done at the “machine setting”.

The database path of file is set to “Database path” of “Database utility” dialog.
When “Database Synchronize mode” is used, “Database path” of all the target
machines for the same database operation have to be set to the same path.

64629-S1-10

n [Backup], [Restore] (Backup and Restore parts database)

In case of “Database Synchronize mode”* is effective [Backup] and [Restore] buttons of the parts database were nullified.
So database cannot be saved and be restored.
This is because there is a possibility of causing the obstacle in “Database Synchronize mode” when only the FD file is
restored.

6
[Back Up] and [Restore] should be conducted with the YG Series or subsequent machine with FDX operation or [Link].

n NOTE
When “Database Synchronize mode” is used, the software of the Xg machine is also strongly recommended to
improve to the supported version.
Database management

6-31
 2.5.3 [Link]
When “Database synchronous function” is effective in the following explanations, it means in the following
cases. (* Refer to “2.4.3 [Link]” in this chapter.)

n “Part database over view” dialog

“Part database overview” dialog

64630-S1-10

1.1In case of “Database synchronous function” is effective

The list content of the FD file is displayed in “Parts database overview” dialog.
Only the data that exists in the FD file becomes the object of the database operation in “ Database Synchro”.
The data that exists only in the FDX file is not displayed.
2. In case except above-mentioned
The list content of the type (FD file or FDX file) set to “Use Database” is displayed in “Parts database overview” dialog.

n [Copy Back to Database], [Copy Back to Database All], [Database Matching] (Database Write from Board)
[Copy Back to Database], [Copy Back to Database All] and [Database Matching] (Database Write from Board) operations
are as follows by the setting of “ Database synchronous function “.

6
1. In case of “Database synchronous function” is effective
The FD file and the FDX file become objects of the backup.
2. In case except above-mentioned
Only the file (FD file or FDX file) set to “Use Database” is updated.

n [Set from Database], [Set from Database All] and [Database Matching]
Database management

(Database Set to Board)

[Set from Database], [Set from Database All] and [Database Matching] (Database Set to Board) operations are as follows
by the setting of “ Database synchronous function “.
1. In case of “Database synchronous function” is effective
After the content of the FDX file is read, the content of the FD file is read.
The content of the FD file is set about the overlapping parameter part. As for the parameter part that exists only in the
FDX file, the content of the FDX file is set.
The content of the FD file is set for the data that exists only in the FD file.
2. In case except above-mentioned
The content of the file (FD file or FDX file) set to “Use Database” is set.

6-32
 n [Delete] (Delete parts database)
[Delete] (Delete parts database) operations are as follows by the setting of “Database synchronous function”.
1. In case of “Database synchronous function” is effective
Data is deleted from the FD file and the FDX file.
2. In case except above-mentioned
Data is deleted from the file of the type set to “Use Database” (FD file or FDX file).

n [Back Up], [Restore] (Backup and Restore parts database)

Execute [Backup] and [Restore] of database from the “Option Setting” of [Link].

“Back Up”, “Restore”

Backup” and “Restore” is executed with this button.

64631-S1-10

1. In case of “Database synchronous function” is effective

The FD file and the FDX file become objects of the backup.
2. In case except above-mentioned
Only the file of the type set to “Use Database” (FD file or FDX file) is saved.

c CAUTION
It is not possible to restore it excluding the one that the backup was taken by “Database Synchronize mode” (one that
the FD file and the FDX file were backed up)

6
Database management

6-33
 2.6 Limitations
Please begin operating from the situation in which the database FD synchronizes with the database FDX.
For Details, refer to “2.3 Preparation of database” in this chapter.

2.6.1 Limitations when beginning to operate

• About the data of a different database number in FD and FDX

Please do not use the data of a different data base number in FD and FDX.
It becomes the following actions when using it.
[Behavior of YG Series or subsequent machine (FDX operation)]
· The data that exists only in FDX is not read.
· he data that exists only in FD operates only by basic information of FD.

• About difference between FD and FDX (The data difference between machines)
When the data that exists also in FD and FDX is read, the data of FD is set to the basic parameter and the data of FDX is
set to the extended parameter in the machine that uses “Database Synchronize mode”.Therefore, when different data is
registered in the same database number with FD and FDX, the state that the extended parameter contradicts the basic
parameter is generated.

2.6.2 Other limitations

• Target database
The target database of this function is parts database.
The mark database is not supported for “Database Synchronize mode”.

• Limitation of soft version

Use software supporting “Database Synchronize mode” for all the YG Series or subsequent machines, Xg machines, and
[Link].
Contradiction might be caused in the database FD and the database FDX if there is a machine that doesn't set this
function.

• Limitation of parts database Backup and parts database Restore

The Backup and Restore of parts database becomes invalid at the following operation. “Backup” and “Restore” of
database should be conducted with the YG Series or subsequent machine with FDX operation or [Link] in the following
setting.

6
· In case of “Database Synchronize mode” is “Synchronize by machine” at the Xg machine.
· In case of “Database type” is “FD/MD” and “Database Synchronize mode” is “Synchronize by machine” at YG200 and
YG200L.

• Limitation of parts database Restore

Database management

Database can be restored only if there are both FD and FDX files in restoration source when YG Series or subsequent
machine (FDX operation) uses “Database Synchronize mode”.
The backup file where only FD or FDX is saved cannot be restored.

6-34
3. Unified database management support checklist
3.1 Introduction
This describes the implementation checklist for “Unified database management” and “Database Synchronize
mode”.
This procedure is designed to help prevent setting mistakes and omissions, and to facilitate setup.
Moreover, printing the introduction support check list enables a smooth implementation of the steps as you
proceed.
Refer to chapter “1. Unified Database Management function” and chapter “2. Database Synchronize mode
function” for details on the Unified Database Management and the Database Synchronize mode.

6
Database management

6-35
 3.2 Unified database management support checklist

3.2.1 Database backup

Please backup all databases used now.
Database backup Check

Was the backup of all existing databases completed?

3.2.2 The path for Unified database management

The path of unified database management is decided, and it fills it in on the following.
The path of the side on which the database be referred to is entered in a local path, the
path of the side which refers to the database is entered in a network path.
Determination of unitary management path Check

local path

network path

3.2.3 Database preparation

It is necessary that the database for “Unified database management” is prepared.
This is a very important thing for “Unified database management”.
Please prepare it surely.
Preparation of “Unified database management” Check

Was the database preparation for “Unified database management” completed?

Reference: Chapter “1. Unified database management function”, “1.5 Database collection”

3.2.4 Necessity judgment of “Database Synchronize mode function”

It checks whether “Database Synchronize mode function” is necessary at the time of“Unified database
management”.
Necessity judgment of “Database Synchronize mode function” Check

6 Necessary Unnecessary

It judges whether “Database Synchronize mode function” necessary referring to the table below.
A round sign is filled in necessary or unnecessarily.
Database management

Machine series combination Database Synchronize mode function

Only Xg series Unnecessary

Only YG Series and subsequent machines Unnecessary

Xg Series and YG Series or subsequent machines exist

Necessary
together

* The YG200/YG200L can be used as either “Xg Series” or “YG Series or subsequent machine”.

Refer to “3.2.5 Database Synchronize mode function is necessary” when Database Synchronize mode function
is necessary.
Refer to “3.2.6 Database Synchronize mode function is unnecessary” when Database Synchronize mode
function is unnecessary.

6-36
3.2.5 Database Synchronize mode function is necessar y
When judged as necessar y in “3.2.4 Necessity judgment of Database Synchronize mode function”
Here is an explanation of the procedure when it is necessary to use “Database Synchronize mode function”.
To use “Database Synchronize mode function”, a version of software has to be it after a certain version.
It upgrades after a check of the version of the present condition of [Link] and machine soft if needed.
The soft version of the [Link] of all unified database management objects is filled in, and confirm version up
necessity or not.
[Link]

Version Version up

necessary·unnecessary / Completion

necessary·unnecessary / Completion

necessary·unnecessary / Completion

necessary·unnecessary / Completion

necessary·unnecessary / Completion

The soft version of the machine of all unified database management objects is filled in, and confirm version up
necessity or not.
Xg series machine : Under V1.20R0.050 needs to be upgraded.
YG series machine : Under V2.41R0.220 needs to be upgraded.
YS Series machine: Compatible in all versions.

Model name Version Version up

necessary·unnecessary / Completion

necessary·unnecessary / Completion

necessary·unnecessary / Completion

necessary·unnecessary / Completion

necessary·unnecessary / Completion

necessary·unnecessary / Completion

necessary·unnecessary / Completion

necessary·unnecessary / Completion
6
necessary·unnecessary / Completion
Database management
necessary·unnecessary / Completion

necessary·unnecessary / Completion

6-37
 The database for “Database Synchronize mode function” is prepared.
This is a very important thing for “Database Synchronize mode function”.
Please prepare it surely.

Preparation of “Database Synchronize mode function” Check

Was the database preparation for “Database Synchronize mode function”

completed?

Reference: Chapter “2. “Database Synchronize mode” function”, “2.3 Preparation of database”

A machine is set up.

Machine setting Check

Is “3.2.2 The path for Unified database management” set for the database path?

Was “Database Synchronize mode function” setup confirmed?

Did it set up to all unified database management objects machines?

Reference: Chapter “2. “Database Synchronize mode” function”, “2.4 Setting”

[Link] is set up.

Setting of [Link] Check

Is “3.2.2 The path for Unified database management” set for the database folder?

Was “Database Synchronize mode function” setup confirmed?

Reference: Chapter “2. “Database Synchronize mode” function”, “2.4 Setting”

YRS is set up. (When it has YRS.)

Setting of YRS. Check

Was “Database Synchronize mode function” setup confirmed?

Reference: Chapter “2. “Database Synchronize mode” function”, “2.4 Setting”

6
Database management

6-38
3.2.6 Database Synchronize mode function is unnecessar y
When judged as unnecessar y in “3.2.4 Necessity judgment of Database Synchronize mode function”
Here is an explanation of the procedure when “Database Synchronize mode function” need not be effectively
done.
Refer to chapter “1. Unified Database Management”, “1.4. Setting” for details of setting.

The machine is set.

Setting of machine Check

Is “3.2.2 The path for Unified database management” set for the database path?

[Link] is set up.

Setting of [Link] Check

Is “3.2.2 The path for Unified database management” set for the database folder?

Is the use of the database correctly set?

6
Database management

6-39
 4. Series Database
4.1 Outline of functions
This section describes the following functions.

4.2 Detailed explanation of operation

It comes to be able to treat two Databases or more at the same time.
Ex) For YG Series Machine, For XG Series Machine

The following operations are executed using specified Database for each series.
• Set from Database
• Copy Back to Database
• Database Matching
• Database Matching from board

Details of operation

Xg Line
[Link]

Database for Xg

YG Line

Database for YG

6
63629-S1-00
Database management

6-40
4.3 Settings

4.3.1 Setting method

To enable this feature, open the “Data base” – “Database by model” tab, and change the following settings.

Series Database Setting

3
1 4

64632-S1-10

1 “Use” / “Not Use” drop-down list box

By selecting “Use” from this drop-down list box, the Database by model function becomes effective.
2 “Database Name” Edit Box
Enter the Database reference Name.
Please input a unique, simple name identifying the corresponding machine.

6
When the name has been input, the “Folder” and “Data type” items become editable.
However, when “FDX/MDX (also save as FD/MD)” is selected for “Database use”, “Data type” cannot be set.
The referenced database file does not change even if the database name is changed.
3 “Folder” Edit Box
It is the folder where the Database file is stored.
Database management
Please click [Browse] button, if you want to browse.
4 “Data type” drop-down list box
It is a data type of the Database.
Please select from [FDX] / [FDX(with saving FD)] / [FD].
Attention:
For the “COMMON Database” setting in the upper part of the screen the setting prior to selecting “Use” for “Database by
model” will remain effective.
Note that for machines, for which “Database allocation to each machine” is not performed as described in the following
section, this COMMON Database will be referred to.

6-41
 4.3.2 Database allocation to each machine
In the Series Database function, it is necessary to decide which Database of each machine to [Link] explains
the method as follows.

By right-clicking on the selected machine in the Board Explorer tree view a context menu can be displayed.
Please select “Referenced Database” from this menu.
The list of the Database is displayed in the menu.
Please select the Database allocated to the machine.

Database Allocation to each machine

64633-S1-00

From this database list select the database to be assigned to the machine.
In addition, when you register a new machine using the Board Explorer, you should allocate the Database.
Even during machine re-registration the Database can be changed if required.

c CAUTION
Use the COMMON Database setting in the Option Setting screen for the machine to which Database is not allocated.

6
Database management

6-42
4.4 Limitations
• When you edit the Database by the Database Editor, you must edit each database.
Because it doesn't synchronize between Databases divided by the series.
Don't worry. You can copy and paste a data between two or more Database Editors.
But be careful! A part of data is not preserved when data is copied from the Database of the FDX type, and it preserves
to the Database of the FD type.
• If the “Perform Set from DATABASE automatically after Board data is read.” was checked in the Option Setting, it is
executed using specified Database for each machine.
• If “Database allocation to each machine” (refer to Section 4.3.2) is not set up for a machine, the standard database
(COMMON Database) will be used.
• When the same Database is changed by two or more applications, the data preserved at the end becomes effective.
To avoid confusing, please do not start at the same time.
• If the setting of the Database was wrong, the error is displayed when you operate the Database. Please correct the
setting according to the message.

6
Database management

6-43
 5. Shape Database
5.1 Outline of function

n Regarding the shape database

The shape database allows separate management of tables for board data part names and database part names
which are related via a parts/shapes list.
Therefore, a common database can be managed, and even if the number of board data parts names is
increased, the administrative volume of the database can be decreased.

The role of the parts/shapes list

Parts/Shapes list
Board data Board data Database data Database data

Parts Parts

Parts Parts Parts Parts

Parts Parts

63650-S1-00

n About this feature

With this feature, as a wild card search for part names in the parts/shapes list is possible, by managing the
database according to shape distinction, less entries in the parts/shapes table are necessary and more parts can
be managed.
Part names found by the conventional exact match search take priority over wild cards for assignment.

Summary of this feature

6
Parts/Shapes list
Board data Board data Database data Database data

Parts
Database management

Parts Parts Parts Parts

Parts

Exact match search

1) Exact match search, 2) Wild card search

63651-S1-00

6-44
5.2 To use Shape Database
The setting method to use this function is on the Option Setting dialog.
Open [Shape Database] tab from [Database] tab, and change the following settings.

Option Setting - use Shape Database

64634-S1-10

1. It can be selected whether use or not use Shape Database. Please select “Use”.
2. Please specify file path of “Parts / Shape List”.
3. When the setting of “Perform Set from DATABASE automatically after Board data is read.” is effective, “Based on
Database number.” or “Referring Parts Shape List.” can be chosen.
4. In the Shape Database, the setting of this “Database Matching condition” is also effective. It can be selected whether
to match the name or the comment as a key by parts and databases.

6
Database management

6-45
 5.3 Details of function
This feature offers a conventional exact match search and a wildcard search for the “Search Shape Name from
Correspondence List” function.

Summary of data base management according to shape

Board data

Parts Name Database No.

Finding a shape
name from the Shape DB setting/Reverse
correspondence list Parts/Shape List setting

Parts Name
Database data

Shape Name Parts Name Database No.

Exact match search

Exact Match Search and Wild Card Search

61652-S1-00

For the Board Editor option “Set Shape Database Information” the following operation is performed.

1 Select “Database Support (B)” – “Set Shape Database Information (H)” from the
“Tools (T)” menu.
2 A part name matching the part name of the selected “Board Data” exactly is
searched for in the “Parts/Shape List”. If one is found, proceed to Step 3.
If no exact match is found, carry out a wild card search *2, *3 using the wild card on the part defined in
the “Parts/Shape List” *1.

3 If found in Step 2, the DB data corresponding to the part name after the 1001st in
the database and the shape name in the “Parts/Shape List” is located.
4 These contents overwrite the parts data.

6 Example for “Set Shape Database Information”

1. Select “Database Support (B)” – “Set Shape Database Information (H)” from the “Tools (T)” menu.
Database management

2. Search for the parts name in the parts/shape list using the board data part name.
1) Exact match search
Board data
2) Wild card search
Parts Name Database No.

Shape DB setting/Reverse
Parts/Shape List setting
4. Set the contents.
Parts Name
Database data

Shape Name Parts Name Database No.

3. Find an exact match (after the 1001st).

61653-S1-00

6-46
*1. Where wild card setting is possible
It is limited to “Part Names” in the “Parts/Shape List”. It is not possible to use a wild card for a part name in
the “Board Data” to find a part name in the correspondence list.

*2. Symbols used for wild cards

The symbols “?” and “*” can be used for wild card search. “?” stands for any one character, while “*”
denominates a character string (including spaces) of any length. As the search for an exact match takes priority
over the wild card search, they may be interpreted as normal letters.

*3. Wild card priority

The wild card search results may include multiple parts. In this case, on the shape correspondence editing
screen (“Board Explorer” - “ASCII Data Conversion” - “Edit Shape Correspondence”) parts are assigned by
priority from top (they can be sorted according to correspondence by pressing the Save button once).

Wild card search priority sequence

Match or search by wild card search

in order from top

64670-S1-10

6
Database management

6-47
 5.3.1 Database Matching by Shape Name / Database Matching from Board by Shape Name
Similarly in the matching, part data in the board data and part data in the database are related through the
“Parts / Shape List”.
In “Database Matching by Shape Name” and “Database Matching from Board by Shape Name”, there is no
function to register the data that doesn't exist in the database that exists in a usual Database Matching.
Therefore, it moves functionally as can called “Set from Database All by Shape Name” or “Copy Back to
Database All by Shape Name”.

5.3.2 Set from DATABASE automatically after Board data is read – Referring Parts Shape List
It is a function to perform "Full Shape Database setting" to all parts of the board automatically when Board data
is read from the Board Editor, enabled by a setting.
With this function, the mark data is not set.
Moreover, a similar function can be used in the Feeder Viewer.

5.3.3 Making of “Parts / Shape List”

In the Shape Database, “Parts / Shape List” is operated as an index.
Because this file is a file that did not exist before the introduction of the Shape Database, it is necessary to
register Part Name / Shape Name data newly.

When this function was added, “Transition Tool of Parts Database” that made “Parts / Shape List” from the
database that had been used so far was prepared to transit to Shape Database smoothly.
Moreover, Registration function of “Parts / Shape List” useful to maintain “Table for parts/shape” made once is
added.

6
Database management

6-48
5.4 Transition Tool of Shape Database
It explains the method of making the “Parts / Shape List” with a Transition Tool of Parts Database.

5.4.1 Outline of function

“Parts / Shape List” is made from board data and the database

Outline of operation

Database selection

Board Data Board Data Board Data

Database Database Database

Data Check Data Check Data Check

Parts name Parts name Parts name

selection selection selection

Shape name Shape name Shape name

selection selection selection

6
Parts / Shape List

63632-S1-00

Database management

6-49
 5.4.2 To use this function
Please set the “Shape Database” in the “Database” tab of the “Option Setting” to “Use”.

“Use” Shape Database

64635-S1-10

When the [Yes] button in the displayed “Transition Tool of Parts Database start confirmation” dialog is pushed
“Transition Tool of Parts Database” starts.

Start confirmation dialog

6 64636-S1-00

When the file path of “Parts / Shape List” is not set, it needs to be set first.
Database management

Push the [No] button in the “Transition Tool of Parts Database start confirmation” dialog, and specify the “Parts
/ Shape List” file path in the “Option Setting” dialog.
Then, press the [OK] button in the “Option Setting” dialog to close the dialog and re-start the application.
Open the “Option Setting” dialog again and set the Shape Database to “Use”.

6-50
5.4.3 Flow of processing and composition of each dialog

n Transition Tool of Parts Database

Transition Tool of Parts Database

64637-S1-10

Input data

nstallation Folder Installation folder of [Link] or machine

Parts Database file name File of database of Installation Folder

When the above-mentioned two points are set and the downward arrow button is pushed, the combination of
specified “Installation folder” and “Parts database file name” is registered in “The conversion data list”.

Initial registration of the conversion data list is done on the following condition.

Use kind of COMMON Database Registered database file name

FDX/MDX

FDX/MDX(with saving FD/MD)

[Link]

[Link] & [Link] 6

FD/MD [Link] Database management
If setting of the Series Database in Option Setting is “Use”, additional registration is done.

Use kind of Series Database Registered database file name

FDX [Link]

FDX(with saving FD) [Link] & [Link]

FD [Link]

To delete the registered conversion data, please select the line of the data that wants to delete, and push the
[Delete] button.
When the [Execution] button is pushed, part data is read from the board data and the “Parts / Shape List”
making processing is done.
When two or more this name data exists in the database, “Change Parts name” dialog is displayed.

6-51
 The end confirmation dialog is displayed when the check on the data of the registered all databases ends, and
the “Shape / Parts List” is made.

End confirm dialog

64638-S1-00

n “Change Parts name” dialog“

The “Change Parts name” dialog is displayed when two or more data of this name exists 1001st or more of the
databases.
The data name is changed on this dialog.

“Change Parts name” dialog

6
Database management

64639-S1-10

Display composition
Part database file name where two or more data of this name
Parts Database file name
exists
Name of database that name overlaps (When the matching key
Database name on the database side is “Comment”, database comment is used
instead of database name)
List of database number of data of the same name (When the
matching key on the database side is “Comment”, This list
Number of found database with same name
becomes a list of the database number of the same database
comment.)

6-52
To assume the data name to be unique, please delete data for the database number displayed in the list or
change the data name.
(The 1000th database numbers or less are not cared even if the plural exists. ) The change in the database is not
preserved until the change is fixed about the content changed on this dialog by Database change confirmation
dialog described later.
• To delete data
Select the database number to be deleted from the list, and push the [Delete] button.
• To change the data name
Select the database number to be changed the name from the list, input the database name after it changes to “Changed
Database name” text box, and push the [Change] button.

It is possible to correct it from the Parts Database Editor starting by pushing [DB Editor Reference] button.
When the database number becomes unique, push [Confirm] button.
This processing is repeated until the database number of all data that the name overlaps becomes unique.
The smallest number is used the 1001st or more of the retrieved database numbers when the [Confirm] button
is pushed without uniquely doing. Database data on other numbers is not used.
In this case, the confirmation dialog is displayed. If it doesn't become a problem, please push “Yes”.

Data that name overlaps in database

64640-S1-00

• Database change confirmation

The confirmation dialog whether to preserve the change in the database is displayed when changing by “Change Parts
name” dialog.

6
Database change confirmation dialog

Database management

64641-S1-10

Please push [Yes] when you preserve the corrected content.

The change is not preserved when [No] is pushed, and, in that case, the “Parts / Shape List” is made.

6-53
 n “Shape name selection” dialog
When two or more parts of this name exist in parts data, and the database number (since the 1001st) as which
the all are the same is not specified, “Shape name selection” dialog is displayed.

“Shape name selection” dialog

64642-S1-10

Parts name Name registered in “Parts / Shape List” as part name - When the part
name is specified for a matching key = Part name of part data
- When the part comment is specified for a matching key
= Part comment of part data
Shape name [ Comment ] Shape name [ Comment ] Name registered in “Parts / Shape List” as
shape name (, and [ comment ] ) - When the database name is specified
for a matching key
= Database Name [ Database Comment ] - When the database
comment is specified for a matching key
= Database Comment [ Database Name ]
* If either the database name or the database comment differs, it is
treated as another database
Original part data and database Part data, and Database information on database number that the part
data specify

Please locate the database related to the part name in the list, and select the shape database name from the
“Shape name [Comment ]” drop-down list box.
Afterwards, the correspondence data of the part name and the selected shape name is registered in “Parts /
Shape List” by pushing [Confirm] button.

• If the part name has already been registered in “Parts / Shape List”

6 The “Shape name selection” dialog is displayed in the same way as when it is not registered, and the shape name that
has already been related is displayed at the top of the list. (DB No. marked by “*”)

Shape name selection (has already been registered in “Parts / Shape List”)
Database management

64643-S1-10

This “Shape name selection” dialog is repeatedly displayed until all the part data is related to the database.

6-54
5.5 Registration function of “Parts / Shape List”
After “Parts / Shape List” file is made by “Transition Tool of Parts Database”, the correspondence table can be
maintained by the usual database operation.
It explains a necessary operation as follows for that.

It is also possible that “Shape Database” operation begins by using only this registration function without using
“Transition Tool of Parts Database”.

5.5.1 Outline of function

It is a function to add / edit the correspondence data to the “Part / Shape List”.
When the database is operated from the Board Editor, it is executed by the automatic operation.
It is useful to maintain it in addition after the “Part / Shape List” is made with the “Transition Tool of Parts
Database”.

5.5.2 To use this function

It is necessary to change to the setting that uses the Shape Database beforehand to use this function.

“Option Setting” dialog

“Shape Database” is set to “Use”

6
64644-S1-10
Database management

5.5.3 Outline of operation

When you operate the following database treatment, if the part name / shape name data that has been treated
now doesn't exist in the “Parts / Shape List”, registration function of “Parts / Shape List” starts.
· Set from Database
· Copy Back to Database
· Set from Database All
· Copy Back to Database All
· Database Matching
· Database Matching from Board
· Set from Database by Shape Name
· Copy Back to Database by Shape Name
· Database Matching by Shape Name
· Database Matching from Board by Shape Name

6-55
 n Set from Database / Copy Back to Database
If the combination of the part name and the database name (It was retrieved from the Database number)
doesn't exist in the “Parts / Shape List”, the registration function is executed. When a new record is added to
the database by “Copy Back to Database”, it is similar.

The correspondence data is made based on the following values.

Part Name Part name of part data selecting it now

Shape Name Database name that is retrieved from the database number of part data selecting
it now*) When a new database is made by “Copy Back to Database”, the name
of the database (in a word, names of former parts) corresponds to the shape
name.

Comment It is possible to input it freely

If the database that corresponds to database number of parts under the selection doesn't exist, the registration
function is not executed.
Moreover, when less than 1001st of database number is allocated, it is similar.
The purpose of this is do not to have to relate it from it to the previous database because the Shape Database
targets after the 1001st of the databases.

“Shape name registration” dialog

New registration

6
Database management

64645-S1-00

· If shape name cannot be specified

When the part data of a different database number in the same name exists, the database (shape name) related to the part
name cannot be specified.
The problem is not in the execution of “Set from Database” / “Copy Back to Database” when single part data has been
selected.
However, when two or more part data has been selected, such a situation might be happened.
In this case, the one near the head of the corresponding part data is given to priority.

6-56
n Set from Database All / Copy Back to Database All
If the combination is found that of the part name and the database name (It was retrieved from the database
number in the part data) doesn't exist in the “Parts / Shape List”, the registration function is executed.
When a new record is added to the database by “Copy Back to Database All”, it is similar.

The correspondence data is made based on the following values.

Part Name Part name of part data

Shape Name Database name that is retrieved from the database number of part data*) When a
new database is made by “Copy Back to Database All”, the name of the database (in
a word, names of former parts) corresponds to the shape name.

Comment It is possible to input it freely.

This combination of all the part data in the board data is displayed as a list.

When the database that corresponds to database number of the part doesn't exist, the registration function is
not executed.
Moreover, when less than 1001st of database number is allocated, it is similar.
The purpose of this is do not to have to relate it from it to the previous database because the Shape Database
targets after the 1001st of the databases.
Excluding such parts, when the combination of the part data and the database that should be registered exists
even by one, they are displayed as a list, and whether it registers is asked.

“Shape name registration” dialog

Registration of two or more data

6
Database management

64646-S1-00

· If shape name cannot be specified

When the part data of a different database number in the same name exists, the database (shape name) related to the part
name cannot be specified.
In this case, the one near the head of the corresponding part data is given to priority.

6-57
 n Database Matching / Database Matching from Board
If the combination is found that of the part name and the database name (It was retrieved from the part name)
doesn't exist in the “Parts / Shape List”, the registration function is executed.
When the corresponding part name is not found, and registers in the database newly after the 1001st of the
databases, it is similar.

The correspondence data is made based on the following values.

Part Name Part name of part data*) When the matching key on the part data side is
“Comment”, part comment is used instead of part name.
Shape Name Part name of part data ( = database name )
*) When the matching key on the database side is “Comment”, database
comment is used instead of database name.

Comment It is possible to input it freely.

This combination of all the part data in the board data is displayed as a list.

When the database of the same name as the part doesn't exist, the registration function is not executed.
Moreover, when database number is less than 1001st, it is similar even if the database of the same name is
found.
The purpose of this is do not to have to relate it from it to the previous database because the Shape Database
targets after the 1001st of the databases.
Excluding such parts, when the combination of the part data and the database that should be registered exists
even by one, they are displayed as a list, and whether it registers is asked.

“Shape name registration” dialog

Registration of two or more data

6
Database management

64647-S1-00

6-58
n Set from Database by Shape Name / Copy Back to Database by Shape Name
“Set from Database by Shape Name” / “Copy Back to Database by Shape Name” is match processing done by
assumption where the correspondence data already exists.
The correspondence data cannot be made from part data under the selection alone.
Therefore, when the correspondence data doesn't exist, it is necessary to make the correspondence data newly.

In this case, choose an existing database to relate names of parts selecting it now and names of the database.

“Shape name selection” dialog

Selection from existing database

64648-S1-00

When two or more parts are executed, this dialog is repeatedly displayed until the database name is related to
all those parts.

6
Database management

6-59
 n Database Matching by Shape Name / Database Matching from Board by Shape Name
The way that displays in the list and asks all those right or wrongs of registration (like “Set from Database All”,
“Copy Back to Database All”, “Database Matching”, “Database Matching from Board”) is not applicable in
“Database Matching by Shape Name” and “Database Matching from Board by Shape Name”.
The purpose is to have to select the related database as well as “Set from Database by Shape Name” and “Copy
Back to Database by Shape Name”.

Therefore, names of parts and names of the database will be related in selecting an existing database for all the
corresponding parts.

“Shape name selection” dialog

Selection from existing database

64649-S1-00

6
Database management

6-60
5.5.4 The flow of processing and the composition of each dialog

n “Shape name registration” dialog

A detailed explanation of each element that composes the “Shape name registration” dialog is as follows.

“Shape name registration” dialog

64650-S1-00

Item Explanation

No. Sequential number on this Parts / Shape data list

Registration The line where this check box is checked is registered in the “Parts / Shape
List”.

6
All checks enter immediately after this dialog is displayed.
Please remove the check about the correspondence data that doesn't want to
register
Parts name Name registered in “Parts / Shape List” as part name
DB No. Database number of original data
* If original data ( of database ) doesn't exist or it is not possible to specify it,
Database management
this item is not displayed.
Shape name Name registered in “Parts / Shape List” as shape name
Comment Comment registered in “Parts / Shape List”
* Editable It is a comment effective only on the “Parts / Shape List”, and neither the
substrate data nor the database also have the relation. Please use it freely to
confirm the meaning of the correspondence data later.
Original data (It is a frame under this dialog.) Details of original data of the selection line are
displayed.
* If original data doesn't exist or it is not possible to specify it, nothing is
displayed in this frame.
Register The data of the line where there is a check in “Registration” check box is
registered in the “Parts / Shape List”.
* When “Registration” check box doesn't exist, all data displayed in the list is
registered
Not register This dialog is shut without registering Parts / Shape data in this list.

When this registration screen is opened from the “Shape name selection” screen described later, the
“Registration” item of this list is not displayed. In this case, all data displayed will be subject to “Registration”.
(Refer to “n Case: the relation between parts and database doesn't exist at all” in chapter “5.5.5 New
registration”.)

6-61
 n Message of shape name registration confirmation
When parts without the shape name exist when “Set from Database by Shape Name” or “Copy Back to
Database by Shape Name” or “Database Matching by Shape Name” or “Database Matching from Board by
Shape Name”(hereafter, Shape DB operation) is executed, the relation processing of the shape name is
executed to those all.
If a large amount of such parts exist, you may want to do not the relation of the shape name but the Shape DB
operation over again.
Therefore, the confirmation message is first displayed once before the “Shape name selection” dialog is
displayed.

Message of registration confirmation

64651-S1-00

The shape name selection dialog is displayed by choosing [Yes] from this message dialog, and the registration
function of “Parts / Shape List” starts.

n “Shape name selection” dialog

A detailed explanation of each element that composes the “Shape name selection” dialog is as follows.

“Shape name selection” dialog

6
Database management

64652-S1-00

6-62
 Item Explanation

Title of this dialog The number and the status are added to the title of this dialog by the
format of “X/Y” in consideration of the case with two or more part names
to which the shape name is not found.
X : Sequential numbers for parts being processed now
Y : Total of parts that are not found of shape name
Parts Overview (It is a list in the upper part of this dialog. )
List of part name to which shape name is not found in Shape DB
operation
* All part names in this list become the same because it is composed of
the purpose that this dialog relates the shape name to one part name.
Database Overview (It is a list in the lower part of this dialog.)
It is a list of all databases that can be used from this line.
The shape name related to this part name is selected from this list.
In Shape Database, because it assumes to be a matching target after
the 1001st of the databases, the 1000th database or less are not
displayed in the list.
* When this list is double-clicked, “Link as shape name” that considers
the database of the line to be a shape name is executed.
Database Matching Condition It is the same meaning as the setting of this name of the Option Setting.
* Because the setting to select the shape name by part name vs.
comment or comment vs. comment is possible, it is displayed here for
the confirmation.
Parts Name Names of parts treated on this dialog
* When the part comment is specified for a matching key, the comment
on parts is displayed here.
Shape Name Shape name related to above-mentioned “Part name” The database
name of the line has been selected by Database Overview is displayed.
* When the database comment is specified for a matching key, the
comment on the database is displayed here.
Database Edit To edit the database of the line has been selected by Database
Overview now, the Parts Database Editor is opened.
Refresh Database Overview is updated in the latest database.
* Please acquire the database again pushing this button when the
database is updated from the outside (ex: Part Database Editor
opened from [Database Edit] button).
Link as shape name The name of the database has been selected in Database Overview is
related to this part name as a shape name.
Go to next without linking This dialog is shut without relating the shape name to this part name.
If parts that are not found shape name exist, the Shape name selection
dialog of those parts is displayed after this dialog is shut.
Cancel This dialog is shut without relating the shape name to this part name.
Moreover, all the shape names selection processing is discontinued
after this. Even if [Cancel] button is pushed, the relation of parts to
which the shape name was related before this is not lost.
6
Database management
If “Series Database” is effective, the data of the same name as the shape name has been selected in “Database
Overview” might not exist according to the Referenced [Link] that time, the state displays warning to
confirm whether there is [Link] selected the database by mistake, try to select the shape name again
pushing “Cancel” button.

6-63
 Warning : There is database not existing the shape name

64653-S1-00

6
Database management

6-64
5.5.5 New registration
It explains the operation example when the combination of part name / shape name is newly registered in
“Parts / Shape List” as follows.
Reference
Basically, it is equal to the operations that treat the database.
This registration function accompanies them.

n Case : database number has already been allocated

When an appropriate database number has already been allocated to parts in the board data, those relations
are used as it is as parts/shape data.
Please select the corresponding part data, and execute “Set from Database”.
After “Set from Database” is executed, the following Shape names registration dialog is displayed when the
combination of the corresponding part name / database name doesn't exist in “Parts / Shape List”.

Shape name registration

6
64654-S1-00

Please push [Register] button after marking the “Registration” check box of the data to be registered on this
Database management

dialog.
The combination chosen from the list as “Registration” target is registered as Parts / Shape data, and it is
written in the “Parts / Shape List” file.

A similar function operates even if “Copy Back to Database” or “Set from Database All” or “Copy Back to
Database All” is executed.
Moreover, a similar function operates for all parts from which they are selected when two or more parts have
been selected at the same time.
All the shape names can register to the part data by executing “Set from Database All” when a correct database
number is allocated to all parts.

6-65
 n Case : the part name and the shape name (database name) are the same
When the database has been (name) matching operated, the name is corresponding to the database related to
parts and them in the board data.
For this case, please execute Database Matching.
The shape name registration processing as which the part name and the shape name are the same is executed
by doing so.

After “Database Matching” is executed, the following Shape names registration dialog is displayed when the
combination of the corresponding part name / database name doesn't exist in “Parts / Shape List”.

Shape name registration

64655-S1-00

6
Please push [Register] button after marking the “Registration” check boxes of all data to be registered on this
dialog.
The combination chosen from the list as “Registration” target is registered as Parts / Shape data, and it is
written in the “Parts / Shape List” file.

A similar function operates even if “Database Matching from Board” is executed.

Database management

6-66
n Case : the relation between parts and database doesn’t exist at all
For instance, when they are parts newly added or parts that had not used the database up to now, the relation
is sure not to be done between parts and database.
For this case, please select the corresponding parts, and execute “Set from Database by Shape Name”.
After it fails in “Set from Database by Shape Name”, the following “Shape name selection” dialog is displayed
when the shape name corresponding to the part name doesn't exist in “Parts / Shape List”.

“Shape name selection” dialog

64656-S1-00

Please push [Link as shape name] button after selecting the database that wants to be related as a shape name
on this dialog.
To confirm it, the “Shape name registration” dialog is continuously displayed.

“Shape name registration” dialog

6
Database management

64657-S1-00

Select the [Register] button in this dialog. The combination displayed in the list is registered as Parts / Shape
data, and it is written in the “Parts / Shape List” file.
A similar function operates even if “Copy Back to Database by Shape Name” or “Database Matching by Shape
Name” / “Database Matching from Board by Shape Name” is executed.

6-67
 Reference
It is also possible to register Parts / Shape data via the “Part database overview” screen when there is no relation
between parts and databases at all.
Select parts to register from the list of the main view of the Board Editor. Then, open the “Part database overview”
screen, and select the database to be related to selected parts. If “Set from Database” is executed from [Set] button
on the “Part database overview” screen, the “Shape name registration” dialog is displayed to relate selected part and
database as part name / shape name.

“Part database overview” dialog

It opens from this button.

64658-S1-00

6
Database management

6-68
 n Case : the data that wants to register has not existed yet
First of all, please prepare all the data that wants to register when either the part data or the database has not
been registered yet.
The operation after that is similar to “Case : the relation between parts and database doesn’t exist at all”.

c CAUTION
Please take care about the following points when you prepare the part data or the database.
The registration function operates similarly when the part data is registered in the database or the database is
registered in the board data as parts.
Under such a condition, the part name and the shape name (database name) are quite the same, and it is registered
in “Parts / Shape List” when registering.
If you want to manage the part name and the shape name by a different name, please cancel registration pushing
“Not register” button on this registration dialog once.
In doing “Set from Database” after the part name or the database name is changed, these names are related
mutually.

Cancellation of shape name registration

6
Database management
64659-S1-00

5.6 Limitations
This function is an addition of the function to YGOS (off-line).
The Shape Database operation to use the Part / Shape List cannot be used in the machine.
As usual, please use the method of allocating the database number.

6-69
 6. Additional parameter handling on database
6.1 Outline of function
This function is to add pick position and tray parameters to the parts data handling on database.
These parameters are not handled on database before because they tend to change depending on machine
specifications or environments. But, there are some effective situations to add them according as your
management of the parts data.
• To manage special parts that its pick position is out of center with all machine commonly.
• To manage tray supplement condtions in each pallet with all machine commonly.
This function is added to select way for handling database with which usual way and new one.

6.2 Details of operation

Some parameters are changed to object to copy between the board data and the parts database, for example
“Set from Database” “Copy Back to Database” “Database Matching” “Database Matching from board”, and so
on (for details, refer to “6.2.4 Target command” below).

6.2.1 Pick Pos. Parameters

Additional parameter • Position Definition
• Pick Pos. X
• Pick Pos. Y
Condition They are object to copy if the following conditions are satisfied by each package.

Package Tape, Bulk

Position Definition Automatic, Relative
*They are not object if “Position Definition” of the target parts data is “Teaching”.

Package Stick
Position Definition Automatic, Relative
*They are not object if “Position Definition” of the target parts data is “Teaching”.

*They are not object if “Feeder Type” of the source parts data is “Multi Stick” or “Wide Multi Stick”.

Package Tray
Position Definition Teaching
*They are not object if “Feeder Type” of the source parts data is “Fix TF” or “Waffle Tray Changer”.

6
* If it is not satisfied the conditions above, they are not copied. The result data is same with the
situations this function is disabled.
Note When this function is enabled, the parameters above are able to edit on the “Parts Database Editor”.

6.2.2 Tray Parameters

Database management

Additional parameter • Tray Amount X

• Tray Amount Y
• Tray Pitch X
• Tray Pitch Y
• Pallet Pitch Z
• Count Out Stop
Condition They are object to copy if the source parts data satisfy the following conditions.

Position Definition Tray

*“Count Out Stop” is object to copy if “Package” is also “Stick”.
Note When this function is enabled, the parameters above are able to edit on the “Parts Database Editor”.

6.2.3 Comment
Additional parameter • Part comment
• Mark comment

6-70
6.2.4 Target command
[Link] Board Explorer

• Click right button on Line name or Machine name – [Database Utility]

[Set from Database All (A)]
[Copy Back to Database All (L)]
[Database Matching (M)] – [Database Set to Board (S)]
[Database Matching (M)] – [Database Write from Board (W)]

• The following button on the “Database Utility” screen selected via [Database Utility (U)]
from the [Data] menu
[Set from Database All]
[Copy Back to Database All]
[Database Matching]
[Database Matching from board]

Board Editor

• The following menu on [Tool (T)] – [Database Support (B)]

[Overview Database (O)] – [Set] button
[Overview Database (O)] – [Write] button
[Set from Database (S)]
[Set from Database All (A)]
[Copy Back to Database (C)]
[Copy Back to Database All (L)]
[Database Matching (M)] – [Database Set to Board (S)]
[Database Matching (M)] – [Database Write from Board (N)]
Note Besides these options, by selecting “Option (O)” from the “Maintenance (M)” menu and
opening the “Database” tab, if “Perform Set from DATABASE automatically after Board data
is read” is checked board data is read, automatic database communication is performed
internally, also being part of the data management.

6
Database management

6-71
 6.3 Settings
Select “Option (O)” from the “Maintenance (M)” menu and open the “Database” tab. Check the following
items.
• Check the options “Add Adsorption Position Parameters to Database Management” , “Add Tray Parameters to Database
Management”, “Add Comments to Database Management” on the “Option Setting” screen.

[Link] Option Setting

64671-S1-00

6
Database management

6-72
6.4 Moving existing data
If the parts data are already managed with the parts database, it is necessary to prepare the parts database to
introduce this function. Please read the following procedure and make use of existing data and this function.

6.4.1 Reason to prepare to introduce

New parameters to add database management are registered on existing database as follows.

Pick Pos. Parameters

Tape, Bulk, Stick Tray

Position Definition Automatic Teaching*

Pick Pos. X − 0.0

Pick Pos. Y − 0.0

* Tray parts is changed to [Teaching] automatically when it is written to database or set from database.

Tray Parameters
Tray Amount X 1

Tray Amount Y 1

Tray Pitch X 235.000

Tray Pitch Y 180.000

Pallet Pitch Z Normal

Count Out Stop Off

Comment
Blank or initially registered name

There is some possibility that the existing parts data is overwritten accidentally with above setting when it is
set from database. The following procedure is necessary to avoid them.

6
Database management

6-73
 6.4.2 How to prepare to introduce

1 Enable this function.

2 Disable function of “Set from database automatically”.
Select “Option (O)” from the “Maintenance (M)” menu and open the “Database” tab. Uncheck “Perform
Set from DATABASE automatically after Board data is read”.

3 Copy back all existing parts data in the board data to the parts database.
Use database utility. Please refer [Link] manual, Common, Chapter 2, 5.4.

4 Restore setting of procedure Step2.

5 Set the parts database data to all [Link] and machine using common database.
With perform set from database automatically after Board data is read, database utility, set from
database all, database matching, and so on.

Set the parts database data

Common Database

Network (LAN)

[Link]

Machine 4 Machine 3 Machine 2 Machine 3

63660-S1-00

6.5 Limitations
With the condition in which [Link] and machines use common database, if there is the machine that this

6 function is disabled, there are some following restrictions.

• New parameters to add handling on database by this function are not set by “Set from Database”, it is necessary to edit
after “Set from Database”.
• They are not copied back to database by “Copy Back to Database”. So the modifications are not set to other machines.
Database management

6-74
7. Par ts Database Duplicate Check
7.1 Outline of function
This function checks the database for duplicate data for the following reasons:
• Preventing matching operation with duplicate data.
• Preventing erroneous editing of data that is not target of matching.
• Preventing the creation of new duplicate data.
For the above reasons, duplicate data checking of the parts database is performed.

7.2 Settings
To check the database using the duplicate data checking function, select “Option (O)” from the “Maintenance”
menu and open the “Database” tab. Check “Duplicate Data Check”.

Parts database duplicate check

6
64672-S1-00 Database management
Item Meaning

Enable to check duplicate of Parts Database Duplicate check of the parts database is done.

It indicates the Check key during duplicate check of

Check Key the parts database. It is automatically decided from
[Database Matching Condition]
As the key, Duplicate check of the parts database is
Check Key: Name
done with the parts name of the parts data. Name.
As the key, Duplicate check of the parts database is
Check Key: Comment
done with the comment of the parts data.
As the key, Duplicate check of the parts database is
Check Key: Name&Comment
done with the parts name & comment of the parts data.

6-75
 7.3 How to setup
Prior to the introduction of this feature operation was performed even with duplicate data in the parts database.
With the introduction of this feature duplicate errors will occur.
Therefore, after the introduction of this feature it is necessary to first of all resolve the duplicate data using the
following function.

7.3.1 Duplicate Data Check Function

To facilitate the elimination of duplicate data in database editor component, the function “Database Duplicate
Check (D)” has been added to the “Parts database editor” – “Tool (T)” menu.
It checks for duplicate data and shows results in a table.

Database Duplicate Check (D)

64673-S1-00

And when parts database is opened, the same check is automatically done and shown the result. On the parts
database editor, the editing operation which creates new duplicate data can be done because it enables to
create and change the parts data. (Warning message is shown.)

7.3.2 Error Message and its Counter Measures

The following errors are displayed when the duplicate check is error. When the errors occur, please do the
each countermeasure.

■ Ea16280

Ea16280

6
64674-S1-00
Database management

Change the parts name or comment (check key) in the database overview, it is duplicate with the
Cause
existed data.

Counter Measures Enter the parts name or comment that is not duplicate with other data.

6-76
■ Ea16281

Ea16281

64675-S1-00

When “copy back to database all” is executed, there are duplicate data in the target parts data
Cause
for [Copy Back to Database] in the board data.

Counter Measures Change the parts name or comment of duplicate data.

■ Items displayed on the screen

Machine (P-Tool Only) Machine name that board data exist.

Parts No. Parts number of duplicate data.

Parts name Parts name of duplicate data.

Comment Parts comment of duplicate data.

Database name that the machine uses.
DB Name. (P-Tool Only) If it is common database, it is “Common database”.
If it is series database, it is each database name.
DB No.

■ Ea16282
Target database number for [Copy Back to Database].

6
Database management
Ea16282

64676-S1-00

Cause When “copy back to database all” is executed, there are duplicate data in the database.

Counter Measures Change the parts name or comment of duplicate data.

When the parts data is written to database ([Copy Back to Database] with overwriting to the
Cause
existed data), the duplicate data exists in the parts database.

Counter Measures Change the parts name or comment of duplicate data.

6-77
 ■ Ea16283

Ea16283

64677-S1-00

When the parts data is written to database newly, “the target parts data for [Copy Back to
Cause
Database] in the board data” and “the existed parts data in parts database” are duplicate.

Counter Measures Change either of the parts name or comment, and do again.

When “copy back to database all” is executed, “the target parts data for [Copy Back to Database]
Cause
in the board data” and “the existed parts data in parts database” are duplicate.

Counter Measures Change either of the parts name or comment, and do again.

■ Items displayed on the screen

Machine (P-Tool Only) Machine name that board data exist.

Parts No. Parts number of duplicate data.

Parts name Parts name of duplicate data.

6
Comment Parts comment of duplicate data.
Database name that the machine uses.
DB Name. (P-Tool Only) If it is common database, it is “Common database”.
If it is series database, it is each database name.
DB No. Target database number for [Copy Back to Database].
Database management

Duplicate DB No. Duplicate Database number in the database.

6-78
■ Ea16284

Ea16284

64678-S1-00

The database is loaded by parts database editor while[Database Duplicate Check] in the [Tool]
Cause
menu is executed, and duplicate data are found.

Counter Measures Dispose of the duplicate data using the parts database editor.

■ Items displayed on the screen

Parts Name Parts number of duplicate data.

Comment Parts name of duplicate data.

DB No. Database number of duplicate data.

On the above error screen, the result is able to save to the file. When tap the save button, the result is save to
CSV file.

Save to CSV file

6
Database management

64679-S1-00

■ Ea16285

Ea16285

64680-S1-00

Cause Create duplicate data by Replace, Edit, or Copy&Paset.

Counter Measures Enter the parts name or comment that is not duplicate with other data.

6-79
 7.4 Limitations
• This function supports parts database only. Mark database and Print Inspection database are not supported.
• The target parts database for duplicate check is 1001 or later, it is the same as database matching function.

6
Database management

6-80
 Index
Editing the data optimizing conditions 3-33 Creating procedure 1-30
Executing data optimization 3-35 Pick parameters 1-41

INDEX
Setting the optimizing conditions 3-30 Pitch distribution 1-91
Starting and quitting the Optimizer 3-1
Pre-dispense parameters 1-27
A Dip parameters 1-44
Printer settings 1-114
About this manual i Dispense distribution 1-107,1-109
Printing the Board data 1-113
Alternative components 1-67 Dispense parameters 1-70
Print preview 1-114
B Dot dispense information 1-109
S
Dot Dispense parameters 1-28
Badmark Sequence data 1-104
Setting the Badmark parameters 1-24 F
Sequence parameters 1-15
Badmark functions 1-23 Feeder setup lists 3-39
Shape parameter, mark for solder print
Ball lead position information 1-37 Feeder type 1-36
2-26
Block badmark 1-23 Fiducial parameters 1-19
Shape parameters
Block distribution 1-95 H Mark 1-75
Block distribution return 1-98 Height correction 1-104 Parts 1-50
Block fiducial function 1-20 Height correction distribution 1-106 Side-view camera parameters 1-69
Block offset 1-91 Height parameters 1-26 Solder print data
Board badmark 1-23 I Board data setting 2-4
Board data Cleaner data setting 2-21
Interference check 1-110
Creating new Board data for individual Mark data 2-23
L
machines 1-5 Mask data setting 2-11
Local fiducial functions 1-21 Registering a new Board data name 2-1
Deleting Board data 1-7
Editing the Board data 1-91 M Selecting the Board data 2-3

Printing the Board data 1-113 Mark data, solder print 2-23 Squeegee data setting 2-15

Registering Board names 1-2 Creating procedure 2-24 Squeegee data setting 2-15
Saving the Board data 1-3 Shape parameters 2-26 Squeegee detail setting 2-19
Selecting Board data for individual machines Vision parameters 2-28 T
1-7 Mark information 1-71 Tray parameters 1-55
Selecting the Board data 1-4 Basic parameters 1-73
V
Board data detail setting, solder print 2-8 Creating procedure 1-72
Vision parameter, mark for solder print
Board data setting, solder print 2-4 Mark information parameters 1-71
2-28
Board data, solder print 2-1 Mask check position 2-14
Vision parameters
Board data structure 1-1 Mask data detail setting 2-14
Mark 1-77
Board fiducial function 1-20 Mask data setting 2-11
Parts 1-47
Board information 1-8 Mount parameters 1-13,1-45
Board information parameters 1-8 N
Board parameters 1-9 Nozzle interference 1-111
C O
Cleaner data setting 2-21 Offset parameters 1-17
D Optimizer
Database 1-79 Checking the optimization results 3-37
Copying data from the database 1-79 Outputting the feeder setup lists 3-39
Editing the database 1-84 Quitting the Optimizer 3-3
Storing the data into the database 1-81 Starting the Optimizer 3-1
Using the database 1-79 Optimizer window 3-4
Database matching 1-86 Option parameters 1-66
Data check 1-111 P
Data optimization Parts data
Changing the line to be optimized 3-41 Moving the data between machines 1-99
Checking the line information 3-7 Multiplying the parts data 1-100
Checking the nozzles 3-38 Renumbering the parts data 1-102
Checking the number of feeders 3-8
Parts information 1-29
Checking the number of nozzles 3-7
Editing the parts information 1-99
Defining the optimizing conditions 3-7,3-42
Parts information parameters 1-29
Editing multiple files of optimizing conditions
Pats information
3-34
Basic parameters 1-31

S-1
User’s Manual September 2010
Version 2.00
Programming PC Software
Factory Tools
P-Tool